Home

FLUKE 2640A, 2645A Service

Contents

1. non m J3 E 1 RE 1 u2 peleke 2 ater B PEEB B x RigER18 8654 5 50 29 EE 12834 ora BE ve LO Gg J10 efe 211 S ERE 8 Sie 010 74 R590 8 5 EERE TN uma aia RIA PEU 0 8 ER g pu el CERBER E E aa fa Am P 020 VR4 CRIBCRI9CRECRS RII3 CR10 11 14 Heec mm os BO 9 kad luis m NM Rag RTI Bz K21 c Eg 22 E38 EE 8 Rod R99 E58 BEE gt E 2 1 U24 K22 K16 K10 g z Tei BE TP2 mE S K23 K13 K6 K20 3 glaS afe SI 7 EF i S ead 15 Q23
2. 9 m J3 P1 u2 BEBE 3455 168 zm BRE as 2222 neg sU 11021 R29 4 R30 m u7 B R32 R33 R345 05 U6 gt R24 5 B m C29 R158 R250 8115 ale TA NI C28 L48 116 zz ar gt T s E 8 an 8528 E22 t PAR 5 R153 cor area ag B PART E uis Lute gU 018 5 28 020 7 Nees R13 Acro 5 B gi Gu a M30 MJ 971 ZF Bs ava M SR U22 R33 i Css B 8 U24 C57 RED A 48 C58 60 725 g 1 la _ s IP Wl sc E K24 K13 K15 K17 a SITE C64 C65 REOS S S K12 K14 K16 K18 K20 ames 8 RE43 12 95 07 933 ana 079 C73 alte K22 5 H ad 27 kzi K2 K4 K6 K8 K10 crs d Piz E us RIZS dE es 017 cas z ze TB 018 REA 222 eter R130 MEI 2e 0e 0e 0e
3. 55 3 Places Figure 3 2 2640 and 2645A Overall Assembly Details Sheet 3 of 3 General Maintenance 3 Disassembly Procedures Disassembling the Front Panel Assembly 3 13 Complete the following procedure disassemble the Front Panel Assembly 1 Place the Front Panel Assembly on a protective surface to prevent any scratching or damage to the assembly Release the tabs at the sides and top that hold the A2 Display PCA F on the back of the Front Panel Assembly then lift the pca out of its securing slots NOTE The Display PCA provides space for securing screws which are used only if one or more tabs are broken If the pca has one or more securing screws remove these as well To remove the elastomeric keypad G grasp the keypad and with a gentle motion pull the keypad free of the assembly To remove the display window release the two snaps along the bottom edge and push the window free of the assembly N CAUTION Avoid using ammonia or methyl alcohol cleaning agents on either the Front Panel or the display window These types of cleaners can damage surface features and markings Use an isopropyl based cleaning agent or water to clean the Front Panel and the display window Removing the A1 Main PCA 3 14 Complete the following procedure
4. 01975 R128 R130 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly 4 7 igure F 7 19 2640A 2645A Service Manual NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED STAL INTERRUPT STAL INTERRUPT 1 ALLRESISTORS ARE IN OHMS A D INTERRUPT ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MICROFARADS DE TNT VCC DATA lt 7 0 gt B ADDRESS lt 16 0 gt N28F001BX B150 PWR DOWN C10 R39 10S 122 4 TOK 175 4 167 47 TOUT2 PB6 TIN2 PB5 OUT1 PB4 TIN1 PB3 MC68302 U5 R58 1 1 A MEM IMAGE 15 36 MHZ LATCH ENABLE DATA STROBE WRITE SPRXD CTSS LISYUCDT PA14 DACK IG LIGRCIST T L1RXD RXD1 PAO RXD2 PA1 TXD2 PAA CTS2 PAS ATS2 _ LTRORTSTIGCIDCL LITXD TXD1 PA6 CD2 SDS1 L1SYO TCLK1 PA7 SDS2 BRG2 PA8 RXD3 9 L1CLK RCLK1 PA2 RCLK2 PA3 TCLK2 PATO RCLKS PATI TCLK3 PA12 BRG3 PA13 DREQ_ _ SPCLKCDZ SPTXD RTSS CONTROL BUS 53 54 79 80 SERIAL BUS NOT INSTALLED ON PRODUCTION UNITS MIT N TO MAIN PWB 1 U4 J10 MC145406DW 3 TEST PORT XMIT RECV DATA XMT DATA a VSSR R
5. 2 0 Instrument Configuratfi n 5 11 5 7 RS232 Command Set 5 8 Power on Reset Instrument State 5 0 2 10 Selftest Error Codes tenente pete 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems 5 11 Hints for Troubleshooting 5 12 Main PCA Jumper Positions eese viii 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 6 1 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 A2 Display PCA Initialization Routines A3 A D Converter PCA Jumper Positions Calibration Constants Files on the Firmware Diskette 2640A 2645A Final Assembly PCA Assembly A2 Display PCA Assembly 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly Tables continued NetDAQ Servic
6. 8 74HC4053 BREAK RESET CIRCUIT SST109 RECV DATA R70 200 IG RESET 3 LM393DT R2 Q4 SST109 R83 2N7002 7 402 25PPM C AD706 4 ws VBOOT FROM SHEET 1 2640A 4501 3 R71 i 28 7K 50PPM C SST175 2645A 1003 Sheet 4 of 6 Figure 7 4 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 23 CHASSIS 2640A 2645A Service Manual REF RTRN RJ RTRN VDD RJ SENSE CH12HI CH12LO HI SENSE CH13HI CH13LO LOSENSE CH14HI CH14LO CH15HI CH15LO CH6HI CH6 LO CH16HI CH16LO CH17HI CH17LO CH18HI CH18LO CH19HI WP19 CH19LO CH10HI CH10LO CH20 HI CH20 LO 7 24 Figure 7 4 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont
7. 4 36 Calibration Procedure iv Contents continued 4 37 VDC Calibration 4 38 VAC Calibration 4 39 Resistance Calibration Procedure 4 40 Frequency Calibration Procedure ssl 4 41 Calibration Procedure Manual 4 42 Manual Calibration Commands 4 43 Manual VDC Calibration Procedure 4 44 Manual VAC Calibration Procedure 4 45 Manual Resistance Calibration Procedure 4 46 Manual Frequency Calibration Procedure Diagnostic Testing and 521 Introductions esee 5 2 Servicing Surface Mount Assemblies 5 3 Error Detection m 5 4 FLASH ROM Parameter Defaults 5 5 Background 5 6 Internal Software naa 5 7 Retrieving Error Codes using 5 232 2 2 5 8 Retrievin
8. Signal TR2 TR1 TRO Switches 2W Ohms VAC Frequency VDC lt 3V OTC TC CH1 10 1 0 1 K21 K23 2W Ohms VAC Frequency VDC 3V OTC TC CH11 20 1 1 0 K22 K24 VDC gt 3V CH1 10 lo o 1 K23 VDC CH11 20 0 1 0 K24 4W Ohms 1 1 1 ket Kea Table 2 13 Channel Bits Channels Enabled CH3 CH2 CH1 CHO iii 0 2 12 0 0 0 1 3 13 0 0 1 0 4 14 0 1 5 15 0 1 0 0 6 16 0 1 7 17 0 1 1 0 8 18 0 1 1 9 19 1 0 0 0 10 20 1 The time required for the channel switches to settle is given in Table 2 14 Tree and Channel Switch Settling Times Note that for both the 2645A and the 26404 the switches are guaranteed to have a select time that is longer than their deselect time This means that you can select a new channel at the same time as you deselect the previous channel without worrying about shorting together the two channels Table 2 14 Tree and Channel Switch Settling Times Description 2640A 2645A Select 1 ms 150 us 120 us Deselect 1 ms Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description Function Relays 2 94 There are three relays K25 K26 and K27 that route the signal to different portions of signal conditioning circuitry on the A D board These are relatively slow relays requiring 6 ms to change position Each relay has a SET and RESET position which are configured by pulsing the SET and RESET coil
9. SPRXD CTSS LISYICDT IG RESET HALT CONTROL BUS 1 1 LIGRCTST T L1RXD RXD1 PAO RXD2 LIRORTSTIGCIDCL L1TXD TXD1 SDS1 L1SYO TCLK1 PA7 SDS2 BRG2 PA8 RXD3 PAQ TXD3 PA10 RCLK3 1 PA12 BRG3 PA14 DACK_ LICLKRCLKI SERIAL BUS R49 10K R53 10K R54 10K R55 10K R57 10K NOT INSTALLED ON PRODUCTION UNITS PWB J10 Wiasaospw RECV DATA XMT DATA HCOM SSR MC 1454050 TEST PORT LT 1129 5 8 50 lt 2 OTCCLK OTC EN OTC DISCHARGE TEST PORT voor FROM SHEET 4 2640A 1003 Sheet 1 of 6 Figure 7 3 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 13 2640A 2645A Service Manual DATA lt 7 0 gt DATA lt 7 0 gt 74AC32M LATCH ENABLE 0 ADDRESS lt 16 0 gt 74AC32M SERIAL BUS lO MC3 R89 47 10 MC5 IO MC61 W s 10 MC6 IO MC64 AAA 10 MC8 IO MC65 DREF IO MC11 IO_MC67 MS 47 IO NC13 IO MC69 IO NC14 IO MC72 IO MC16 IO MC73 CMP IO MC17 lO MC75 IO 19 IO MC77 DE INT R148 47 IO MC21 IO MC80 IO MC24 IO MC83 INT AMA F91 47 IO MC25 IO MC85 10 MC27 IO MC86 AZ AMA R90 47 IO MC29 IO MC88 10 MC32 IO
10. lt lt 7 09 45 CCLK MO RTRIG INIT IO XINIT M1 RDATA HDC IO M2 IO LDC IO RDY BUSY RCLK IO DOUT IO DONE PG FLASH PROGRAMMING POWER SUPPLY vcc 7 tL 47 MAX732CWE C97 m Coo 140 lt 7 0 gt 0047 14 VPP GND SW_GND 15 VOUT 50 D lt 15 0 gt A lt 23 1 gt 7 2645A 1001 CONTROL Sheet 6 of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 7 8 Schematic Diagrams 7 INPUT VCI U3 Z3 DI lt 7 0 gt m AA CR15 BAW56 4 23 ge 16 Z1 10 350K 55K 48 a o x z 6 CR17 MMBD7000 9 017 10 7 ULN200 9 Ut UNUSED U3 LM324D 14 11 ULN200 U4 LM324D 14 gt OD 1 09 co DIGITAL I O SHEET 2 DCH DCL 69 On CO TRIGGER ALARMS sO a 79 N 7 L2 L1 6T 1T d 7 c52 1053 180PF T 1000 R59 pi
11. Figure 3 3 Power Input Connections at the Power Switch 4 Reconnect the brown wire that leads to the transformer at the fuseholder R Refer to Figure 3 2 as required 5 Reconnect the white wire that leads to the transformer at the input connector L Refer to Figure 3 3 as required Installing the Fuseholder 3 25 Complete the following procedure to install the fuseholder R 1 Install the single screw T securing the fuseholder 2 Install a 15 100 amp 250V time delay fuse in the fuseholder PN 944629 3 Reconnect the two terminals brown wires S to the fuseholder Installing the Power Switch Input Connector 3 26 Complete the following procedure to install the power switch input connector L N WARNING Make sure you correctly connect the switch and power terminals at the power switch There is a risk of electric shock if the connection is incorrect Refer to Figure 3 3 for the input power terminal connections 1 Position the power switch input connector so the input connector portion is towards the top and the switch portion is towards the bottom of the instrument then snap it into place 2 Reconnect the five terminals to the power switch input connector Q Refer to Figure 3 3 as required Note that either red wire can be connected to either switch terminal The power input connections must be exactly as shown in Figure 3 3 General Maintenance 3 Assembly Procedures Install
12. oi Input Signal Conditioning eee Analog to Digital a d Converter eese Inguard Microcontroller seen Channel Selection Open Thermocouple Check 2 10 A4 Analog Input PCA Block Description 20 Channel Terminals eet Reference Junction Temperature 1 PCA Circuit Description Power Supply Circuit Description Digital Kernel ite tette tine Digital Inputs and A2 Display PCA Circuit Description Connector rae Front Panel Switches 2 Display Beeper Drive rene Watchdog Timer and Reset Circuit eel Display Controller eene A D Converter PCA Circuit Description Stallion Chip trees neret re Eee de eee Input Protection Input Signal Conditioning eene Function Channel Selection Circuitfry aaa D
13. 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 co oo 5 co co 1 o m MO SA1 BDO SA2 BD1 SA3 BD2 SBHE BD3 BD4 ECS BD5 EIOR IOR BD6 R77 RV2 C23 EIOW IOW BD7 1M 910V l 001 1W 3KV 1600V U DTACK BD9 BD10 RDYPOL BD11 RDY BD12 BD13 CHRESET BD14 BD15 IRQA IROB RMTRST e 10 BAS E T IRQC CNTRL T4 IRQD w INTSELO CIP 65 45 INTSEL1 CIN DIP DREQ DIN DMACK DOP EOP DOP DON SMEMRD DON AEN ALE TPIN TPIP TPONB MODE2 TPONA MODET TPOPA MODEO TPOPB RBIAS CLKO D lt 15 0 gt 20 0 MHZ 4 lt 23 1 gt 89 C38 I 22PF T 22PF CONTROL D lt 15 0 gt lt 23 1 gt 2640 1001 CONTROL Sheet 4 of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 7 6 POWER ON RESET AND POWER FAIL DETECTION RESET NOTE U11 AND U36 ARE BIASED BY VBB U10 MAX694 L 1000PF PRODUCTION ASSEMBLIES U10 U11 U36 VBB 96 C42 C20 1 1 1 25V 25V 25V POR 1 HC00 RTC REAL TIME CLOCK D lt 15 0 gt A lt 23 1 gt CONTROL 4 2
14. Notes Table 6 5 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator Q19 20 23 Q24 Q11 12 14 Q16 Q17 18 21 Q22 Q33 R1 6 23 R38 42 46 R47 49 57 R60 144 145 R2 3 20 44 R45 78 95 R98 R5 61 65 R101 147 R7 14 17 R19 24 37 R43 59 109 R115 118 153 R167 169 R15 102 104 R126 134 R16 108 136 R137 R21 R22 62 106 R107 129 131 R149 150 154 R158 160 164 R165 R48 85 92 R121 148 R58 R66 68 70 R72 73 81 R84 R67 R69 96 R71 R74 97 105 R120 122 124 R142 143 R75 76 R77 R79 R80 R82 R83 R93 Description TRANSISTOR SI N JFET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI NPN SELECT IEBO SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI PNP SMALL SIGNAL SOT 23 RES CERM 10K 1 0 1W 100PPM 0805 RES CERM 470K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 10K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 07K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 47 5 0625W 200PPM 0603 RES CERM 100K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 30 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 5K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 10 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 47 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 698K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 200 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 7 5K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 2K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES MF 28 7K 1 0 125W 50PPM RES CERM 47K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 33 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES
15. 1 37 2645A Four Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient 1 38 2645A Four Wire RTD Specifications 1 39 2645A Thermocouple General Specifications 1 40 2645 Thermocouple Specifications 1 41 2645A Frequency Accuracy Specifications 1 42 2645A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications 2 1 Microprocessor Interrupt Sources a nene 2 2 Booting Microprocessor Memory Map eene 2 3 nstrument Microprocessor Memory 2 4 A2 Display Power Supply Connections esee 2 5 Front Panel Switch Scanning 2 6 Display Initialization Modes 2 7 Range of Buffer 2 8 Measurement Matrix for DC 2 9 Measurement Matrix for 5 2 10 Measurement Matrix for AC Volts 2 1 Analog Digital Converter Measurement Cycle 2212 Tree m 2 13 Bits eoe 2 14 Tree and Chan
16. Digital Input Threshold eee Digital Input Digital and Alarm Output Drivers Totalizer enero orna External Trigger Circuits eene A2 Display PCA Circuit PCA Connector ie etudes ies Beeper Drive Circuit nte eia eo Pre Watchdog Timer and Reset Circuit eese Display tette cnn A D Converter PCA Circuit Description Stallion Chipa ae S u Input Signal Conditioning Function Relays g Channel Selection Circuitry eene DC Volts and Thermocouples Measurement Circuitry Oh ms RTD Measurement Circulitry AC Volts Measurement Circuitry seen Frequency Measurements esee Active Filter ACV Filter Vo An Itage Reference Circuit alog Digital Converter Circuit eese INCEST ALC Deimte grate u ua saa aa Deinte gr te2 i neri
17. Troubleshooting Relay Problems A4 Analog Input PCA Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Calibration Failures eene Retrieving Calibration Constants eese Loading Embedded Instrument Firmware Firmware Diskette Loading the Main Firmware 2 Loading the A D Firmware Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Introduction Introduction 5 1 The instrument provides error code information and semi modular design to aid in troubleshooting This section explains the error codes and describes procedures needed to isolate a problem to a specific functional area Finally troubleshooting hints for each functional area are presented But first if the instrument fails check the line voltage fuse and replace as needed If the problem persists verify that you are operating the instrument correctly by reviewing the operating instructions found in the instrument Users Manual N WARNING Opening the case may expose hazardous voltages Always disconnect the power cord and measuring inputs before opening the case And remember that repairs or servicing should be performed only by qualified personnel Required calibration equipment is listed in Chapter 4 of this manual Signal names followed by a are active asserted low Signal names not s
18. 2640A 1003 Sheet 5 of 6 Figure 7 3 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 17 2640A 2645A Service Manual Ui3 9 16 ULN2004 ULN2004 FROM SHEET 2 013 5 ULN2004 2004 ULN2004 ULN2004 10 13 ULN2004 015 9 VZ pb ULN2004 7 15 9 VZ BAT54A 3 16 ULN2004 BANK 0 FROM SHEET 2 4 BATS4A TR2 ULN2004 OHMS NOT_OHMS 9 FROM SHEET 2 viS Vz ULN2004 015 9 VZ 10 5 7 55 K24 ULN2004 TRI BANK 1 FROM SHEET 2 CH1 CH2 CH3 CHANNELS ENABLED 11 212 3 13 4 14 5 15 6 16 7 7 8 18 9 19 10 20 NONE NONE NONE 74AC32M 9 NONE FROM SHEET 2 CH3 m NONE CH2 a 11 NONE jun 2640A 1003 CH1 74AC32M Sheet 6 of 6 74AC32M Figure 7 3 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 18 Schematic Diagrams 7 m 154 RISO C39 C38 149 B
19. The RS 232 commands are described in this chapter using the following format e Command The command name and syntax e Description A description of the command e Parameters A description of the required and optional parameters e Response A description of data returned e Restrictions When the command is allowed disallowed e Notes Any additional useful information Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Using the RS 232 Interface Command IDN Description Identification query Parameters None Response FLUKE model serial number versions model 2640A 2645A lt serial number gt 0 lt versions gt MMx x MBx x F PAx x ABx x D0x 0x LMxx xx MM is for outguard main software MB is for outguard boot monitor software FA is for 2645A inguard A D main software PA is for 2640A inguard A D main software BAis for inguard boot software D is for display microprocessor software LM is for FPGA logic Restrictions None Notes The lt serial number gt field is always zero The instrument could store the serial number in flash and let it be set once from the RS 232 interface But if a replacement board were ever sent to a customer it would not have the serial number Command OPC Description Operation complete query OPC causes the instrument to output an ASCII 1 Parameters None Response lt state gt 1 Restrictions None Notes OPC is used in conjunction with a no
20. eee Interconnection Cables and Components Operating Instructions Organization of the Service Manual COMVENUONS i uu Specifications 2640A 2645A Combined Specifications 2640A 2645A General Specifications 2640A 2645A Environmental Specifications 2640A 2645A Input Output Capabilities Dieital Trigger eaves awata ERI RENE ITE 2640 2645 Totalizer 2640A 2645A Real Time Clock and Calendar 2640A Specifications n sensere nente tenete nnne teet ete 2640A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2640A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2640A Four Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2640A Two Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2640 Four Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement Specifications caimans a ERE 1 17 2640A Two Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement M 1 17 2640A Thermocouple ITS 1990 Measurement
21. CH3 HI CH3 LO L3 CH3 L56 rx Iron 5U 33U CH13 HI L13 157 E HI LO nom won i 6 824 50 33U CH4 HI 14 CH4 158 CH4 LO een H H LO 5U 33U SHEET 3 CH14 HI ren CH14A 114 14 159 CH14 LO 14 50 33U K5 CH5 HI nen 5 6 L5 CH5 160 CH5 LO Jen CH 5U 33U Al 5 ARM CH15A CH15 LO ee 50 330 CH6 HI CH6 LO 16 6 162 x aon 5U 33U CH16 CH16 LO 116 CH16 163 LON 5U 33U K7 HI CH7As Zs L7 CH7 164 B noon LON 5U 33U CH17 HI CH17 LO 117 17 165 50 33U K8 CH8 nen 5_ L8 166 CH8 LO C H8 H 5U 33U CH18 HI nen CH18A L18 CH18 L67 CH18 LO 0n noon CH18 5U 33U K9 CH9 HI rn 5 CH9 LO 19 9 168 H9 50 33U 142 8 CH19 HI ron CH19 LO 119 19 169 CHASSIS 50 33U K10 wen CHI0A 5_ 6 110 CH10 L7 CH10 LO EUN CH10 5U 33U AS CH20 ron CH20A L20 CH20 L71 CH20 LO CH20 5U 33U
22. SL 51 80 11 R116 R146 R111 Based Service Manual R126 l ated R138 8129 0197 R128 8130 2 2640 A D Converter Assembly 3 Figure 7 7 12 Schematic Diagrams STAL INTERRUPT STAL INTERRUPT NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED A D INTERRUPT DE TNT 1 ALL RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MICROFARADS VCC lt 7 0 gt P 6 B N28F001BX B150 PWR DOWN T R45 10K 196 25V TOUT2 PB6 TIN2 PB5 OUT1 PB4 MC68302 05 698 1 Y1 15 36 MHZ 0 9 LATCH ENABLE DATA STROBE WRITE MEM IMAGE
23. uq El L 08 3 M D U34 2 ae B B me TP15 R p c z 3 8 TPS J 031 Bu BBB Du rens if 4 ated CRIS TP13 127 hn A 0090 gos 05800 gt E T2 g 071 259 mea BEERS 2645A 1601 6 14 Figure 6 2 A1 Main PCA Assembly Table 6 3 A2 Display PCA Assembly List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator C1 3 6 C2 CR3 DS1 J1 LS1 MP321 R1 10 12 R2 R3 U1 U4 U5 U6 21 Description CAP CER 0 1UF 10 25V X7R 1206 CAP TA 4 7UF 20 16V 3528 DIODE SI BV 75V IO 250MA SOT23 TUBE DISPLAY VAC FLUOR 7 SEG 10 CHAR HEADER 1 ROW 050CTR 20 PIN AF TRANSD PIEZO 22 MM WIRE JUMPER TEF 22AWG WHT 300 RES CERM 10K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 2 2M 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 2M 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 1K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 CMOS 4 BIT MPU FLUKE 45 90002 IC CMOS DUAL DIV BY 16 BIN CNTR SOIC IC CMOS DUAL MONOSTB MULTIVBRTR SOIC IC CMOS QUAD 2 W SCHMT SOIC _RES CERM SOIC 16 15 RES 10K 2 Fluke Stock No 747287 745976 830489 78
24. 2 0 Inguard Software Description 4444800 2 92 Hardware 2 93 Channel MUX C 2 94 Function Relays ua aaa e re qa 2 95 Stallion Chip and Signal Conditioning 2 96 Vup 2 101 DISCHARGE Signal 2 102 Open Thermocouple Detector seen 2 103 Channel 2 104 Reading Rates 2 105 Meas rement 2 112 PULOTAT PAN Ge ses PL 2 113 Overload dich gous ott estie vet ace iv but IER 2 114 Housekeeping 55 2 115 Reading e D 2 118 Housekeeping 5 2 119 Self l eSsts 2 120 Power Up Self T St uuu aaa tnter entrate ritorno 2 121 Self Test Command eater General Mai tenapcoe uu a ana 3 PH 3 2 Warranty Repairs and Shipping 3 3 General 3 4 Required 3 5 Power Requirements 2 eere 3 6 Static Safe Handling 3 7 Ser
25. 80VDC 300VDC LO SENSE OHMS LO SOURCE LOSENSE R132 3VDC 3VDC OHMS LO SENSE 100K 3W MPS6560 OTCCLK STALLION RELAY STATUS PORT RPO RP7 OSCILLATOR SERIAL COMM 706 SB90041 MPS6560 MPS6560 RP RP2 RPS RP4 CS HRESET SND BRS ROV SCK T SB90041 Q23 MMBT3906 SB90041 VDD R107 10 VDDB 4 Nje U27 SBCLK SB XMIT SBRECV STAL SELECT vss STAL INTERRUPT FRDY 7 22 1 54 4098T DISCHARGE 2 AD706 10 16V R106 10 vss F IG RESET 2640A 1003 Sheet 3 of 6 Figure 7 4 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont Schematic Diagrams U25 464959 74HC4053 LEADED d C62 0 1 25V
26. 47 1 4W Er N N A e N O a a Q10 2N7002 9 H SA 3 He He Hee 2645A 1001 Sheet 7 of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 7 9 000000000000 oa oo 2640A 2645A Service Manual CKT Z SURFACE MOUNT REVIEW MAX REM SCAN SET LAST MIN AUTO MON Mx B p D oc D D LI LI L I LI LI 55 83 t 1 ud V 87 59 51 My 2 52 52 1 54 36 58 lc ro AB 7 10 FUNC FT m ALARM me ACERO E ENSEM EN mVACOC LIMIT OFF PRN CH xiMk Hz LO CAL EXT TR LO MES a 510 I 1 512 L 3 918 2620A 1602 Figure 7 2 A2 Display PCA Assembly Schematic Diagrams 7 HYDRA CAL LIST LEFT CFUNC CENTER 51 58 16 HG GEH M 10K SuR6 NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED se 1 ALL RESISTANCES ARE IN OHMS 1 8W Sx 2 ALL CAPACITANCES ARE IN MICROFARADS e 5 516 510 CINTUL 511 PRINT 513 LAST USED NOT USED k F crs 581 2 6 14 ANODE 13 ANODE 13 _ 2 113 5 Ri2 R9 8 ANEDE AR
27. 1 30 25 to 120 05 0 55 0 60 1 00 0 70 140 120101000 04 0 45 0 60 0 90 100 1 20 100010 1300 03 055 0 75 1 00 1 20 1 50 E 100to 25 045 0 50 060 0 80 25 to 20 02 0 35 040 0 60 0 50 0 70 20 to 600 02 0 30 0 40 0 60 050 0 80 600 to 1000 02 040 050 0 70 0 90 1 00 40000 04 0 60 0 65 100 070 1 10 0 to 150 03 040 0 50 0 80 0 60 0 90 150 to 400 02 030 040 060 060 0 80 Introduction and Specification Specifications Table 1 25 2640A Thermocouple Specifications cont Accuracy C Thermocouple Resolution 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Type Temperature C Slow Slow Fast Slow Fast R 250 to 600 0 1 0 90 1 00 2 10 1 20 2 20 1 30 2 00 1 70 2 50 1 30 2 40 1 40 2 30 1 80 2 80 1 50 3 20 1 20 2 40 1 30 2 20 1 00 1 70 1 00 1 50 1 20 1 80 2 10 2 80 3 40 4 60 600 to 1500 0 1 0 90 1 80 1500 to 1767 0 1 0 85 1 90 S 250 to 1000 0 1 140 2530 100010 1400 0 1 100 1 90 1400 to 1767 0 1 1 30 2 20 B 600 to 900 0 2 1 40 3 10 900 to 1200 0 2 090 1 00 2 20 1200 to 1820 0 1 1 00 1 90 C 0 to 150 0 2 0 90 1 60 150 to 650 0 1 075 1 40 650 to 1000 05 0 85 _ 1 40 1000101800 o5 130 2 10 1800 to 2316 0 2 10 3 20 2640A Frequency Measurement Specifications Tables 1 26 1 27 provide 2640 specifications for the frequency measurement function Table 1 26 2640A F
28. R41 R167 842 C94 Cl R1089R169 R60 R59 C18 26 C27 R64 C90 Ic ra 015 R13 icR9 cod 78 cgg R70 eE R71 mn R64 L52 L50 O 2645A 1603 ko Q8 Q9r R118 VR2 RI 29
29. 0e eL le e k Je 2 Lnd o on ion on SLRLER ls R Lis 08 s 2 E 88 BE BEBE BE EB BE gua S 21 cre 99 2021 taa En RBC r l Jr J2 2645A 1603 Figure 6 5 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly 6 26 Table 6 6 A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator Description CAP CER 1000PF 5 50V C0G 1206 RIVET S TUB OVAL STL 087 375 CORE BALUN FERRITE 136 079 093 HEADER 1 ROW 156CTR 15 PIN ISOTHERMAL CASE BOTTOM ISOTHERMAL CASE TOP DECAL ISOTHERMAL CASE CONN DIN41612 TYPE R RT ANG 48 SCKT CONN MICRO RIBBON REC RT ANG 20 POS TRANSISTOR SI NPN TEMP SENSOR TO 92 RES MF 5 49K 1 0 125W 100PPM RES MF 10K 1 0 125W 25PPM RES VAR CERM 50K 10 0 5W VARISTOR 910 10 1 0MA TERM STRIP PWB 45 ANG 197CTR 20 POS IC 2 5V 100 PPM T C BANDGAP REF Fluke Stock No 867408 106473 106184 414458 874107 874110 874131 867338 876102 741538 334565 328120 876573 876193 875195 723478 Tot Qty Notes 6 6 27 NetDAQ Service Manual DETAIL 1 Ogeoeoo E
30. 1 25 8000 5 10 25 1 5 1 5 1 05 3 36 2 1 4 2 1 The 3 MO range is susceptible to the absorption of humidity under extreme conditions If the instrument is operated normally within its specified temperature humidity range the 3 MO range meets its accuracy specifications However if the instrument is soaked at 50 C 90 relative humidity the MQ range may require 1 hour of dry out time at 25 C lt 40 relative humidity for each hour of soak time in order to achieve its specified accuracy 2640A Two Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 1 24 The 26404 specifications for the two wire resistance measurement function is based on the four wire resistance measurement specification above except you add a nominal 5 ohm 10 ohm maximum positive offset This value varies for each channel and with temperature nominal 1 C Introduction and Specification Specifications 2640A Four Wire per ITS 1990 Measurement Specifications 1 25 Tables 1 22 and 1 23 provide 2640A specifications for the four wire Resistance Temperature Detector RTD measurement function The four wire measurements use 2 input channels a decade apart e g channels 4 and 14 Table 1 22 2640A Four Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient Specification Characteristic Temperature Coefficient To calculate RTD accuracy for temperatures between 28 C and 60 C or 10 C and 18 C use a linear interpolatio
31. VSS STAL INTERRUPT FRDY IG RESET 2640A 1003 Sheet 3 of 6 Figure 7 3 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 15 2640A 2645A Service Manual 74HC4053 74HC4053 LEADED U25 74HC4053 Q2 SST109 R82 10K 25PPM C R71 28 7K 50PPM C 402 25PPM C R98 10K 196 2640A 4501 R99 29 4K D 5 SST109 BREAK RESET CIRCUIT RECV DATA IG RESET 1 A LM393DT 2640A 1003 Sheet 4 of 6 Figure 7 3 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 16 Schematic Diagrams 7 LOW SHEET3 VDD RJSENSE SHEET 3 RGRD 3 CH1 LO CHI L50 LOO LOENEN 50 330 CH11 ron CH11A Hi CHH 153 E LO PU avo HH HISENSE 50 33U K2 CH2 HI CH2A s _ 2 154 CH2 LO XL E LOSENSE 5U 33U 1 2 8 SHEET 3 A32 CHI2A Li2 CHi2 155 CH12 10 e 5U 33U C SHEET 3
32. 100 3000 1900 189 910 200 090 3kQ Short Circuit Zero 00 10 50 3ko 1 9 1 8991 1 9109 kO 30 19 ko 18 989 19 021 kQ 300 190 ka 189 75 kO 190 26 kQ 3 MO 1 9 MO 1 8942 MO 1 9058 MO The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0 10 of lead wire resistance You must add any additional lead wire resistance present in your setup to the resistance values given in this table 4 13 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2645A 4 15 Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the resistance function for the 2645A using two terminals Measurement accuracy applies to all channels not Just the channel used for the test The four terminal resistance accuracy test is more rigorous and you may wish to skip this step and continue to Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 1 Connect the Resistance Source to Channel 1 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Reinstall the Universal Input Module You may also use the 5700A resistance calibration output instead of the Decade Resistance Source Tables are provided for both connections Configure Channel 1 for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1
33. 4 12 Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test 4 13 Open Thermocouple Response Test 4 14 Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 26404 4 15 Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 26454 4 16 Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 26404 4 17 Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2645 4 18 RTD Temperature Accuracy Test Resistance 2640A 4 19 RTD Temperature Accuracy Test Resistance 2645A 4 20 RTD Temperature Accuracy Test DIN IEC 751 RTD 4 2 Digital Input Output Tests 4 22 Digital Output 4 23 Digital Input eene tenerte tene rete cnp 4 24 Totalzer P a eee 4 25 Totalizer Count 4 26 Totalizer Sensitivity 5 4 27 Master Alarm Output Test 4 28 Trigger Input 4 29 Trigger Output 4 30 cene eie reprennent beta eiae 4 31 Methods of Calibration 4 32 Preparing for Calibration 4 33 Ending Calibration 4 34 RS 232 Instrument Configuration Parameters 4 35 Calibration Procedure Automatic
34. Introduction and Specification 1 Operating Instructions Operating Instructions 1 6 Full operating instructions are provided in the NetDAQ User Manual PN 942623 Refer to the User Manual as necessary during the maintenance and repair procedures presented in this Service Manual Organization of the Service Manual 1 7 This manual focuses on performance tests calibration procedures and component level repair of the 2640A and 2645A networked data acquisition units To that end manual chapters are often interdependent effective troubleshooting may require not only reference to the troubleshooting procedures in Chapter 5 but also some understanding of the detailed Theory of Operation in Chapter 2 and some tracing of circuit operation in the Schematic Diagrams presented in Chapter 7 Often scanning the table of contents yields an appropriate place to start using the manual A comprehensive table of contents 15 presented at the front of the manual local tables of contents are also presented at the beginning of each chapter for ease of reference If you know the topic name the index at the end of the manual is probably a good place to start The following descriptions introduce the manual Chapter 1 Introduction and Specifications Introduces the instrument describing its features options and accessories This chapter also discusses use of the Service Manual and the various conventions used in describing the circuitry Finally a
35. Most electronic components manufactured today can be degraded or destroyed by ESD While protection networks are used in CMOS devices they merely reduce not eliminate component susceptibility to ESD ESD may not cause an immediate failure in a component a delayed failure or wounding effect is caused when the semiconductor s insulation layers or junctions are punctured The static problem is thus complicated in that failure may occur anywhere from two hours to six months after the initial damage Two failure modes are associated with ESD First a person who has acquired a static charge can touch a component or assembly and cause a transient discharge to pass through the device The resulting current ruptures the junctions of a semiconductor The second failure mode does not require contact with another object Simply exposing a device to the electric field surrounding a charged object can destroy or degrade a component MOS devices can fail when exposed to static fields as low as 30 volts Observe the rules for handling static sensitive devices as follows 1 Handle all static sensitive components at a static safe work area Use grounded static control table mats on all repair benches and always wear a grounded wrist strap Handle boards by their nonconductive edges only Store plastic vinyl and Styrofoam objects outside the work area 2 Store and transport all static sensitive components and assemblies in static shielding bags or con
36. Qm Lm rnm Lm S E se List of Tables Title Summary of 2640A 2645A Specifications Summary 2640A 2645A Measurement Capabilities Summary of 2640A 2645A Models Options and Accessories 2640A 2645A General Specifications cerent 1 0 Environmental Specifications a 1 10 2640A 2645A DIGITAL Specification 2640A 2645A Trigger Specification 2640A 2645A Trigger Out TO Specification 2640A 2645A Master Alarm MA Specification 2640A 2645A Totalizer Specification 2640A 2645A Real Time Clock and Calendar 26404 DC Voltage General Specifications 2640A DC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications 26404 DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications 2640A AC Voltage General Specifications 2640A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications 2640A AC Volt
37. 2645A 1003 Sheet 5 of 6 TRO FROM SHEET 2 BANK 0 TR2 FROM SHEET 2 OHMS NOT 5 ULN2004 ULN2004 5 12 ULN2004 ULN2004 10 ULN2004 13 ULN2004 L52 nnn E 15M i Schematic Diagrams 7 TR1 FROM SHEET 2 BANK 1 1 CH2 CH3 CHANNELS ENABLED 111 242 3 13 4 14 5 15 6 16 747 8 18 9 19 10 20 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE FROM SHEET 2 met 74AC32M 74AC32M oO 74AC32M 9 74AC32M C ot 2645A 1003 Sheet 6 of 6 Figure 7 4 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 25 2640A 2645A Service Manual DETAIL A A SEE DETAIL A A TB2 1H1H1H1H1H1H1H lH H VIEWED FROM CKT 6 SIDE VIEWED FROM CKT 1 SIDE 2620A 1604 Figure 7 5 A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly 7 26 Schematic Diagrams 7 A6 Ua 22 H B25 B27 C28
38. When you are using the manual method of calibration and have completed the calibration of the desired functions dc volts ac volts ohms and frequency press the front panel CAL Enable button again to clear CAL from the primary display When using the calibration features of NetDAQ Logger for Windows calibration is ended automatically when you exit the calibration mode RS 232 Instrument Configuration Parameters 4 34 When CAL is shown in the primary display indicating you are in the calibration mode the instrument configuration parameters are set as listed in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 RS 232 Instrument Configuration for Calibration Procedures Parameter Setting Channel Configuration Unique to calibration step Reading Rate Trigger Type All disabled Intervals All disabled Drift Correction Enabled External Trigger Output Disabled Temperature Units Celsius Queue Overflow Mode Discard old Totalizer Debounce Disabled 9 Autodisable Scanning Calibration Procedure Automatic 4 35 Automatic calibration uses Fluke MET CAL software All procedures are provided in the MET CAL Users Manual These procedures assume you have completed the Preparing for Calibration procedure above Calibration Procedure Semiautomatic 4 36 4 28 Semiautomatic calibration uses the calibration feature built into the NetDAQ Logger for Windows software This procedure assumes you have completed the Preparing for Calibration pr
39. 6 T82 THTHTHTHTHTHTHTH 1H TBA SEE DETAIL VIEWED FROM CKT 6 SIDE VIEWED FROM CKT 1 SIDE 2620A 1604 Figure 6 6 A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly 6 28 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 Chapter 7 Schematic Diagrams Title Page Inttod ctiOn tnt ree tre 7 3 A2 Display PCA Assembly eese 7 10 2640A A D Converter PCA 7 12 2645A A D Converter PCA Assembly eee 7 19 A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly eee 7 26 7 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 7 2 Gruss 110019 e E TP15 R H x w M L1 TUS Es 128 Cres 847 CR15 en dF 93 di CRIS 99 rwr e 45 J 2645A 1601 NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1 ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS 2 ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 3 ALL RESISTORS ARE 1 8W 5 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED Schematic Diagrams 7 REF DES 2 16 20 29 1 19 31 32 30 37 56 52 53 62 61 65 80 81 116 121 99 120 127 140 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 160 9 9 4 13 23 29 34 44 57 67 84 102 107 116 126 13 32 1 12 21 14 28
40. A D Converter 938100 2645A A D Converter PCA 932652 C A4 Analog Input PCA 814210 C 6 4 Table 6 1 2640A 2645A Final Assembly List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator A1 A2 A3 A3 A4 H51 H52 H53 H54 H65 H70 MP1 M2 MP3 MP4 MP5 MP10 MP11 MP12 MP13 MP15 MP16 MP18 MP19 MP22 MP25 MP27 MP35 MP42 MP46 MP48 MP59 MP67 MP71 MP95 MP97 MP98 MP99 MP101 MP111 MP199 MP260 MP399 MP990 MP995 MP997 MP998 MP999 TM1 1 2640 only 2 2645 only Description MAIN PCA ASSEMBLY DISPLAY PCA ASSEMBLY 2640 A D CONVERTER ASSEMBLY 2645 A D CONVERTER ASSEMBLY ANALOG INPUT PCA ASSEMBLY SCREW PH P LOCK SS 6 32 375 SCREW PH P LOCK STL 6 32 250 SCREW FHU P LOCK SS 6 32 250 SCREW TH P SS 4 40 187 SCREW KNURL SL CAPT STL 6 32 500 NUT HEX STL 6 32 BEZEL REAR GRAY 8 ISOTHERMAL CASE BOTTOM ISOTHERMAL CASE TOP SEAL CALIBRATION DECAL REAR PANEL CHASSIS ASSY FRONT PANEL ELASTOMERIC KEYPAD CASE FOOT BLACK LENS FRONT PANEL FOOT FRONT OUTER CASE WIRE ASSY GROUND PWR PLUG PANEL 10A 250V 3 WIRE SWITCH DECAL ISOTHERMAL CASE CABLE ASSY FLAT 20 COND MMOD FERRITE DECAL CSA CORD LINE 5 15 IEC 3 18AWG SVT 5 5 FT HOLDER FUSE 25X1 25 SCREW MT 187TAB CONN ACC D SUB FEMALE SCREWLOCK 250 DECAL NAMEPLATE TERM STRIP SOCKET 197CTR 10 POS POWER TRANSFORMER JUMPER REC 2 POS 100CTR 025 SQ POST DECAL FUSE WARNING WIRE ASSY RECEPTACLE TO F
41. Source 30V ac 1 kHz CAL_STEP 30 0000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds 2640A only for remainder of steps CAL_REF 30 0000E 0 5700A Source 30V ac 1 kHz CAL_STEP 30 0000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 300 0000E 0 5700A Source 300V ac 1 kHz CAL_STEP 300 0000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds Manual Resistance Calibration Procedure 4 45 The resistance calibration procedure calculates gain and offset calibration constants for all of the four wire ohms ranges The same calibration constants are used for the corresponding two wire ohms ranges Complete the following procedure to manually calibrate the ohms function 1 If you have not already done so complete the procedure Preparing for Calibration earlier in this chapter 2 Connect the instrument and 57004 Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 8 3 Complete the sequence of manual steps shown in Table 4 7 The default values were chosen assuming that a Fluke 5700A will be used to supply the reference resistors For each range channels 1 and 2 are configured to four wire ohms and a measurement is made for each channel Making a four wire ohms measurement on channel 1 provides the full scale reading and measuring the four wire
42. 042 130 uV 300mV 01 40uV 01 90uV 013 49uV 013 93 uV 042 104 uV 042 234 uV 750 01 90uV 01 200uV 013 105uV 013 220 uV 042 273 uV 042 520 uV 3V 01 3mV 01 6mV 013 38 mV 013 64 mV 042 78 mV 042 1 56 mV 30V 01 4mV 02 8 mV 013 4 9 mV 026 9 5 mV 042 10 6 mV 084 20 3 mV 50 01 30 mV 04 60 mV 013 40 mV 052 64 mV 042 78 mV 168 156 mV The 750 mV range is used internally to the instrument and not user selectable 2645A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications 1 31 Tables 1 31 to 1 33 provide 26454 specifications for the ac voltage function Table 1 31 2645A AC Voltage General Specifications Specification Input Impedance Characteristic 1 in parallel with 100 pF Maximum Crest Factor Crest Factor Error Common Mode Rejection 3 0 maximum 2 0 for rated accuracy For nonsinusoidal input signals with crest factors between 2 and 3 and pulse widths 22100 us add 0 2 to the accuracy specifications 80 dB minimum at 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 1 imbalance Slow Rate Maximum Input Voltage Maximum Volt Hertz Product The lesser voltage of 30V ac rms from any input terminal to earth 30V ac rms from any terminal input to any other input terminal 2x10 Volt Hertz product on any range normal mode input 1x10 Volt Hertz product on any range common mode input Temperature Coefficient Linear in
43. 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 4 02K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 30K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 21K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 33 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 11K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 59K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 270 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 5K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 78 7 1 0 25W 100PPM 1210 RES CERM 100 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CF 220K 5 0 25W RES CERM 75 4 196 0 25W 100PPM 1210 RES CERM 4 7K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 3 6K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 9 1K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES JUMPER 0 02 0 25W RES CERM 5 1K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 39 2 1 0 25W 100PPM 1210 RES CERM 10K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 Fluke Stock No 320911 914007 943704 929450 929153 714022 742684 742676 927806 820902 927538 746685 746685 867296 783290 867676 928804 928804 740506 740506 740506 783266 783266 780999 867189 783241 783241 746248 867291 851803 746354 746438 746438 746438 929682 746297 851837 929679 929679 740522 740522 746537 746602 682575 746560 929666 929666 746610 746610 746610 746610 Tot Qty 2a a eb AA mS Ro a Notes 6 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 6 2 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 522 Description Tot Qty Notes R135 137 746610 R48 RES CF 10K
44. 30V 2 0 6V 1 2 30V 2 5 5 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 2640A Four Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 1 23 Tables 1 19 to 1 21 provide 26404 specifications for the four wire resistance measurement function The four wire measurements use 2 input channels a decade apart e g channels 4 and 14 Table 1 19 2640A Four Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient Specification Characteristic Temperature Coefficient Add 1 10th the 90 day specification per C above 28 C or below 18 C Table 1 20 2640A Four Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications Resolution Current FullScale Maximum Voltage Slow Fast Applied Voltage Applied by Instrument 3000 1 1 300 3 5V 10 30mO 100 300 mV 3 5V 100 300 10 300 mV 3 5V 300 10 30 10 3 0V 3 5V 3 MQ 100 300 1 uA 3 0V 3 5V Table 1 21 2640A Four Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications Accuracy input V 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C Range 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Slow Fast Slow Fast Slow Fast 3000 015 20 MQ 02 80 02 50 02 120 MQ 084 126 084 336 3 02 30 02 80 02 50 02 1 20 084 1 260 084 3 360 30 03 30 04 100 03 50 04 150 126 12 60 168954420 300 kQ 195440 2 1000 1 600 2 1500 42 1680 84 4200
45. 5 6V dc Vddr The 5 6V dc Vddr source is regulated from a 6 8V dc input to 106 with resistors AIR131 AIR132 setting the output voltage and A1C6 handling transient loads Power Fail Detection 2 30 The power fail detection circuit generates a signal to warn the Microprocessor that the power supply is going down Microprocessor supervisor 1010 compares the divided down raw supply voltage via voltage divider 1 19 and A1R20 When the raw supply voltage falls below approximately 8V dc A1U10 5 output is low Resistor A1R99 is a pull up resistor for the 1010 7 reset line and A1C81 provides filtering of high frequency noise The reference voltage internal to the A1U10 is nominally 1 3V dc Digital Kernel 2 31 The Digital Kernel is composed of the following 10 functional circuit blocks e Reset Circuits e Microprocessor e Address Decoding e Flash Memory Static RAM Real Time Clock e FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array e Serial Communication Guard Crossing e RS 232 Interface e Ethernet Interface Each of the 10 topics is discussed below 2 13 NetDAQ Service Manual Reset Circuits 2 32 The Power On Reset signal POR A1U10 7 is generated by the Microprocessor Supervisor which monitors the voltage of Vcc at A1U10 2 If Vcc is less than 4 65 volts then 1010 7 is driven low drives the enable inputs of the four tri state buffers in 102 causing the HALT RESET and DRST signa
46. After deselecting the channel the measurement circuitry that has been charged by the OTC test must be discharged This is done by programming Stallion to apply a short between its pin and ground setting CLK low and setting EN high This short is maintained for 500 us After this is set high again and OTC EN is set low Channel Measurements 2 103 The following paragraphs describe the Channel Measurement characteristics Reading Rates 2 104 The instrument has three reading rates fast medium and slow These measurement rates allow you to obtain higher resolution and accuracy at the expense of slower measurements The instrument obtains higher resolution measurements by averaging multiple A D readings and or waiting longer for signal conditioning to settle The number of A D readings averaged together to obtain a single measurement is given below in Table 2 20 A D Readings to Average to Obtain a Measurement Multiple A D readings taken to average to obtain a measurement must be taken back to back without interruption in order to obtain AC line frequency rejection NetDAQ Service Manual Measurement Types VDC VAC Ohms VDC Fast Rate 2645A 2 58 Note that these numbers do not apply to measurement types that do not use the A D converter They also do not apply to reference balance readings see Reference Balance Readings Table 2 20 A D Readings to Average to Obtain a Measurement I
47. Model Description 2640A NetDAQ Instrument 2645A NetDAQ Instrument 264XA 901 NetDAQ Logger for Windows Isolated Network 264XA 902 NetDAQ Logger for Windows General Network 264XA 902U NetDAQ Logger for Windows Network Upgrade Kit 264XA 801 Ethernet Card 264XA 802 Parallel to L AN Adapter 10BASE2 80i 410 Clamp On DC AC Current Probe 80i 1010 Clamp On DC AC Current Probe 2620A 100 connector set including Universal Input Module DIGITAL and ALARM TRIGGER connectors 2620A 101 4 20 mA Current Shunt Strip 942615 NetDAQ Service Manual Y2641 19 inch Rackmount Kit Y2643 4 meter Cable Kit Instrument Connector Set 2620A 100 The 2620A 100 is a complete set of input connectors one Universal Input Module one ALARM TRIGGER I O connector and one DIGITAL I O connector Each instrument comes with a 2620A 100 Instrument Connector Set The use of additional connector sets allows quick equipment interface to several wiring setups Host Computer Ethernet Interfaces The 264XA 801 is the recommended Ethernet card and the 264X A 802 is the recommended Parallel to L AN Adapter for host computer installations Interconnection Cables and Components Cables for equipment interconnection can be purchased as an option or fabricated Ethernet interconnection components such as BNC T and 50 ohm terminations are available from any components supplier 1 6 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
48. O 1 Tiltthe rear portion of the pca slightly downwards and position the pca in the chassis Slide the pca towards the rear and into position 2 Install the six screws P that secure the pca to the chassis 3 Reconnect the ribbon cable J at connector A3J10 that leads to AIPIO on the Al Main PCA 4 Complete the procedure Installing the Instrument Case as required Installing the A4 Analog Input PCA 3 30 Complete the following procedure to install the A4 Analog Input PCA 1 Place the pca in position in the module 2 Widen a side of the module next to one of the securing tabs located near the ends of the terminal strips and press the pca firmly into place Repeat for the other tab 3 Reconnect the input measurement wires as required 3 15 NetDAQ Service Manual Assembling the Front Panel Assembly 3 31 Complete the following procedure to assemble the Front Panel Assembly D 1 Place the Front Panel Assembly on a protective surface to prevent any scratching or damage to the assembly Position the display window H in place then push it firmly to snap it into position in the assembly Position the elastomeric keypad G in place then gently press it into position in the assembly Position the A2 Display PCA F in place then push it firmly to snap it into position in the assembly It may be necessary to slightly distend the top of the bezel to allow the pca to snap into position NOTE The Di
49. O or 1 4 Inasimilar manner select the desired dio status for each line dio7 to dio0 then press the e key to return to the diagnostic tool menu 5 Select another diagnostic tool using the up down arrow key or exit by pressing the key The dio lines remain set after exiting this procedure Diagnostic Tool idS 5 11 The idS diagnostic tool allows you to view the firmware versions installed in your instrument Complete the following procedure to view the firmware versions in your instrument 1 Select the idS diagnostic tool using the procedure Selecting the Diagnostic Tool Menu With inStr shown the secondary display and the instrument model number shown in the primary display press the up down arrow keys to sequence through the firmware selections shown in Table 5 4 5 7 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 8 Table 5 4 Instrument Firmware Descriptions Primary Display Secondary Display 2640A or 2645A inStr Instrument Model Number 02 02 FP9A A1 Main pca FPGA Version 01 00 diSP Display CPU Version 00 09 Atodb A D Boot Version 01 02 AtodM A D Software Version 02 07 boot Main Boot Version 01 05 MAin Main Software Version The firmware versions shown in this table are typical Actual firmware versions may vary Field Programmable Gate Array 3 After viewing the desired information press the gD key to return to t
50. RES CERM 1 5K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 10 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 47 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 698K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 200 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 7 5K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 2K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES MF 28 7K 1 0 125W 50PPM RES CERM 47K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 33 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 26 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 110K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 _RES CERM 100 5 125W 200PPM 1206 Fluke Stock No 927538 929588 832477 936047 876263 876263 820860 821637 821637 742684 928791 928791 928791 928791 746792 769794 769794 769794 769794 876011 876011 927707 927707 927707 927707 927707 769802 769802 801258 801258 810630 867676 867676 867676 867676 746263 746263 867296 772798 772798 772798 811463 746461 335315 746685 746685 746685 746248 807685 887208 746297 Tot Qty 22 34 Notes Table 6 4 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator R82 R83 R93 R94 R99 R100 140 R110 111 R116 146 R117 125 R119 127 133 R128 R130 132 R135 R138 R141 R155 R156 R183 TP1 2 U1 3 23 U2 U4 US U6 U7 10 08 09 34 U11 U12 27 31 U13 15 U14 33 U16 U17 2 U18 U19 U20 U22 24 25 U26 U28 U29 030 032 VR1 VR2 4 W5 6 8 Y1 Y2 21 22 23 4
51. Remove all frs p s 579 oo Cables Remove Bottom Screws 4 places Remove X Rear Bezel Screws 2 places e 2222 9 Remove Rear Bezel and Case for Fuse F 15 100 250V Access use 15 100 250 Time Delay Figure 3 1 Replacing the Fuse 3 6 General Maintenance 3 Disassembly Procedures Disassembly Procedures 3 10 The following paragraphs describe disassembly of the instrument in sequence from the fully assembled instrument to the chassis level Start and end your disassembly at the appropriate heading levels For disassembly procedures refer to Figure 3 2 N WARNING Opening the case may expose hazardous voltages Always disconnect the power cord and other inputs before opening the case Repairs or servicing should be performed only by qualified personnel NOTE In the disassembly procedures parts referenced by a letter in brackets e g A are shown in Figure 3 2 Removing the Instrument Case 3 11 Complete the following procedure to remove the instrument case A Refer to Figure 3 2 N WARNING Do not operate the instrument without the cover properly installed 1 Disconnect all rear panel cables to the instrument power Universal Input Module and I O connectors 2 Invert the instrument on a protective
52. Service Centers 6 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 6 2 List of Replaceable Parts 6 Introduction Introduction 6 1 This chapter contains an illustrated list of replaceable parts for models 2640A and 2645A Data Acquisition Units Parts are listed by assembly alphabetized by reference designator Each assembly is accompanied by an illustration showing the location of each part and its reference designator The parts lists give the following information e Reference designator for example R52 An indication if the part is subject to damage by static discharge e Description e Fluke stock number e Total quantity e Any special notes 1 factory selected part CAUTION A symbol indicates a device that may be damaged by static discharge How To Obtain Parts 6 2 Electronic components may be ordered directly from the Fluke Corporation and its authorized representatives by using the part number under the heading FLUKE STOCK NO In the U S order directly from the Fluke Parts Dept by calling 1 800 526 4731 Parts price information is available from the Fluke Corporation or its representatives In the event that the part ordered has been replaced by a new or improved part the replacement will be accompanied by an explanatory note and installation instructions if necessary To ensure prompt delivery of the correct part include the following information when you place an order Instrument model and serial number P
53. Specification Characteristic TTL Logical Zero Trigger Out Set 0 8V maximum for an lout of 1 0 mA 1 LSTTL load TTL Logical One Trigger Out Not Set 3 8V minimum for an lout of 0 05 mA 1 LSTTL load Non TTL Logical Zero Trigger Out Set 1 8V maximum for an lout of 20 mA Non TTL Logical One Trigger Out Not Set 3 25V maximum for lout of 50 mA Pulse Duration Logic Low 125 us Isolation None Master Alarm 1 17 Table 1 10 provides a summary of the Master Alarm specifications The Master Alarm output is located on the ALARM TRIGGER I O connector terminals MA and GND Table 1 10 2640A 2645A Master Alarm MA Specification Specification Characteristic TTL Logical Zero Master Alarm Set 0 8V maximum for an lout of 1 0 mA 1 LSTTL load TTL Logical One Master Alarm Not Set 3 8V minimum for an lout of 0 05 mA 1 LSTTL load Non TTL Logical Zero Master Alarm Set 1 8V maximum for an lout of 20 mA Non TTL Logical One Master Alarm Not Set 3 25V maximum for an lout of 50 mA Isolation None 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 2640A 2645A Totalizer 1 78 Table 1 11 provides a summary of the Totalizer specifications The Totalizer input is located on the DIGITAL I O connector terminals gt and GND Table 1 11 2640A 2645A Totalizer Specification Specification Maximum Input Voltage Minimum Input Voltage Minimum Peak Voltage Isolation Thre
54. VR3 CR8 1N5235B MMBD7000 UNUSED LM79L05A IN OUT MMBD7000 2645A 1001 Sheet 2 of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 7 4 Schematic Diagrams 7 UNUSED U14 CD74AC04M 014 CD74AC04M I aa 14 CD74AC04M DECODING CD74AC04M 1 R126 4 QD74AC32M WA us Ws 1 4W 47 U14 1 CD74AC32M CD74AC04M R142 O o TOUT2 PB6 R125 E 3 TIN2 PB5 Q 47 TOUT1 PB4 0 02 1 4W ROKUPB2 LB U15 VCC15 IAGke PB1 vec non 0 Fus c8 898 SA0 UDS R147 47 Ut EM 146 27 dr vi 25V AS 22PF R W 15 36 MHZ R2 MC68302 Da 9 Lu 47 MICROPROCESSOR EXTAL l e 47 27 817 33 SCLK 22PF CLKO WN V V 27 IPLO IRQT K TO TNT IPLTIRQ TT NOTE R125 W1 W4 W5 ARE NOT INSTALLED i 2 7 IN PRODUCTION ASSEMBLIES 47 9 6077 47 RESET VCC oo DISPLAY R43 T W4 J2 FF SPRXD CTS3 10K ON 138 4 L1SY1 CD1 W4 FID DTACK U14 47 SPTXD RTS3 L1GR CTS1 PA14 DACK PA15 DONE PA6 CD2 CD74AC04M RESET gt 6 U29 GAL16V8B 10LJ SDS1 L1SYO TC
55. and drivers 1017 and A1U27 Often if a receiver or driver device fails you will lose a block of dio lines Power supply voltage levels are important here because of threshold levels Check the power supply voltages Note that the fanout for the trigger output line is increased by A1Q10 so that this output can be connected to 20 trigger input lines without overloading the signal If there are problems with loading of the trigger output line check A1Q10 Troubleshooting the Totalizer and Trigger In Lines 5 26 5 28 The Totalizer and Trigger In inputs are processed by 108 and associated devices and applied to the A1U31 FPGA If you have problems with these features check for the correction inputs to the FPGA If the inputs are correct then the FPGA is suspect or the programming of the FPGA is suspect Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument Troubleshooting the Power Supply 5 27 To troubleshoot the power supply circuits check the test points for each voltage proceeding from the raw dc supply through the 5V switcher and subsequent regulator circuits If one of the supplies is folded back due to excessive current draw unplug the ribbon cable at A3J10 on the A3 A D Converter PCA to see if this unloads the power supply If this works then troubleshoot the A3 A D Converter PCA When tracking down power supply loads use a sensitive voltmeter and look for resistive drops across filter chokes low value decou
56. currents are integrated across capacitor A3C44 and the zero crossing is detected by comparator A3U11 and a logic signal returned to the FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array The FPGA contains counters that count the amount of time that the reference currents are applied to the integrator The input voltage is proportional to the difference in the time required of positive and negative reference currents to null the applied input The a d produces about 35 000 counts for 3V dc It has linear behavior up to 3 4V dc This gives a resolution of about 88 in the fast measurement mode The measurement cycle consists of four basic periods as shown in Table 2 11 This gives a total measurement time of 833 533 us brief explanation of each state follows For additional information refer to Main to A D Converter Communications later in this chapter Table 2 11 Analog Digital Converter Measurement Cycle Tme Autozero 125 200 0 us Integrate 307 Deintegrate1 64 Deintegrate2 24 Overhead n a Total 833 533 us Autozero 2 68 Autozero is the state the a d idles in when not in use In this state the signals PREF NREF DREF and INT are all low The purpose of the state is to remove any remaining charge on A3C44 to charge A3C60 to a voltage so that pin 6 of A3U19 is at zero and to provide time to return data to the microprocessor In this state the input is not connected A3R94 and A3R95 ground
57. imbalance Slow Rate 80 dB minimum at dc 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 1 imbalance Medium and Fast Rates Channel to Channel Crosstalk 120 dB minimum Slow Rate e g 30V dc on channel 1 may cause a 30 uV error on channel 2 100 dB minimum Medium and Fast Rates e g 1V dc on channel 1 may cause a 10 uV error on channel 2 Temperature Coefficient For 96 input Add 1 10th the 90 day specification per C above 28 C or below 18 C For floor error V Add 1 20th the 90 day specification per C above 28 C or below 18 C Maximum Input Voltage The lesser voltage of 300V from any terminal on channels 1 and 11 to earth 150V from any terminal on channels 2 through 10 and 12 through 20 to earth 300V from any terminal on channels 1 and 11 to any other terminal 150V from any terminal on channels 2 through 10 and 12 through 20 to any other input terminal Table 1 14 2640A DC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications Resolution Range Slow Fast 90 mV 0 3 uV 300 3 uV 3V 10 30 uV 30V 100 uV 300 150V 300V 1mV 3 mV Note 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only NetDAQ Service Manual Table 1 15 2640A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications Accuracy 3o input V 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C Range 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Slow Fast Slow Fast Slow Fast 90 mv 01 7 01 17 013 8 013
58. which is produced by lowering the 3 45V dc through A3Q3 Resistor A3R101 and capacitor A3C48 stabilize the loop HI SENSE doen 11 A3C80 A3Z6 1K 1 111M 2W FUS 127 1K 146 270 op dcc Sh uma rad RMSOUT To Pin 31 of ASU30 A3U26 A3R103 100K TO A3R104 A3R102 100K 100K 59 Figure 2 10 AC Volts Range Simplified Schematic 2 38 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description A3U20 is also a dual op amp One half provides the regulated 3 mA required to flow into the cathode of the zener diode within A3Q5 by forming a current source with A3Q4 If not supplied from a current source the current would change with the emitter base voltage of A3Q5 The current source is best visualized as a differential amp sensing both sides of A3R83 and nulling this against the reference voltage The other side of A3Q20 establishes a reference voltage of 0 493V dc above the collector of A3Q5 so that the selected resistors A3R64 and A3R65 provide the required current When 5 is tested it has a collector current specified for zero tc This current is converted into resistor values but requires a known voltage differential to operate properly Analog Digital Converter Circuit 2 67 The A D converter consists of a gate array for control switches for directing currents and a reference circuit and reference resistors for providing the currents The various
59. 3 driving the DTACK signal low to the Microprocessor A1U1 85 When the Microprocessor sees DTACK go low it ends the read or write cycle to the Ethernet chip The Ethernet Chip may also interrupt the Microprocessor by driving EINT low A1U32 133 AIR133 is used to pull EINT high Unlike RS 232 and other serial interfaces Ethernet transfers data as packets of several K bytes of data instead of as single bytes The buffer memory is used to store packets while they are being received or while being transmitted The Ethernet Chip A1U32 is connected directly to the buffer memory A1U33 Packets being received or transmitted are stored to or retrieved from the buffer memory by the Ethernet Chip The buffer memory A1U33 provides 32K bytes of storage for data packets Packets stored in the buffer memory A1U33 are transferred to or from the Static RAM A1U20 A1U30 A1U34 or A1U35 by a DMA controller in the Microprocessor 101 This transfer is done with read or write cycles to the Ethernet Chip 1032 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description The clock for the Ethernet Chip is provided by A1Y2 A1C38 and A1C89 which are connected directly to A1U32 17 and A1U32 18 This provides a 20 MHz clock to the Ethernet Chip The clock allows the Ethernet Interface to send and receive data at 10 M bits per second A1R107 sets internal bias currents in the Ethernet Chip A1U32 The voltage drop across this resistor is normally
60. 4 596 0 25W 697102 1 R50 57 59 RES CF 47 4 596 0 25W 822189 12 R62 822189 R66 67 69 RES CERM 47 5 0625W 200PPM 0603 927707 41 R72 80 82 927707 R88 91 93 bi 927707 R94 96 101 927707 R106 108 118 927707 R138 148 2 927707 R77 RES CERM 1M 4 596 1W 200PPM 912589 1 R86 95 49 9 1 0 25 100 1210 929674 2 R119 RES CERM 100K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 740548 1 R133 RES CERM 3 32K 196 125W 100PPM 1206 810788 1 RT1 THERMISTOR DISC 0 18 25C 875273 1 RV1 VARISTOR 41 5V 9 1 0MA 1206 914114 1 RV2 VARISTOR 910 10 1 0MA 876193 1 T1 TRANSFORMER INVERTER 939681 1 T2 INDUCTOR FXD DUAL EE24 25 0 4MH 1 2A 817379 1 T3 TRANSF PULSE 3 PKG 1 1 100UH 929625 1 T4 TRANSF PULSE 10BASE T RCV1 1 XMT1 1 4 929620 1 TP1 30 JUMPER WIRE NONINSUL 0 200C TR 816090 2 01 IC INTEGR MLTIPROTOCOL MPU 16 MHZ QFP 910831 1 U2 C CMOS QUAD BUS BUFFER W 3 ST SOIC 866801 1 U3 4 IC OP AMP QUAD LOW POWER SOIC 742569 2 U5 7 SOLATOR OPTOHI SPEED LED TO GATE 504522 2 U6 24 IC VOLT REG ADJ POS LO DROPOUT TO 220 943931 2 U8 28 C OP AMP DUAL LOW POWER SOIC 867932 2 U9 IC V REG SWITCHING 100KHZ 5A TO 220 929591 1 U10 C CMOS MICROPROCESSOR SUPERVISOR DIP 913975 1 U11 IC CMOS PARALLEL I O CAL CLCK W CRYST 914036 1 U12 IC CMOS REGULATOR STEP UP PWM SO16 914080 1 U13 IC CMOS RS232 DRIVER RECEIVER SOIC 821538 1 U14 IC CMOS HEX INVERTER SOIC 838417 1 U15 C CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR G
61. A D Firmware is different for each instrument Firmware is stored in the instrument in electrically erasable and programmable memory devices A diskette containing the necessary loading software and latest release of the firmware may be obtained from either your local Fluke authorized service center or from the Fluke factory You may also contact the factory directly Fluke Data Acquisition Sales Support 206 356 5870 or FAX 206 356 5790 To review which versions of the Main and A D firmware are presently in your instrument see Diagnostic Tool idS earlier in this chapter The listing for A D Firmware is identified as AtodM the listing for Main Firmware is identified as Main The remaining firmware for the display FPGA and so forth are factory procedures only Firmware Diskette 5 39 5 36 The firmware diskette contains the files shown in Table 5 16 The bat files are used for the standard installation of the firmware If you wish to customize the installation then do not run the batch file but refer to Table 5 16 for the switches used for the executable file 1426 Create a directory on your hard drive for this diskette and then copy the contents to the hard drive For example create the directory on your hard drive called firmware and copy the contents of the diskette into this directory Refer to your Windows or DOS documentation if you need information on creating directories or copying files Diagnostic Tes
62. Background The A1U11 real time clock device has parameters corrupt PCA resident RAM that stores the RS 232 communication parameters baud rate A1U11 is powered by Vbb the source of which is either the battery BT1 or the supply Vcc depending if the instrument is powered or not via A1U10 Failure For this error to occur the RS 232 parameter is no longer stored in 1011 RAM or the addressing is missing Correction This might happen if the battery BT1 is dead or a problem with A1U10 power supply monitor or the A1U11 chip itself Also check A1U29 for I O and memory decoding 14 Ethernet address A1 Main Background The A1U21 FLASH memory device is parameter corrupt PCA divided into sections One of these sections is the memory for the Ethernet address This is a unique address assigned at the time of manufacturer Failure For this error to occur the Ethernet address is either missing or is corrupted and must be reloaded or the addressing is missing Correction Reloading the Ethernet address is a factory procedure only The only recourse is to order a new A1U21 device programmed at the factory if the Ethernet address is corrupted Also see Troubleshooting the Digital Kernel Also check A1U29 for I O and memory decoding 5 24 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument Table 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems cont Error Code 15 16
63. CER 27PF 10 50V C0G 1206 1000PF 10 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 3 3PF 0 5PF 50V C0G 0805 CAP POLYPR 1500PF 2 5 100V CAP POLYPR 0 1UF 10 160V CAP POLYES 0 47UF 10 50V CAP AL 470UF 20 10V SOLV PROOF CAP POLYES 1UF 10 50V CAP TA 33UF 10 6V CAP POLYPR 2200PF 5 100V CAP CER 1000PF 5 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 4 3PF 0 5PF 50V C0G 0805 CAP CER 0 047UF 20 50V X7R 1206 CAP POLYES 0 1UF 10 1000V CAP CER 2500PF 20 250V X7R CAP CER 15PF 10 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 68PF 2 50V C0G CAP CER 180PF 2 50V C0G DIODE SI BV 70V IO 50MA DUAL SOT23 DIODE SI SCHOTTKY DUAL 30V SOT 23 DIODE SI DUAL BV 50V IO 100MA SOT23 DIODE SI BV 100 102100MA DUAL SOT23 CONN DIN41612 TYPE C RT ANG 48 CONN MICRO RIBBON PLUG RT ANG 20 POS JACK PWB RT ANG 1 3MM PIN HEADER 2 ROW 100CTR 10 PIN RELAY REED 2 FORM A 5VDC LOW THERM HV RELAY REED 2 FORM A 5VDC LOWTHERM 1UV RELAY ARMATURE 2 FORM C 5VDC LATCH RELAY ARMATURE 4 FORM C 5V LATCH FERRITE CHIP 600 OHM 100 MHZ 1206 INDUCTOR 33UH 10 0 115ADC INDUCTOR 15MH 5 0 021ADC INSUL PT TRANSISTOR MOUNT DAP TO 5 RIVET S TUB OVAL STL 087 343 HEADER 1 ROW 100CTR 3 PIN Fluke Stock No 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 867572 867572 867572 747261 800508 747378 514208 854641 446781 697409 822387 733089 866897 854505 867408 514216 782615 837518 485680 837393 715300 820522 742320 942594 851659 85165
64. CERM 26 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 110K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 100 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES MF 10K 1 0 125W 25PPM RES MF 402 1 0 125W 25PPM _RES CERM 91K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 Fluke Stock No 876263 876263 820860 820860 821637 821637 742684 928791 928791 928791 928791 746792 769794 769794 769794 876011 876011 927707 927707 927707 927707 927707 769802 769802 801258 801258 810630 867676 867676 867676 867676 867676 746263 746263 867296 772798 772798 772798 811463 746461 335315 746685 746685 746685 746248 807685 887208 746297 328120 658401 811828 Tot Qty 22 34 N Sa Notes 6 6 23 NetDAQ Service Manual 6 24 Table 6 5 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont Reference Designator R94 R99 R100 140 R110 111 R112 114 138 R116 146 R117 125 R119 127 133 R128 R130 132 R135 R139 R141 R183 TP1 2 U1 3 23 U2 U4 U5 u6 U7 10 U8 U9 34 U11 U12 27 31 U13 U14 33 U15 U16 U17 21 U18 U19 U20 U22 24 25 U26 U28 U29 U30 U32 VR1 VR2 3 W5 6 8 Y Y2 Zi Z2 Z3 4 z5 26 27 Description RES CERM 45 3K 1 0 1W 100PPM 0805 RES MF 29 4K 1 0 125W 25PPM RES CERM 4 02K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES MF 1K 1 100PPM FLMPRF FUSIBLE RES CERM 150 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CF 270 5 0 25W RES CERM 22 5 125W 200PP
65. Chapter 2 Theory of Operation and approach the difficulty in a logical manner adapting the troubleshooting procedures as required As a last resort contact the factory or Fluke Service Center see Chapter 6 for assistance General Troubleshooting 5 20 General troubleshooting uses the instrument response to self test as a clue to the fault location If the instrument completes self test and displays an error code on the front panel refer to Table 5 10 If the instrument appears dead and will not even self test refer to Table 5 11 If the instrument passes self test but is not operating correctly then refer to Troubleshooting the A3 A D Converter PCA for analog problems and Troubleshooting the Al Main PCA for digital problems For assembly and disassembly procedures see Chapter 3 General Maintenance 5 19 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems Error Error Code Suspect Error Code Code Description Assembly Discussion 1 Bad boot software A1 Main Background The A1U21 FLASH memory device is image in FLASH PCA divided into sections One of these sections is the ROM memory for the boot software which is used for instrument initialization After the instrument is initialized the main code takes over and runs the instrument Failure For this error to occur the boot software is either missing or is corrupted and must be reloaded Correction Reloading the bo
66. ITS 1990 Measurement Specifications 1 27 Tables 1 24 to 1 25 provide 2640A specifications for the thermocouple measurement function per ITS 1990 Table 1 24 2640A Thermocouple General Specifications Specification Characteristic Input Impedance 100 MO minimum in parallel with 300 pF Open Thermocouple Detect Operates by injecting a small ac signal into the input after each measurement A thermocouple resistance greater than 1k to 10k is detected as an open input Temperature Coefficient To calculate Thermocouple accuracy for temperatures between 28 C and 60 C or 10 C and 18 C use a linear interpolation between the two applicable points For example if the applicable specification at 28 C is 0 6 and the specification at 60 C is 1 1 then the specification at 40 C is 1 1 0 6 x 40 28 60 28 0 6 0 7875 Table 1 25 2640A Thermocouple Specifications Accuracy C Thermocouple Resolution 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Type Temperature C Slow Slow Fast Slow Fast J 100 to 80 03 045 050 oso 060 080 80 to 230 02 0 35 0 50 0 70 080 230 to 760 02 040 0 50 0 70 0 80 0 90 100 to 25 04 0 55 0 60 090 070 1 00 25 to 120 03 040 050 0 80 0 60 0 90 120 to 800 03 050 0 65 0 90 100 1 20 800 to 1372 03 0 70 1 00 1 30 1 60 1 90 N 100to 25 05 065 0 75 120
67. Interconnection Cables and Components Operating Instructions Organization of the Service Son iG E Nyorze lez into T RETRO 2640A 2645A Combined Specifications 2640A 2645A General 2640A 2645A Environmental Specifications 2640A 2645A Input Output Capabilities 2640A 2645A 2640A 2645A Real Time Clock and 26404 Specifications 26404 DC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2640A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2640A Four Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2640A Two Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2640A Four Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement Specification S 2640A Two Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement erinto RET 2640A Thermocouple per ITS 1990 Measurement SDSCISICAtIOnS 2640A Frequency Measurement Specifications 2645A Specifications
68. MC91 IO MC35 IO MC93 IO MC37 IO 94 IO MC38 IO MC96 IO MC40 IO MC97 IO MC43 IO MC99 IO MC45 IO NC101 IO MC46 IO MC104 INT IO MC48 IO MC105 10 MC49 IO MC107 IO MC51 IO MC109 10 MC53 IO 112 A D INTERRUPT MC56 IO MC115 IO MC57 IO NC117 IO NC118 INOE1 10 MC120 INOE2 IO MC123 IO MC125 INGCLR IO MC126 IGRESET 11 4 04 MC145406DW T 2 5MHZ m INGCLK py FOUT SCF IMAGE STAL SELECT u4 RS232 MC145406DW 4 CONTROL BUS 8 VSS A D TRIGGER CMND STROBE A D SM SELECT Tabie printed Sat Mar 12 12 03 34 PST 1994 Z4AC32M 74 2 Z4HC00 Z4HC273 Z4HC273 Z4HCUO4 74 0004 74LS145 74LS145 7 1281 4 4 13 26 38 243 53 66 HM628428LFP 10 MC145406DW 16 MC68302 18 28 39 4 83 99 112 131 2640A 1003 Sheet 2 of 6 Figure 7 3 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 14 Schematic Diagrams R120 47K SSTH17 SSTH17 SSTH17 SSTH17 Q16 Q12 Q10 SSTH17 Q14 Q15 RJSENSE R139 100K 1 5 890041 AD637KD MMBD7000 5890041 CR15 SB90041 HI SENSE 7
69. Measurement accuracy applies to all channels not just the channel used for the 4 6 Configure Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for volts dc 90 mV range 2 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select channel 0101 instrument 01 channel 01 from the Channel list Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Configure the 5700A for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 1 Volts DC Range 5700A Output Minimum Reading Maximum Reading 90 mV Short Circuit Zero 0 000008V 0 000008v 90 mV 90 mV 0 089980 0 090020V 90 mV 90 mV 0 090020V 0 089980V 300 mV Short Circuit Zero 0 000017V 0 000017V 300 mV 300 mV 0 299944V 0 300056V 300 mv 300 mV 0 300056V 0 299944V 3V Short Circuit Zero 0 00015V 0 00015V av 2 99946V 3 00054V 3V 3V 3 00054V 2 99946V Short Circuit Zero 0 0017V 0 0017V 30V 30V 29 9944 30 0056V 30V 30V 30 0056V 29 9944V 300V Short Circuit Zero 0 017V 0 017V 300V 300V 299 944V 300 056V 300V 300V 300 056V 299 944V corner control menu box 4 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand Volts DC Accuracy Test 2645A Complete the following proced
70. O that results in left to right strobing of grid areas on the display Figure 2 5 shows grid control signal timing GRID TIMING lt 16 56 ms gt e E E E E E E GRID 10 1 37 ms 7 a GRID 9 4 1 37 ms L 7 03 3303 03 GRID 1 lt 1 37 ms i QV HA emm emm GRID 0 4 1 37 ms 4 140 us Figure 2 5 Grid Control Signal Timing Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description The single grid strobing process involves turning off the previously enabled grid outputting the anode data for the next grid and then enabling the next grid This procedure ensures that there is some time between grid strobes so that no shadowing occurs on the display A grid is enabled only if one or more anodes are also enabled Thus if all anodes under a grid are to be off the grid is not turned on Figure 2 6 describes the timing relationship between an individual grid control signal and the anode control signals GRID ANODE TIMING 5V pu GRID X 1 37 ms gt 30V 5V ov ANODE 14 0 30V 5V OV 2 2 GRID X 1 30V Figure 2 6 Grid Anode Timing Relationships A3 A D Converter PCA Circuit Description 2 55 The following paragraphs des
71. PCA Troubleshooting 5 31 A3 Kernel 5 32 Break Res t Circuit 5 33 Out of Tolerance Readings eese 5 34 Troubleshooting Relay Problems 5 35 A4 Analog Input PCA Troubleshooting 5 36 Troubleshooting Calibration Failures 5 37 Retrieving Calibration Constants eese 5 38 Loading Embedded Instrument Firmware 5 39 Firmware Diskette 5 40 Loading the Main Firmware 5 41 Loading the A D Firmware NetDAQ Service Manual 6 List of Replaceable Parts 6 1 Introduction uuu ua u n T IRE 6 2 How To Obtain Patrts a a 6 3 Manual Status Information 6 4 Newer 6 5 Service 22 7 Schematic Diagrams u 7 1 vi Q2 Q2 Q2 T2 SS DOA SESE 0 Ua UAE AON u e O9
72. RS 232 5 25 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 5 11 Hints for Troubleshooting Dead Instruments Possible Fault Discussion If the instrument is completely dead you may have Blown Fuse blown the line fuse See Replacing the Line Fuse in Chapter 3 Power Supply Self test starts with the outguard A1 Main PCA If Dead A2 Display PCA Dead 101 Microprocessor self test won t even begin then something is wrong either at the A1 Main PCA or with a power supply voltage If the A D Converter PCA has a short circuit of some kind it could load down a power supply voltage such that the current limiting feature is folding the supply back For example the 5 6V dc Vddr supply might only measure 1 2V dc This in turn would kill the A1 Main PCA To check this possibility turn the instrument power off then disconnect the A3 A D Converter PCA by removing the ribbon cable at A3J10 Power the instrument again If this time the instrument goes into self test then you need to troubleshoot the A3 A D Converter PCA and look for the load that is pulling the power supply down See Power Supply Troubleshooting Power Supply look for overwarm devices It may appear that self test didn t begin because the display is dead and therefore didn t shown anything To verify the display is dead extract the error code over the RS 232 port instead of from the front panel display See Retrieving Error Codes using RS 23
73. Row 100 CTR 3 POS PN 347617 Connector D SUB 9 Pin NetDAQ A D A D RS 232 Extender Cable RS 232 Cable Model RS40 PC 9 Pin PN 851712 P1 DB 25S 1 _ m vs TOhi u 2 RX 2 TX oT 7 Signal gt Ground PN 845339 Socket 1 Row 100 CTR 3 POS PN 312587 Connector D SUB 25 Pin Figure 5 3 Connection to A3P1 for Loading A D Firmware 5 Apply 12V dc 300 mA programming power from an external source to A3J3 or A3P2 The voltage is connected to A3P2 1 or A3J3 2 This connection must be made when instrument power is on 6 Atthe PC obtain the DOS prompt C N gt Do not shell to the DOS prompt from Windows 7 If you have not already done so copy the contents of the diskette into a directory on your hard drive e g firmware and change to this directory C firmware gt 5 39 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 40 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2640A After the DOS prompt in the directory with the diskette files type ad1d401 bat if you connected to PC COM port 1 or ad1d402 bat if you connected to PC COM port 2 For example type the command C firmware gt ad1d401 bat then press Enter Of 2645A After the DOS prompt in the directory with the diskette files type ad1d451 bat if you connected to PC COM port 1 or ad1d452 bat if you connected to PC COM port 2 For example type the command C firmware gt ad
74. Totalizer feature to count 1 Configure Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for Volts dc 3V range 2 Configure Channel 1 for Alarms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for an Alarm 1 with Alarm Sense LO Alarm Value 1 and Digital Output DO0 3 Connect Test Leads At the DIGITAL I O connector connect the DIOO test lead to the X Totalizer test lead 4 Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button Bar to start instrument scanning Scanning is initiated to enable the return of TOTAL status to the Spy window 5 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select 01 Click OK to open the Spy window 6 Verify Totalizer Count The current totalizer count is 1 since it counted the number of times channel 1 went into alarm 7 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box 8 Increase Totalizer Count Alternately click the Stop Instrument and Start Instrument buttons several times which advances the Totalizer count as channel 1 goes into alarm at the start of each scan 9 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select 01 Click OK to open the Spy window 10 Verify Totalizer Count The Spy window summarizes the new Totalizer count and is equal to the number of times the instrument has started and stopped scanning since the beginning of this t
75. and NREF continue to switch a few more times and the signal is brought very close to zero The previous integrate state ended in a hold both references off and this state begins with the PREF signal on The comparator is examined after each count and as soon as CMP goes low a hold state begins with both references off Depending of the level of the signal at the beginning of deintegrate this can result in PREF being on from 1 to 60 counts At the end of the hold count NREF is turned on until CMP drops low This can also be anywhere from 1 to 60 counts but at this point the output should be within 1 count of reaching zero volts Next another hold state is entered into for 1 count followed by PREF until CMP goes high This sets up the final DREF to always approach zero from the same direction A hold state with both references off begins until a total of 64 counts have occurred since deintegrate began If the magnitude of the signal as it ends integrate is large this final hold is short If the signal at the end of integrate is small the hold is as long as 60 counts Deintegrate2 2 71 Deintegrate begins with the turning on of DREF This reference applies 1 16th of the current of NREF so the approach to zero is slower and more accurate Correspondingly the internal FPGA counter counts this time at 1 16th the value of NREF time The count ends as the final state of the comparator CMP goes low indicating that the charge has been removed fr
76. and the A D Conversion Circuitry see Table 2 10 The HI input is switched to the ac buffer through dc blocking capacitor A3C80 The LO input is sensed through A3L52 A3R146 A3K27 A3R119 and 533 and S37 The gain or attenuation of the ac buffer is selected by A3U30 s 1 outputs OV turns JFETS A3Q10 to 3016 ON while 5V VAC turns the JFETS OFF Only one line at a time is set at OV The ac voltage input signal is routed through and scaled by the buffer to obtain a full scale buffer output of 0 75V RMS at A3U29 6 A3R120 and A3C76 provides high frequency compensation on the 300 mV range The output of the buffer is ac coupled to the input of the ac to dc rms converter The output of the rms converter 0 75 VDC is divided by 2 5 by A3Z2 and sent to the acv filter The filtered output is sent to pin 31 ACFO of the Stallion chip via 541 Full scale input to Stallion is 300 mV dc Figure 2 10 shows a simplified signal path for the 3V ac range Table 2 10 Measurement Matrix for AC Volts ACVolt Gainof Full Scale Full Scale Full Scale Full Scale GainofDC Full Scale Buffer Range AC Volts Output of Output of Input to Output of Buffer DC Volts Range Buffer AC Volts RMS Stallion Stallion Amplifier Input to Control Amplifier Buffer Converter dc volts dc volts Multislope Signal Amplifier A D 2 5 0 75V rms 0 75V 300 300 10 BR3 3V 0 25 0 75V rms 0 75V 300
77. around 1 25 volts The Ethernet Chip also drives three LEDs A1DS2 indicates that a packet is being received A1DS3 indicates that the Ethernet Chip is transmitting a packet A1DS1 indicates two different things depending on the type of physical interface being used If 10BASE 2 Coax is being used 1051 indicates when collisions were detected on the Ethernet If Twisted Pair is being used A1DS1 indicates whether the link to the host computer is intact A1DS1 is driven by the Ethernet Chip A1U32 through a dual diode A1CR4 which ORs together two outputs A1U32 59 and A1U32 60 A1DS2 and A1DS3 are driven directly by A1U32 57 and A1U32 58 Resistors AIR37 A1R122 and 1 121 limit current to LEDs 1051 A1DS2 A1DS3 Ethernet Connectors The instrument is connected to the Ethernet by either a 10 5 2 interface A1P2 or a IOBASE T interface IOBASE 2 uses coaxial cable to attach instrument to a host computer Other instruments and possibly other equipment may be attached to the same coaxial cable when a 10BASE 2 interface is used IOBASE T uses twisted pair cable to attach instrument to some kind of hub host computer other instruments and other equipment are connected to a hub using separate twisted pair cables 10BASE T Ethernet Connector Pulse transformer A1T4 provides electrical isolation between the Ethernet Chip A1U32 and the connector A1P1 Two twisted pa
78. device dependent error is generated Table 5 9 Range Settings 2640A 2645A VDC 2 W range 2645A 2640A VDC VDC Ohms 1 300mV 300mV 300mV 300mV 3000 3000 2 3V 3V 3V 3V na 3k 3k opt 4 W FREQ Ohms a 3 30V 30V 30V 30V 30kQ 30kQ 30kQ opt 4 50V 300V 50V 300V 300kQ 300k 300k opt 5 90mV 90mV na na 6 750mV 750mV na na na na na opt Command FUNC 1 Description Query the measurement function range and number of terminals for channel one Parameters None Response function range lt terminals gt function OFF VDC VAC OHMS FREQ range 1 2 5 AUTO see Table 5 9 Range Settings terminals 2 or 4 Restrictions Not allowed in calibration mode Notes If channel one is not configured this query returns just OFF When function is OFF range and terminals are not returned When function is FREQ range is always returned as AUTO When function is VDC VAC or FREQ terminals is not returned When function is OHMS terminals is always returned When channel 1 is configured for RTD via network interface function is OHMS and range is AUTO When channel 1 is configured for thermocouple via network interface function is VDC and range is 6 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument Command MEAS Description Takes a measu
79. for the remaining 30 counts 48 us of the interval The beginning first interval is only 16 counts instead of 32 counts The last state is 35 counts to allow for completing the PREF and NREF pulse count equalization There are 8 normal intervals of 32 counts The purpose is to bound the waveform to prevent amplifier saturation prevent charge injection from being a variable with waveform changes and prevent logic signals themselves from injecting unwanted signals into the summing node The integrate state is the primary measuring interval and during this time the FPGA accumulates counts of how long PREF and NREF have been applied The count is completed during deintegrate Typical integrator output waveforms for different inputs are shown in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 and Figure 2 13 0 5V Div 125 us Div Figure 2 11 Integrator Output Waveform for Input Near 0 2 40 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description 0 5V Div 125 us Div Figure 2 12 Integrator Output Waveform for Input Near Full Scale 0 5V Div 125 us Div Figure 2 13 Integrator Output Waveform for Input Near Full Scale 2 41 NetDAQ Service Manual Deintegrate1 2 70 Deintegratel is when the remaining charge of the capacitor is removed and the major count is completed The input is turned off and no longer affects the reading INT is off PREF
80. is more than one error they are displayed sequentially Selftest errors can be retrieved from RS 232 commands and the network A selftest includes a test of the following items FLASH ROM parameters communication parameters and calibration constants RAM Instrument and channel configuration plus RAM images of FLASH ROM parameters e Ethernet Ethernet chip and static Ethernet RAM e Display Display processor and display board Inguard Specific tests for ROM checksum RAM A D converter zero offset test reference balance test ohms overload test and otc A summary of the possible error codes are shown in Table 5 1 including the front panel error code in decimal and the corresponding network and RS 232 error code in hexadecimal The faults that might cause each error are described in Troubleshooting the Instrument later in this chapter Table 5 1 Selftest Error Codes 0x00000001 Front Panel RS 232 Query Error Codes in E Code D ipti Error Codes Error Codes hexadecimal None 0 0x00000000 No selftest error Bad boot software image in FLASH ROM 0x00000002 0x00000004 Bad main software image in FLASH ROM RAM test failure 0x00000008 0x00000010 Display test failure Display not responding 0x00000020 0x00000040 Calibration constants corrupt Inguard not responding 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 128 256 0 00000080 0 00000100 I
81. is warranted to meet published specifications only at 50 60 Hz The instrument also operates from dc power 9 to 16V dc DC input power is connected to the rear input connector ALARM TRIGGER I O J6 pin 8 DCH and pin 7 DCL If both ac and dc power sources are connected to the instrument the ac power source is used if the ac line voltage exceeds approximately 8 3 times the dc voltage Automatic switchover between ac and dc occurs without interrupting instrument operation The instrument draws a maximum of 15 VA on ac line power or 6W on dc power Static Safe Handling 3 6 All integrated circuits including surface mounted ICs are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge ESD Modern integrated circuit assemblies are more susceptible to damage from ESD than ever before Integrated circuits today can be built with circuit lines less than one micron thick allowing more than a million transistors on a 1 4 inch square chip These submicron structures are sensitive to static voltages under 100 volts This much voltage can be generated on a dry day by simply moving your arm A person can develop a charge of 2 000 volts by walking across a vinyl tile floor and polyester clothing can easily generate 5 000 to 15 000 volts during movement against the wearer These low voltage static problems are often undetected because a static charge must be in the 30 000 to 40 000 volt range before a person feels a shock 3 3 NetDAQ Service Manual
82. lights Press the up down arrow keys until LinE Line Frequency is displayed in the primary display Press the ENTER key Press the up down arrow keys until 50 50 Hz is displayed in the primary display Press the ENTER key 3 Apply Host Computer Power Apply power to the host computer 4 Open NetDAQ Logger for Windows Open NetDAQ Logger from the Fluke NetDAQ Logger group in Program Manager 5 Add Instrument Select the Communications Config command from the Setup menu to open the Communications Configuration File dialog box If the command is dimmed Configuration Lockout is checked in the Options menu Observe the Instruments on Network list If the list includes instrument 01 with the correct model number model 2640A or model 2645 continue to Step 6 If instrument 01 is listed but with the wrong model number select highlight the instrument on the Instruments on Network list and click the Modify button Select the correct model and click OK If instrument 01 is not listed click the Add button and add instrument 01 with the correct model number Click OK 6 Verify Communications With the Communications Configuration File dialog box still open select instrument 01 on the Instruments on Network list and click the Verify button The message Connection Successful is returned for a successful communications between the instrument and host computer If you receive an error message refer to Error and Status Messages in Chapter 4 Cl
83. mV 300 mV 10 3V BR3 30V 0 025 0 75V rms 0 75V 300 mV 300 mV 10 3V BR3 150 300V 0 0025 0 75V rms 0 75V 300 mV 300 mV 10 3V BR3 Frequency Measurements 2 64 The ac input follows the same path as ac volt measurements except the output of the buffer A3U29 is sent to the Stallion Chip pin 35 C Internal to the Stallion Chip switch S38 sends the C input to a frequency comparator and counter Active Filter ACV Filter 2 65 The active filter is used only for ac volt measurements to filter out the ac ripple and noise present on the output of the rms converter The filter uses an op amp internal to the Stallion Chip resistors A3R102 A3R103 and A3R104 capacitors A3C57 A3C58 and A3C59 A3Q6 turns on to discharge the capacitors between measurements 2 37 NetDAQ Service Manual Voltage Reference Circuit 2 66 The voltage reference circuit creates a well regulated 3 45 3 45V dc source for use by the A D converter and as a source for ohms and current measurements The circuit 1s formed around two dual op amps A3U12 and A3U20 A3U12 controls balance between 3 45V dc and 3 45V dc by adjusting the 3 45V dc through A3Q2 as the divider between these voltages in zener diode A3Z1 reads above or below zero The other half of A3UI2 adjusts the absolute voltage difference between the two outputs by regulating the 3 45V dc so as to produce zero collector base volts on A3Q5 If the collector voltage rises then A3Q5 needs more current
84. multimeter measure the output of the unset TO test lead referenced to the GND test lead for a voltage greater than 3 8V dc Verify Trigger Output is Enabled In NetDAQ Logger for Windows click the Instrument Config button on the Button Bar In the Instrument Configuration dialog box verify the Trigger Out box is checked Click OK to return to the Main Window Connect Trigger Output Connect the TO test lead on the ALARM TRIGGER IO connector to the X Totalizer test lead on the DIGITAL I O connector This allows each Trigger Output pulse to be counted by the Totalizer Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button Bar to enable instrument scanning Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select 01 Click OK to open the Spy window Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration 8 Verify Totalizer Count The Spy window summarizes the Totalizer count Note the Totalizer is incrementing at 1 second intervals as it counts the Trigger Output pulse at the start of each scan 9 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box 10 Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop instrument scanning Calibration 4 30 The instrument features calibration that is completed over the NetDAQ networked data acquisition unit RS 232 interface and it is not necessary to open the instrument case Using know
85. of steps given above for each channel Instead certain characteristics of VDC readings are exploited in order to allow the A D to be triggered continuously for all the channels in a VDC block A VDC block consists of a series of channels that are all defined as VDC with similar ranges Similar range means either the low ranges 90 mV 300 mV 750 mV and 3V or the high ranges 30V and HIV Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description For the channels within such a block we can assume the following e function relay switches are required e There 15 only one Stallion register that must be written to between channels e Achannel can be selected at the beginning of the deintegrate period of the previous channel at the same time that the previous channel is deselected e There is sufficient time during the deintegrate period to configure the Stallion for the next channel e There is sufficient time during the autozero period of a channel for signal conditioning settling e The N and P counters for a channel can be read during the autozero period of the next channel Thermocouples 2 108 A thermocouple channel is measured in the same way as a volts DC channel on the 90 mV range However before deselecting the channel at the end of the measurement an open thermocouple check may be done if the channel is so configured An open indication from this check causes a value of VAL to be returned for the channe
86. of the specified limits the raw measurement is returned A device dependent error is returned if an internal error such as a Guard Crossing error measurement timeout or a configuration failure is detected No value is returned in this case This command sets the EST BUSY bit in the error status register while changing the instrument configuration The scan queue is also cleared Command FUNC 1 function range lt terminals gt Description Configure the measurement function range and number of terminals for channel one Parameters function OFF VDC VAC OHMS FREQ range 1 2 5 AUTO see Table 5 9 Range Settings terminals 2 or 4 for OHMS Response None Restrictions Not allowed in calibration mode range and terminals may not be specified with function OFF terminals may not be specified with function VDC VAC or FREQ terminals must be specified with function OHMS range must be specified for VDC VAC and OHMS range may be specified for FREQ but it is not used A range value which is na in Table 5 9 Range Settings generates an execution error NetDAQ Service Manual Notes Since only channel one can be configured range 4 is shown as 300V here for the2640A On the 26404 channels 1 and 11 can measure 300V while the other channels can measure only 150V If the instrument type cannot be determined 2640A 2645 A then a
87. of the timebase generated by the internal crystal may be tested by measuring the frequency of the 1 Hz square wave output 1011 4 The Real Time Clock also has an interrupt output A1U11 3 that is used by the Microprocessor to synchronize its internal millisecond timer to the real time clock There should be 64 interrupts per second from the real time clock FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array 2 38 When the instrument is powered up the FPGA a complex programmable logic device clears its configuration memory and waits until RESET A1U31 78 goes high The FPGA then tests its mode pins and should determine that it is in peripheral configuration mode A1U31 54 high A1U31 52 low A1U31 56 high In this mode the Microprocessor must load the configuration information into the FPGA before the FPGA logic can begin operation The Microprocessor first makes sure that the FPGA is ready to be configured by driving XD P A1U31 80 low and then pulsing the RESET A1U31 78 input low for about 10 microseconds The Microprocessor then waits until the XINIT A1U31 65 output goes high indicating that the FPGA has been initialized and is ready for configuration The Microprocessor then writes a byte of configuration data to the FPGA by driving PGA A1U31 88 low and latching the data on the data inputs D 0 through D lt 7 gt by pulsing WRL A1U31 5 low and then back high The XRDY A1U31 99 output then goes low to indicate that the FPGA is b
88. on the A D Converter PCA via the Serial Communication Guard Crossing block A1U5 A1U7 e Communicates with the Display Controller to display readings and user interface information 101 1031 Communicates with the Field Programmable Gate Array A1U31 which scans the user interface keyboard found on the Display Assembly and interfaces with the Digital I O hardware Communicates with a host computer via the Ethernet interface A1U32 e Communicates with a host computer via the RS 232 interface A1U1 A1U13 e Reads the digital inputs and changes digital alarm and trigger outputs Serial Communication Guard Crossing 2 6 This functional block provides a high isolation voltage communication path between the Digital Kernel of the Main PCA and the microprocessor on the A D Converter PCA This bidirectional communication circuit A1U5 107 requires power supply voltages from the Power Supply block Digital Inputs and Outputs 2 7 This functional block contains the Totalizer and Trigger Input buffers eight bidirectional Digital channels A1U3 104 1017 A1U27 Master Alarm output and a Trigger Output 1017 These circuits require power supply voltages from the Power Supply and signals from the Digital Kernel Ethernet Interface 2 8 This functional block contains the Ethernet Controller A1U32 used for both 10BASE2 When IOBASE2 is selected by the Ethernet interface an add
89. on the RAM devices used resistor jumpers A1R125 and A1R126 near A1U14 may or may not be used Correction Check the enable signals at the RAM devices including the enable and read write signals If the inputs are correct the devices themselves are suspect If the inputs are incorrect work backwards towards the signal source and locate the device that is not performing Also see Troubleshooting the Digital Kernel Check the A1U29 I O and Memory Decoder to make sure the proper enables and strobes are produced 5 20 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument Table 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems cont Error Error Code Suspect Error Code Code Description Assembly Discussion 4 Display test failure A2 Display Background The 101 microprocessor requests the A2 PCA Display PCA to run a self test and report the results 1 Failure For this error to occur the A2 Display PCA is able to communicate with A1U1 microprocessor but the Display self test is fail Correction Almost certainly the A2 Display PCA has a problem Refer to paragraph A2 Display PCA Troubleshooting 5 Display not A2 Display Background The A1U1 microprocessor requests the A2 responding PCA Display PCA to run a self test and report the results Note 1 Failure For this error to occur the A2 Display PCA did not respond to the A1U1 microprocessor request to run a
90. packet always distinguishable from a NAK Set Global Configuration 2 84 The Command Packet tells the A D the following e Measurement Rate fast medium or slow e Power Line Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz e Scheduled Housekeeping Measurements Enable or Disable Action Performed Sets global configuration parameters instrument measurement rate AC power line frequency and enable or disable housekeeping measurements The default state for the inguard is to measure on the fast rate assuming 60 Hz and with scheduled housekeeping measurements enabled The meaning of scheduled housekeeping measurements depends on the current measurement rate Response Packets Returned Always returns a single response packet Response Packet Format Returns either an ACK packet or a NAK if the command arguments are not recognized Set Channel Configuration 2 85 The Command Packet tells the A D the following Measurement Function VDC VAC 2 Wire Ohms 4 Wire Ohms Frequency Thermocouple OFF Range 90 mV or 300 ohm 300 mV or or 30 kohm 30V or 300 50V 2645 A 150 300V 2640A or 3 750 mV reference junction calibration The range field is ignored for frequency and thermocouple channels Channel Number 0 to 19 though user sees channel to 20 Enable Autorange if bit set ignored for frequency and thermocouple Enable Open Thermocouple Detect if bit set Checksum Action Performed is configuration of a single channel t
91. pass the reset signals between the assemblies Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Table 2 4 A2 Display Power Supply Connections Power Supply A2J1 Pins Nominal Voltage Vcc 8 4 9V dc Vee 6 5 0V de Vload 7 30V dc FILA FIL2 2 3 5 4 Front Panel Switches 2 50 The FPGA monitors the front panel switches see below using six interface signals SWRI through SWR6 The ground connection is already available from the power supply Switch Designation Switch Function 511 COMM 512 Left Arrow 513 DIO 514 Right Arrow 15 MON S16 ENTER 517 Arrow 518 Down Arrow 21 CAL Enable The six Switch Interface Signals SWR1 though SWR6 are connected to bidirectional pins on the FPGA Each successive column has one less switch This arrangement allows the unused interface signals to function as strobe signals when their respective column is driven by the FPGA The FPGA cycles through six steps to scan the complete front panel switch matrix Table 2 5 shows the interface signal state and if the signal state is an output the switches that may be detected as closed In step 1 six I O pins are set to input and the interface signal values are read In steps 2 through 6 the pin listed as O is set to output zero the other pins are read and pins indicated by a Z are ignored Each of the interface signals is pulled up to the 5V dc supply
92. short on channels 2 and 12 determines the zero offset error The four wire ohms gain and offset calibration constants are determined from these two measurements 4 39 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 40 The 57004 provides a limited set of reference resistors where the best resistor for each range is at 63 3 of full scale This will give very good results but making the measurement closer to the full scale value using fixed resistors may give better results When you are using fixed resistors you must use the CAL REF command to tell instrument the value of the new reference resistor When you are using fixed resistors you connect the leads as they are for any four wire ohms measurement Resolve any calibration problems based on the following e Anexecution error gt is returned by the CAL STEP command if the full scale measurement is off by more than 5 from the target or if the zero measurement is off by more than 1 of full scale When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step e When CAL STEP reports an execution error gt due to an out of range measurement it returns the raw measured reading to give you an indication of what was measured When STEP completes successfully it returns the reference value If CAL STEP returns an execution error while measuring the four wire short on channels 2 and 12 the procedure freezes at the internal step that measures
93. so that the RS 232 transmit signal transitions between approximately 5 0 and 5 0V dc When the instrument is not transmitting the driver output TP13 A1U13 3 is approximately 5 0V dc The RS 232 receive signal from A1J4 goes to the RS 232 receiver A1U13 4 which inverts and level shifts the signal so that the input to the serial communication hardware transitions between 0 and 5 0V dc When nothing is being transmitted to the instrument the receiver output TP12 A1U13 13 is 5 0V dc 2 21 NetDAQ Service Manual Data Terminal Ready DTR and Request To Send RTS are modem control signals controlled by the Microprocessor When the instrument is powered up the Microprocessor initially sets DTR and RTS false by setting 101 61 and A1U1 59 high which results in the RS 232 driver outputs A1U13 7 and A1U13 5 respectively going to 5 0V dc When the instrument has initialized the RS 232 interface and is ready to receive and transmit 101 61 and A1U1 59 goes low resulting in the RS 232 DTR and RTS signals going to 5 0V dc The RS 232 DTR and RTS signals remain at 5 0V dc until the instrument is powered down except for a short period of time when the user changes RS 232 communication parameters from the front panel of the instrument Clear To Send CTS and Data Set Ready DSR are modem control inputs from the connected RS 232 equipment Of these signals only CTS is used when CTS flow control is enabled via the RS 232 communication s
94. the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop the instruments scanning Digital Input Test 4 23 This test checks the Digital I O lines when used as inputs 1 Connect Test Leads to DIGITAL I O Connector Remove the 10 position DIGITAL connector from the instrument rear panel Connect a test lead to each DIO line 0 to 7 plus a test lead to the GND line Also connect a test lead to the gt Totalizer output Reinstall the connector 2 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select Click OK to open the Spy window 3 Verify Digital I O Input for all Set Lines In sequence individually ground each DIO line to the GND line using the DIO wires connected in Step 1 Note the change in the DIO status reported in the Spy window as follows None grounded Reported DIO Status 255 DIOO grounded Reported DIO Status 254 DIO1 grounded Reported DIO Status 253 DIO2 grounded Reported DIO Status 251 DIO3 grounded Reported DIO Status 247 DIO4 grounded Reported DIO Status 239 DIOS grounded Reported DIO Status 223 DIO6 grounded Reported DIO Status 191 DIO7 grounded Reported DIO Status 127 4 21 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Totalizer Tests 4 24 The Totalizer Tests check the Totalizer feature for counting and sensitivity Totalizer Count Test 4 25 This test checks the ability of the
95. the Universal Input Module in the instrument Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select the analog channel under test Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Reading Alternately open and short the test leads Observe the measurement for the analog channel under test in the Spy window shows Overload for opened leads and very low resistance for shorted leads less than 10 ohms for the 2640A or less than 1kQ for the 2645 Repeat Test for each Channel Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each channels 3 4 5 and so forth to channel 20 Computed Channel Integrity Test 4 11 Complete the following procedure to test the integrity of each computed channel 21 to 30 to verify each computed channel is capable of making measurements 1 Configure Channels 1 and 2 for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channels 1 and 2 for Ohms 2T 30k range Configure Channel for Average In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channels 21 to 30 for ChanA ChanB Difference with the difference channels being analog channel 1 and analog channel 2 Connect Test Leads Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect test leads to channels 1 and 2 Reinstall the Universal Input Module in the instrument Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select the computed channels 21 to 28 Click OK to open the Spy window NetDAQ Service Manual 5 Verify Reading Alternately open and sho
96. the inguard microprocessor selects the input channel to be measured through the channel selection circuitry sets up the input signal conditioning commands the A D EPLD A3U18 to begin a conversion stops the measurement and then fetches the measurement result The inguard microprocessor manipulates the result mathematically and transmits the reading to the digital kernel Channel Selection 2 16 This circuitry consists of a set of relays and relay control drivers The relays form a tree that routes the input channels to the measurement circuitry Two of the relays are also used to switch between two wire and four wire operation For signal switching and selection the 2640A uses reed relays while the 2645A uses solid state relays 2 2 9 NetDAQ Service Manual Open Thermocouple Check 2 17 Under control of the Inguard Microprocessor the open thermocouple check circuit applies a small ac signal to a thermocouple input before each measurement If an excessive resistance is encountered an open thermocouple input condition is reported A4 Analog Input PCA Block Description 2 18 The following paragraphs briefly describe the major sections of the Input Connector PCA which is the Universal Input Module used for connecting the analog inputs to the instrument 20 Channel Terminals 2 19 Twenty HI and LO terminal blocks are provided in two rows one for channels 1 through 10 and one for channels 11 through 20 The termina
97. the input A3U19 produces an error signal which is amplified by the other halve of A3U19 providing feedback to produce a nulling voltage at A3C60 A3C60 stays charged to this voltage until another cycle is initiated 2 39 NetDAQ Service Manual Integrate 2 69 The integrate state is when the input voltage is actually connected to the integrator PREF and NREF are each switched off and on 10 to 20 times during this state and DREF is still off INT is on AZ is off and the CMP signal is switching off and on The primary signal is pin 7 of A3U19 which looks approximately like a triangular wave with 51 2 us slope when the input voltage is zero The triangular wave is very irregular at other voltages moving on an upward or downward slope and reversing direction within the integrate time period The actual behavior is determined by the algorithm in the FPGA This tests the CMP signal at defined times spaced 51 2 us apart If the CMP signal is turned off then NREF is turned on PREF and NREF are never on at the same time during integrate First the existing reference is turned off and a 1 count 1 6 us period is entered where only the input signal is integrated Next a reference of a polarity such as to keep the total number of NREF pulses so far equal to the number of PREF pulses is turned on for 1 count 1 6 us Finally the reference with a polarity determined by the comparator CMP test at the very first of the interval is turned on
98. the input terminator The instrument reads input into a 350 byte input queue until it finds the input terminator The instrument does not echo input While processing the queued input the instrument parses and processes each command in sequence Therefore earlier commands can execute even if a later command contains a syntax error The prompts have the following meanings gt No error Command was parsed and executed with no errors gt Command error The command contained a syntax error For example the command name or an argument contained a type the command was not a legal command an argument was of the wrong type too many or too few arguments were supplied Since parity is always set to none parity errors cause garbage in the input buffer and this will generate a syntax error at best Execution or device dependent error An execution error occurs when the command was recognized to be an instrument command but was not legal given the current state of the instrument or had an inappropriate parameter value A device dependent error occurs when an instrument specific limitation is exceeded such as input queue size or when the instrument tries to execute the command but it fails for example due to a bad CRC If a command cannot be recognized syntax error the instrument returns the gt error prompt and does not do any more processing on that command or the remaining contents of the input queue If a query had al
99. the short This way you can send a CAL REF command and it will return 0 W indicating that the problem was probably caused by a misapplied short on channels 2 and 12 e device dependent error is returned by the CAL STEP command if an internal error such as a measurement timeout 5 detected When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step e An execution error gt is returned by the CAL REF command if the specified reference is less than 33 of full scale or greater than 10046 of full scale for any range Table 4 7 Manual Resistance Calibration Command Response Action CAL 3 gt Puts NetDAQ in resistance calibration CAL_REF 190 000E 0 5700A Source 190 ohms CAL_STEP 190 000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 1 90000E 3 5700A Source 1 9k ohms CAL_STEP 1 90000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 19 0000E 3 5700A Source 19k ohms CAL_STEP 19 0000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 190 000E 3 5700A Source 190k ohms CAL_STEP 190 000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 1 90000E 6 5700A Source 1 9M ohms CAL_STEP 1 900
100. then press power ON 2 Wait a moment for the instrument to beep then release the key The entire display will now stay on until you are ready to deactivate it 3 Atthe end of the activation period press any button on the front panel the instrument resumes the mode in effect prior to the power interruption Active or Inactive A D Converter PCA Troubleshooting 5 30 The following paragraphs provide troubleshooting hints for the A3 A D Converter PCA Use this material in conjunction with Chapter 2 Theory of Operation N WARNING To avoid electric shock disconnect all channel inputs from the instrument before performing any troubleshooting operations 5 31 NetDAQ Service Manual A3 Kernel 5 31 If the microprocessor detects a fault it drives the HALT signal low and in essence halts itself Monitor the HALT line and if it is not steady and toggles between low and high then there is most certainly a problem with the A3 kernel In this instance check the pull up resistors for the data and addressing lines and then signal conditions at the kernel devices Incorrect jumper settings Table 5 14 can also cause kernel problems Table 5 14 A3 A D Converter PCA Jumper Positions Jumper If Missing If in Place W5 VBOOT enable at A3Q1 VBOOT disable at A3Q1 prevents 06 from initializing error 7 is this jumper is in place when loading reported at the front panel or new A D firmware If you forgot to error
101. to 2V ac rms at 1 MHz 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 2 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 29 2 30 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Introducti Ohe 05 T Functional Block Description eene Main PCA Block Description serene Power Supply sua gua uqaqa Digital Kernel eret enge teen mesa Serial Communication Guard Crossing Digital Inputs and Ethernet Interface eet ren ttr ri A2 Display PCA Block Description esee A D Converter PCA Block Description Analog Measurement Processor Input Protect Omni o ntt rie Input Signal Conditioning Analog to Digital a d Converter eese Inguard Microcontroller eene Channel Selections ete Open Thermocouple Check eee A4 Analog Input PCA Block Description 20 Channel Terminals eene Reference Junction Temperature D
102. to Instrument Problems cont Error Error Code Suspect Error Code Code Description Assembly Discussion 7 Inguard not A3 A D Background The A1U1 processor requests the inguard responding Converter A D Converter PCA to run a self test and report the PCA results Failure For this error to occur the A D Converter PCA did not respond to the A1U1 microprocessor request to run a self test Neither pass nor fail was reported as if the A D Converter PCA is dead or missing Correction Check the ribbon cable connection between A1P10 and 10 or the power supply voltages to the A D Converter PCA Refer to paragraph A3 A D Converter PCA Troubleshooting The A1U1 microprocessor could be damaged for the interface with the A3 A D Converter PCA or possibly the optics opto isolator devices A1U5 and A1U7 for the serial data guard crossing Note that the guard crossing serial data is similar to RS 232 except it uses normal logic levels instead of RS 232 logic levels Another possibility is the digital kernel on the ASA D Converter PCA has failed See Troubleshooting the A3 A D Converter PCA 8 Inguard A D failure A D Background The A1U1 microprocessor requests the A D Converter portion of the inguard A3 A D Converter PCA to run a PCA self test and report the results Failure For this error to occur the A D portion of the A3 A D Converter self test report would be fail Correction The A D p
103. to the Universal Input Module Resistor 14 15 Four Terminal Connections to the Universal Input Module 57004 4 16 Instrument and Host Computer Calibration Setup Universal Input Module Calibration Connections Two Wire Calibration Four Wire Calibration Connection brat rk reat 4 29 Display Test Pattern Display Test Pattern 12 eite t pene Fn Connection to A3P1 for Loading A D Firmware 2640A 264A5 Final Assembly eene 701 702 Final Assembly temet ree rene 6 9 Al Mam PCA Assembly teer sasaw edente rend xi NetDAQ Service Manual 6 2 6 4 65 Power Supply PCA A2 Display PCA Assembly 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 Chapter 1 introduction and Specification Introducti Ohenne Options and Accessories Instrument Connector Set 2620 100 Host Computer Ethernet Interfaces
104. 0 mV to 300V dc Accuracy 0 002 AC Voltage Frequency Voltage Accuracy 1 kHz 29 mV to 300V 0 05 100 kHz 15 mV to 300V 0 5 Frequency 10 kHz 1V rms 0 01 Ohms Ohms Accuracy 1900 0 005 1 9 0 005 19 0 005 190 0 005 1 9 M 0 005 Mercury Thermometer 0 02 C Resolution Princo ASTM 56C Thermocouple Probe Type T Fluke P20T Oil Water Bath Thermos bottle and cap Digital Multimeter General Purpose Measurement Fluke 77 Signal Generator Sine wave 0 5 to 1V rms 10 Hz to 5 kHz Fluke 6011A Alternative Equipment List Instrument Type Recommended Model DC Voltage Calibrator Fluke 5440B DMM Calibrator Fluke 5100B AC Volts Only Function Signal Generator Philips PM5193 or Fluke 6011A Decade Resistance Source General Resistance RDS 66A Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Ethernet Coaxial Cable 50 ohm Minimum cable length is 20 inches 0 5 m eoo Goo 50 ohm 50 ohm 5 Instrument Terminator Terminator ride Terminator Ground Wire Computer FIGURE 4 1 Performance Test Setup 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SOURCE HL Hr Hr ar nr nr 4 WIRE INPUT MODULE SENSE HL HL HL 4 WIRE 123 4 56 7 8 9 10 5700A OUTPUT SENSE VQA CURRENT Fi
105. 0 seconds one of the parameter sets is verified verifying all parameter sets at once is too CPU intensive The following parameter sets are checked e FLASH ROM communication parameters e FLASH ROM calibration constants e FLASH ROM Ethernet address RAM instrument and channel configuration RAM pre computed range scaling and calibration constants used in evaluation RAM copy of calibration constants RAM copy of Ethernet address 5 5 NetDAQ Service Manual When a parameter set 1s discovered to be corrupt the background testing task records the error in the error status register and performs any corrective action required The errors and actions performed on the errors are listed in the below Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Corrective Action for Background Error Checking Error Action FLASH ROM communication parameters corrupt Reset to defaults on next power up FLASH ROM calibration constants corrupt Reset to defaults on next power up FLASH ROM Ethernet address corrupt Reset to defaults on next power up Network interfaces will not activate Any RAM constants corrupt None Internal Software Errors 5 6 Internal software errors are any software conditions which should never occur Internal errors are recorded in an internal store and can be retrieved with the User Network Interface request NETCMD IERROR In addition the front panel will display the error number and the error status bit EST INTERNAL ER
106. 00E 6 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration Manual Frequency Calibration Procedure 4 46 The Frequency calibration procedure calculates a calibration constant that corrects for errors in the frequency counter crystal frequency It is sufficiently accurate to measure single frequency point and calculate the scale factor assuming that the other endpoint is 0 Hz Complete the following procedure to manually calibrate the frequency function 1 If you have not already done so complete the procedure Preparing for Calibration earlier in this chapter Connect the instrument and 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 7 Complete the sequence of manual steps shown in Table 4 8 Channels 1 is configured to frequency and a single measurement is made Table 4 8 Manual Frequency Calibration Command Response Action CAL 4 gt Puts NetDAQ in frequency calibration CAL REF 10 0000E 3 5700A Source 3V ac 10 kHz CAL STEP 10 0000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds 4 Resolve any calibration problems based on the following An execution error gt is returned by the CAL_STEP command if the frequency measurement is off by more than 5 from the target When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the pr
107. 05000E 0 150 300V 2640A 18 VDC 50V 2645A Offset 0 50000E 0 0 50000E 0 150 300V 2640A 3 00000E 0 3 00000E 0 20 VDC 750 mV Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 22 VDC 750 mV Offset 0 00750E 0 0 00750E 0 24 VAC 300 mV Gain 0 90000E 0 1 10000E 0 26 VAC 300 mv Offset 0 00300E 0 0 00300E 0 28 3V Gain 0 90000E 0 1 10000E 0 30 VAC av Offset 0 08000E 0 0 03000E 0 32 VAC 30V Gain 0 90000E 0 1 10000E 0 34 VAC offset 0 30000E 0 0 30000E 0 36 VAC N A 2645A Gain 0 90000E 0 1 10000E 0 150 300 V 2640A 38 VAC N A 2645 Offset 3 00000E 0 3 00000E 0 150 300 V 2640A 40 Resistance 3000 Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 42 Resistance 3000 Offset 3 00000E 0 3 00000E 0 44 Resistance Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 46 Resistance Offset 3 00000E 1 3 00000E 1 48 Resistance 30 kO Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 50 Resistance 30 ka Offset 3 00000E 2 3 00000 2 52 Resistance 300 ka Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 54 Resistance 300 ko Offset 3 00000 3 3 00000E 3 56 Resistance 3 MO Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 58 Resistance 3 Offset 3 00000E 4 3 00000E 4 60 Frequency All CFC 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 crystal frequency correction 5 35 NetDAQ Service Manual The frequency counter calibration constant is simply the Gain constant c
108. 1 Connect Test Leads to ALARM TRIGGER I O Connector Remove the 8 position ALARM TRIGGER I O connector from the instrument rear panel Connect a test lead to each line MA Master Alarm TO Trigger Output TI Trigger Input plus a test lead to the GND line Reinstall the connector Measure Unset MA Line Using a digital multimeter measure the output of the unset MA test lead referenced to the GND test lead for a voltage greater than 3 8 V dc Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows verify channel 1 is configured for Volts dc 3V range Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Alarms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows verify channel 1 is configured for an Alarm 1 with Alarm Sense LO Alarm Value 1 and Digital Output DOO Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button Bar to start instrument scanning Scanning is initiated to enable the Master Alarm output Measure Set MA Line Using a digital multimeter measure the output of the set MA test lead referenced to the GND test lead for a voltage less than 0 8V dc Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop instrument scanning 4 23 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 24 Trigger Input Test 4 28 This test checks the ability of the Trigger Input line to trigger measurement scanning 1 Configure Trigger Input NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure the scan parameters for External Trigger with a
109. 1 HI on r q e 9 C32 O B31 R3 NOTES 50K 25PPM C UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 1 ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS Eu 10K 25PPM C 2620A 1004 Figure 7 5 A4 Analog Input PCA Assembly cont 7 27 2640A 2645A Service Manual 7 28
110. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 oi _ SOURCE 4 WIRE BNC INPUT MODULE SENSE 4 WIRE 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5700A OUTPUT SENSE WIDEBAND on O NC 2 WIRE COMP OFF OFF Sense e Source UUT 5700A Source Sense Figure 4 4 Four Terminal Connections to the Universal Input Module 5700A Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test 4 Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 2 5 Close Spy Window 3000 3000 3 kQ 3 kQ 30 kQ 300 kO 3 MQ Resistance Range Decade Resistor Short Circuit Zero 2902 Short Circuit Zero 2 9 29 290 2 9 MQ Minimum Reading 02 289 8610 00 2 89849 28 9834 289 621 2 89146 The resistance accuracy this table makes allowance for up to 0 01 decade resistance tolerance Maximum Reading 0 0500 290 1390 0 500 2 90137 29 0166 kQ 290 379 kQ 2 90854 3002 3002 3 3 kQ 30 kQ 300 3 MQ Resistance Range 5700A Short Circuit Zero 1900 Short Circuit Zero 1 9 KQ 19 190 1 9 MQ 02 189 9120 02 1 89912 18 9893 kQ 189 750 1 89425 MQ Mini
111. 150 3 0 9 1 0 17 1 0 1 8 150 to 400 2 0 7 0 8 1 4 0 8 15 R 250 to 600 1 24 27 5 6 2 8 57 600 to 1500 1 2 0 23 4 6 24 4 8 1500 to 1767 1 2 0 23 45 28 5 1 ls 250 to 1000 1 2 6 28 5 9 29 6 0 1000 to 1400 1 2 0 23 4 6 2 6 5 0 1400 to 1767 1 23 27 5 3 3 3 5 9 B 600 to 1200 2 36 3 9 8 5 4 0 8 6 1200 to 1550 2 21 24 5 0 2 6 5 2 1550 to 1820 1 2 0 23 47 27 5 0 42 3 6 3 5 5 3 8 1 1 1 25 NetDAQ Service Manual 1 26 2645A Frequency Measurement Specifications Tables 1 41 to 1 42 provide 26454 specifications for the frequency measurement 1 36 function Table 1 41 2645A Frequency Accuracy Specifications Frequency Measurement Accuracy 1 Year 10 C to 60 C 15 Hz to 900 Hz 0 01 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 05 0 02 Hz 0 05 0 2 Hz 900 Hz to 9 kHz 0 1 Hz 1Hz 0 05 0 1 Hz 0 05 1 Hz 9 kHz to 90 kHz 1 Hz 10 Hz 0 05 1 Hz 0 05 10 Hz 90 kHz to 900 kHz 10 Hz 100 Hz 0 05 10 Hz 0 05 100 Hz 1 MHz 100 Hz 1 kHz 0 05 100 Hz 0 05 1kHz Table 1 42 2645A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications Frequency Range Minimum Signal Maximum Signal 300 kHz to 1 MHz Linearly increasing from 150 mV ac rms at 300 kHz to 2V ac rms at 1 MHz 15 Hz to 70 kHz 100 mV ac rms 30V ac rms 70 kHz to 100 kHz 100 mV ac rms 20V ac rms 100 kHz to 200 kHz 150 mV ac rms 10V ac rms 200 kHz to 300 kHz 150 mV ac rms ac rms Linearly decreasing from 7V ac rms at 300 kHz
112. 16 28 53 27 41 55 66 77 4 79 91 3 18 28 39 62 83 99 112 131 VCC29 VCC30 Reference Designations Last Used Not Used BT C66 70 72 74 85 91 94 CR DS J1 lt 16 17 19 29 026 VR1 2 9 2645 1001 Sheet 1 of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly 7 3 2640A 2645A Service Manual TO REAR PANEL POWER SWITCH WP1 WP2 RTI CR3 CRI lt u 1N5397 MBRD360 C59 SHEET7 180PF RXE135 E C2 033 RAW DC SUPPLY v TUNE INVERTER INGUARD SUPPLIES CR2 R2 IN OU VD TP31 AAA 1N5397 59 0K LM2941T 1 ADJ C7 Q1 MMBT3906 AUXILIARY eV SUPPLY U19 TP7 C1 4 LM317L 220 35V MBR140 CR6 MBR140 UNUSED INVERTER NOTE U22 AND U23 ARE POWERED BY THE OUTPUT OF U19 R129 4 02K 1 FLUKE45 6401 9 7 BEIM 3 32 013 _ Q6 470 MMBT3904 5V SWITCHER 2 C26 i Q5 1 MMBT3904 Q8 47 U28 50v CR10 LM358DT MBRD360 SMO eNOS i R28 INVERTER OUTGUARD SUPPLIES y CR9 MMBD7000 CR11 V 49 BAS16 AV 1dSIGQ
113. 18 uV 042 18 2 uV 042 44 2 uv 300 mV O1 HS pV 01 30uV 013 17 uV 013 35 V 042 39 uV 042 78 uV 750 mV 01 40 nV 01 70uV 013 50 uV 013 80 042 104 042 182 uV 3V 01 0 1 mV 01 0 2mV 013 0 15 mV 013 0 2 mV 042 0 26mV 042 0 52 mV 30V 01 1 5 mV 02 3 mV 013 1 7 mV 026 3 5 mV 042 3 9 mV 084 7 8 mV 2640A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications 150 300V 01 15mV 04 30 mV 013 17 mV 052 35 mV 042 39 mV 168 78 mV The 750 mV range is used internally to the instrument and not user selectable 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only Tables 1 16 to 1 18 provide 2640A specifications for the ac voltage measurement function Table 1 16 2640A AC Voltage General Specifications 1 22 Specification Input Impedance Characteristic 1 in parallel with 100 pF Maximum Crest Factor 3 0 Maximum 2 0 for rated accuracy Crest Factor Error For nonsinusoidal input signals with crest factors between 2 and 3 and pulse widths 22100 us add 0 2 to the accuracy specifications Common Mode Rejection Maximum Input Voltage Temperature Coefficient DC Component Error Maximum Volt Hertz Product 80 dB minimum at dc 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 1 imbalance Slow Rate The lesser voltage of 300V ac rms from any terminal on channels 1 and 11 to earth 150V ac rms from any
114. 1d451 bat then press Enter Observe the checklist for this installation a pause press lt Cntl gt lt C gt to escape at this point and then press any key to the launch the executable 1 26 with its appropriate switches for this loading application see Table 5 16 Allow several minutes for the firmware loading process to complete The PC screen will show Loading Line as the firmware is loaded Do not interrupt this process by touching the PC keyboard or removing power from the instrument After the completion of the firmware the screen shows Done Loading and the DOS prompt is returned With the instrument power still on remove the 12V dc connection at A3J3 or A3P2 Turn the instrument power off and remove the connection at A3P1 IMPORTANT Remove the jumper at A3W5 Reinstall the instrument case using the procedure Installing the Instrument Case in Chapter 3 Turn on the instrument power and verify you do not receive self test error code 7 which would indicate you failed to remove the A3W5 jumper in Step 13 To confirm the successful loading of the new firmware see Diagnostic Tool idS earlier in this chapter and note the new version of the A D Firmware identified as AtodM 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Chapter 6 List of Replaceable Parts 19 195 12 Q Er a How To Obtain eie aaa aqa aaa Manual Status Information Newer Instruments
115. 2 If the A1U1 microprocessor or related component in the kernel has failed self test will not initialize See Troubleshooting the Digital Kernel Power On Reset If the input line voltage is too low the A1U10 Power On Reset Power Fail Detector might be generating a POR power on reset PFAIL power failure condition Or if for some other reason the output of the raw dc supply falls below approximately 8 25V dc measured at A1WP1 A1WP2 terminals with the power switch on Locate the low voltage or missing voltage condition A1U1 Microprocessor Task Interrupt Check the CINT signal at A1U11 3 for a nominal output of 64 Hz which is used to switch from one task to the next If the A1U1 microprocessor is not getting this signal it won t switch tasks and the microprocessor will appear dead 5 26 A1 Main PCA Troubleshooting Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument 5 21 The following paragraphs provide troubleshooting hints for the A1 Main PCA Use this material in conjunction with Chapter 2 Theory of Operation N WARNING To avoid electric shock disconnect all channel inputs from the instrument before performing any troubleshooting operations Troubleshooting the A1 Main PCA Digital Kernel 5 22 When the instrument is first powered the resident RAM portion of the A1U1 microprocessor begins to initialize the digital kernel This activity m
116. 25 Description RES MF 10K 1 0 125W 25PPM RES MF 402 1 0 125W 25PPM RES CERM 91K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 45 3K 1 0 1W 100PPM 0805 RES MF 29 4K 1 0 125W 25PPM RES CERM 4 02K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES MF 1K 1 100PPM FLMPRF FUSIBLE RES CF 270 5 0 25W RES CERM 22 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RNET MF FRIT SIP LO V SOURCE RES CERM 100K 5 3W RES CERM 24 9K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 THERMISTOR DISC POS 1K 40 25 RES CERM 1M 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 510 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CF 6 2K 5 0 25W RES CERM 59K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 JUMPER WIRE NONINSUL O 200CTR C COMPARATOR DUAL LOW PWR SOIC C CMOS SRAM 128K X 8 100 NS SO32 C CMOS RS232 DRIVER RECEIVER SOIC C INTEGR MLTIPROTOCOL MPU 16 MHZ QFP PROGRAMMED FLASH PFE C CMOS OCTAL D F F 4EDG TRG SOIC IC VOLT REG 5 V LO DO IQ 500MA SOT223 C CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR GATE SOIC C COMPARATOR HI SPEED PRECISION IC OP AMP DUAL PICOAMP IB SO8 C ARRAY 7 NPN DARLINGTON PAIRS SOIC C LSTTL BCD DEC DECODER DRIVER SOIC C CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT AND GATE SOIC C CMOS HEX INVERTER UNBUFFERED SOIC C EPLD PROGRAMMED 2645A 90220 PLCC84 C OP AMP DUAL LO POWR SNGL SUP 8PDIP C OP AMP DUAL RAIL RAIL VOUT SO8 IC CMOS TRIPLE 2 1 LINE ANLG MUX SOIC C BPLR TRUE RMS DC CONVERTER C OP AMP PRECISION SINGLE SUPPLY SO8 C OP AMP JFET INPUT DECOMP SOIC IC TWIN WELL STALLION ASSEMBLY TESTED C OP AMP DUAL HIGH BW SNGL SUP SO8 ZENER UNCOM
117. 2640A 2645A NetDAQ Data Acquisition Tools Service Manual PN 942615 March 1995 1995 Fluke Corporation Inc All rights reserved Printed in U S A ies All product names are trademarks of their respective compani LIMITED WARRANTY amp LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment Parts product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller and does not apply to fuses disposable batteries or to any product which in Fluke s opinion has been misused altered neglected or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non defective media Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Warranty support is available if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buy
118. 2645A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2645A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2645A Four Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2645A Two Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications NetDAQ Service Manual 1 34 1 35 1 36 Theory error rct phar nane u nnus U ERR E M M A EU 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 2 2 22 Jntrod ction Functional Block Description eene Detailed Circuit Description 2645A Four Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement Specification S 1 24 2645 Thermocouple 5 1990 Measurement Specification S EM 2645A Frequency Measurement Specifications 1 26 1 Main PCA Block Description Power Supply u etie t Digital Kernel ce Serial Communication Guard Crossing Digital Inputs and Outputs eese Ethernet Interface A2 Display PCA Block Description A D Converter PCA Block Description Analog Measurement Processor Input Protection
119. 2650 mV 2926 50 mV 300 mV 20 to 50 Hz 3954 25 6 5mV 3 5 25 7 5 mV 50 to 150 Hz 0 4 25 mV 1964 5 mV 0 5 25 mV 1 5 5 mV 150 Hz to 10 kHz 0 3 25 mV 1964 5 0 4 25 1 5 5 mV 10 kHz to 20 kHz 0 4 25 mV 1 5mV 0 7 25 mV 1 5 5 mV 20 kHz to 50 kHz 2943 395mV 3 4 3mV 4 4 5 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz 595 5 mV 795mV 8 1 mV av 20 to 50 Hz 3 25 mV 69 45 mV 3 59642 5 mV 7 5 mV 50 to 150 Hz 0 4 2 5 mV 19645 0 5 42 5 mV 1 29645 mV 150 Hz to 10 kHz 0 3 2 5 mV 19645 0 4 2 5 mV 1 29645 mV 10 kHz to 20 kHz 0 49542 5 mV 1 5mV 0 5 2 5 mV 1 29645 mV 20 kHz to 50 kHz 19 43 mV 1 59546 mV 1 59643 mV 2 6 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz 29645 mV 395410 mV 3 5 _ 49610 mV 30V 20 to 50 Hz 3 25 mV 696450 3 596425 mV 796450 mV 50 to 150 Hz 0 495425 mV 196450 0 5 425 mV 1 2 40 mV 150 Hz to 10 kHz 0 395425 1 50 0 5 425 mV 1 2 40 mV 10 kHz to 20 kHz 0 495425 mV 195450 0 5 425 mV 1 2 40 mV 496 100 mV 150 300V 20 to 50 Hz 3 25V 50 to 150 Hz 0 4 25V 6 5V 1 5V 3 5 25V 0 5 25V 7 5 1 2 4V 1 Sinewave inputs gt 6 of scale and signals with crest factors 2 150 Hz to 2 kHz 0 3 25V 1 2 5V 0 5 25V 1 4 4V Vx Hz 2 106 2 kHz to 20 kHz V lt 100V 0 4 25V 1 6 5V 0 5 25V 1 8 4V 20 kHz to 50 kHz V lt 40V 1
120. 2V Vss outputs for the inguard circuitry Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Raw DC Supply 2 24 The raw dc supply circuitry receives input from power transformer T401 which operates from an ac source of 107V to 264V ac The power transformer is energized whenever the power cord is plugged into the ac line there is no on off switch on the primary side of the transformer The transformer has an internal 275V ac metal oxide varistor MOV to clamp line transients The MOV normally acts as an open circuit When the peak voltage exceeds approximately 400V the line impedance in series with the line fuse limits transients to approximately 450V AII line voltages use a time delay 0 15 A 250V fuse On the secondary side of the transformer rectifiers 1 2 AICR3 and capacitor rectify and filter the output When ON switch 151 the rear panel POWER switch connects the output of the rectifiers to the filter capacitor and the rest of the instrument Depending on line voltage the output of the rectifiers is between 8 0 and 35V dc Capacitor A1C2 is used for electromagnetic interference EMI and electromagnetic compatibility EMC requirements Capacitor 1 helps supply the high frequency ripple current drawn by the switching regulator described below When external dc power is used the power switch connects the external dc source to power the instrument The external dc input uses thermistor for over
121. 32709 837492 747261 844733 769778 769778 106930 832279 867572 943097 112383 742544 742544 837732 942594 821116 821116 830489 830489 914242 927389 831529 845334 855221 875695 875690 867734 Tot Qty R a 40 N N N N N o cos AGNOS x Notes Table 6 2 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator L2 4 L3 L5 13 P1 P2 P10 Q1 Q5 6 Q7 8 Q9 Q10 R1 14 22 R25 39 127 R2 R3 16 97 15 130 R5 6 29 R31 107 R7 8 28 R34 49 58 R121 122 136 R9 12 46 R129 131 R10 44 R11 132 R13 18 84 R128 R17 R19 R20 R21 R23 35 41 R45 63 73 R78 R24 R26 R27 R32 68 76 R92 100 120 R33 71 83 R98 R36 R37 R38 126 R40 R42 65 85 R87 R43 47 64 R70 74 75 R79 81 99 R123 124 134 Description CHOKE 6TURN INDUCTOR 20UH 20 1 15ADC FERRITE CHIP 600 OHM 100 MHZ 1206 JACK MODULAR PWB RT ANG 8 POS 8 PIN CONN COAX BNC F PWB RT ANG CABLE ASSY FLAT 10 CONDUCT 6 0 TRANSISTOR SI PNP SMALL SIGNAL SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI NPN SMALL SIGNAL SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI N MOS 50W D PAK TRANSISTOR SI NPN 25V SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI N DMOS FET SOT 23 RES CERM 47K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 698K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 360 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 10 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 12 4K 1 0 1W 100PPM 0805 RES CERM 470 5
122. 3522 831529 602490 528257 746610 811778 806240 745992 820993 837054 806620 837245 836296 Tot Qty Yoko RAE Sa ee wx ee ek ole AST Notes 6 6 15 Service Manual NetDAQ 2620A 1601 1945 2 19 AAA 1 8 r UE upiana 10 L S 65 19 1 1 9571 28 o 0 t ers 1 us t s tug 093 2 LA CE Ul WENTW NON NIN 157 ONNA 185 NVOS Gu xv Malas 000000000000 60000000 o law 32 3405 2 172 2 Display Assembly 3 Figure 6 6 16 Table 6 4 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator C1 4 6 C12 16 24 C28 30 32 C34 36 42 C47 49 55 C61 63 69 C70 75 77 C78 81 86 C96 C5 13 15 C31 33 45 C46 67 68 C25 48 C26 27 C35 56 C43 C44 C57 59 C60 C64 65 C66 C71 72 C73 C74 C76 C79 C80 C82 C83 84 C85 C97 98 CR1 6 CR7 21 CR8 14 17 CR19 CR15 J1 J2 J3 J10 K1 20 23 K24 K21 22 K25 26 K27 L1 49 51 L50 53 71 L52 MP200 MP813 815 P1 2 Description CAP CER 0 1UF 10 25V X7R 1206 CAP 10UF 20 16V 6032 CAP CER 0 01UF 10 50V X7R 1206 CAP
123. 5V M5M51008AFP N o oo JN o o n L12 U20 VCC VCC20 5UH C90 4 25V M5M51008AFP U20 STATIC RAM L9 U35 VCC VCC35 5UH C19 E 25V M5M51008AFP Em 34 VCC 1 VCC34 5UH C77 1 25V M5M51008AFP gt gt Schematic Diagrams 7 MC145406DW MC145406DW U37 U37 6 MC145406DW U37 4 To 13 NOTE P3 AND U37 ARE NOT INSTALLED IN PRODUCTION ASSEMBLIES VCC R127 MC145406DW 47K U37 DEBUG INTERFACE 0 lt 15 0 gt lt 23 1 gt CONTROL 2645A 1001 Sheet 5 of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 7 7 2640A 2645A Service Manual L13 U21 VCC VCC21 5UH C78 4 FLASH MEMORY KEYBOARD I F U21 28F400BX DQ15 A 1 DQ14 DQ13 0012 0011 DQ10 DQ9 DQ8 DQ7 DQ6 DQ5 DQ4 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 DQ0 92 lo a 4 N o v o o o A0 WS IO A1 CS2 IO 2 1 D0 DIN IO A3 IO D1 IO A4 IO D2 IO A5 IO D3 IO A6 IO D4 IO A7 IO D5 IO XC3030 70PQ100C A8 IO D6 IO A9 IO D7 IO FPGA A10 IO A11 IO 1 TCLKIN IO U31 A12 IO C73 XTL1 BCLKIN IO 13 10 4 XTL2 IO A14 IO A15 IO
124. 64 over the RS 232 remove the jumper you would receive interface this error W6 Flash disabled error 7 is reported at Flash enabled the front panel or error 64 over the RS 232 interface W8 A D HI disable between the dc buffer A D HI enable between the dc amplifier and a d converter A D buffer amplifier and a d converter failure converter A D converter operate Normal jumper position is shown in bold Break Reset Circuit 5 32 Check the break reset circuit formed by A3U1 and A3U3 and related components The result line at A3U1 7 IG RESET Inguard Reset At power up IG RESET should stay low for about 250 ms and then go high for normal operation If IG RESET fails to go high then troubleshoot the reset circuit When IG RESET goes high the signal HALT at A3UI 1 should also go high HALT is an I O pin on the A3U5 microprocessor Out of Tolerance Readings 5 33 Out of tolerance readings may occur even though self test passed This could be an out of calibration problem due to too long a cycle between instrument calibrations or due to a failure Clues come from the range and function where the problem occurs If the problem is all functions and all ranges this points to A D converter problems in particular the precision voltages used for measurements To locate problem complete the Performance Test in Chapter 4 and note which parameters are out of tolerance If all parameters are out of tolerance this poin
125. 87 The last byte of each command and response packet is its checksum Any time a packet that fails its checksum test is received it is treated as a communication error The inguard transmits a break and waits to be reset The outguard resets the inguard Errors 2 88 Whenever the inguard encounters an unrecoverable error or a guard crossing communications error e g parity error overrun it attempts to send a break character to the outguard and then goes into a loop ignoring all subsequent commands from the outguard and waits to be reset by the outguard This insures that all measurement hardware is properly reset This type of error could be caused by a glitch in the inguard hardware which is conceivable but rare The inguard returns a NAK whenever it receives an illegal command or a command with illegal parameters Such an error should never occur and probably indicates a software defect The exception to this is that an error in a scan command returns a break instead of a NAK Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description Power Up Protocol 2 89 The inguard powers up silently without sending any kind of unsolicited information to the outguard The outguard after powering up waits 3 5 seconds before attempting to communicate with the inguard to allow it to complete its initialization procedure and power on self tests The inguard performs only limited self tests automatically on power up The full set of self tests
126. 9 821116 867333 876107 943113 756858 929711 929711 944488 836486 715078 943704 944509 944251 152207 838458 845334 Tot Qty 60 10 A 9 50 Notes 6 6 17 NetDAQ Service Manual 6 18 Table 6 4 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont Reference Designator Q1 Q2 4 Q3 Q5 Q6 9 19 Q20 23 26 Q10 16 017 18 21 Q22 Q33 R1 6 23 R38 42 46 R47 49 57 R60 144 145 R2 3 20 44 R45 75 78 R95 98 149 R150 152 R5 61 65 R101 147 R7 14 17 R19 24 37 R43 59 109 R115 118 153 R166 168 R15 102 104 R126 134 139 R16 108 136 R137 R21 R22 62 106 R107 129 131 R154 158 160 R164 165 184 R48 85 92 R148 151 R58 R66 68 70 R72 73 81 R84 R67 R69 96 R71 R74 97 105 R120 124 142 R143 R76 112 114 R77 R79 R80 Description TRANSISTOR SI N DMOS FET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI N JFET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI P CHAN SOT 23 REF AMP SET TRANSISTOR SI N JFET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI N JFET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI NPN SELECT IEBO SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI PNP SMALL SIGNAL SOT 23 RES CERM 10K 1 0 1W 100PPM 0805 RES CERM 470K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 10K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 1 07K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 47 5 0625W 200PPM 0603 RES CERM 100K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 30 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206
127. A Power Fail Detector provides a power supply status signal to the Microprocessor in the Digital Kernel Within the Ethernet interface 1016 A1U32 there is an inverter module that provides an isolated 9V dc supply for the 10 5 2 transceiver The inverter module is powered from the 4 9V dc Vcc supply There is also a small power supply that provides a programming voltage Vpp for the FLASH EPROM device on the outguard digital kernel 107024 gt y Power V ac In 3t Switch 5V Switcher gt 44 9V Vcc 9 to 16 dc In es 5 4V ac display Inverter 3 gt 30V dc display Regulator 5 2V dc Vdd Regulator Regulator 5 6V dc Vddr 4 Regulator gt 5 2V dc Vss Regulator gt 5 0V dc Vee Figure 2 3 Power Supply Block Diagram Digital Kernel 2 5 The Digital Kernel functional block is responsible for the coordination of all activities within the instrument This block requires voltages from the Power Supply and signals from the Power on Reset circuit Specifically the Digital Kernel microprocessor A1U1 performs the following functions e Executes the instructions stored in FLASH EPROM 1021 e Stores instrument calibration data in FLASH EPROM 2 7 NetDAQ Service Manual e Communicates with the microprocessor
128. AL Enable button is located on the right side of the display beneath a calibration seal Press this button with a blunt tipped object Do not press CAL ENABLE unless you intend to calibrate the instrument If you have activated Calibration and wish to exit press CAL ENABLE momentarily a second time or turn the instrument off Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration RS43 Null Modem Cable RS40 Null Modem Cable DB 9 Female to DB 9 Female DB 25 Female to DB 9 Female RS 232 RS 232 Port Port COM1 DB 9 COM2 DB 25 NJ i J NetDAQ 1 NetDAQ 2 Host Computer Figure 4 5 Instrument and Host Computer Calibration Setup 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 HL HLHLHLHLHLHLHLHLHL 000000 H L HL HL HL HLHLHLHL OOOO ooo HL HL 11 Figure 4 6 Universal Input Module Calibration Connections 4 27 NetDAQ Service Manual There are two connection methods used between the leads from the instrument Universal Input Module and the 5700A Calibrator The volts dc volts ac and resistance functions use the two wire connection shown in Figure 4 7 The resistance function uses the four wire connection shown in Figure 4 8 Ending Calibration 4 33
129. ATE SOIC 838276 1 U16 C COAXIAL TRANSCEIVER ETHERNET PLCC 944723 1 U17 27 7 NPN DARLINGTON PAIRS SOIC 821009 2 U18 C VOLT REG FIXED 5 0 VOLTS 0 1 AMPS 454793 1 U19 C VOLT REG ADJ 1 2 TO 32 810242 1 U20 30 34 IC CMOS SRAM 128K X 8 100 NS SO32 914101 4 U35 914101 U21 IC PROGRAMMED FLASH MAIN 949677 1 U22 C CMOS DUAL D F F EDG TRG SOIC 782995 1 U23 C CMOS HEX INVERTER UNBUFFERED SOIC 806893 1 U25 C VOLT REG ADJ NEG LO DROPOUT TO 220 943936 1 U29 C 16V8 PROGRAMMED 2645A 90130 PLCC20 943159 1 U31 IC PROG GATE ARRAY 3000 G 70 MHZ PQFP 887138 1 U32 C ETHERCOUPLER CONTROLLER PQFP160 929612 1 U33 IC CMOS SRAM 32K X 8 70 5 5028 929609 1 U36 IC CMOS QUAD INPUT GATE SOIC 830703 1 U38 PWR SUP 5VIN 9VOUT 1 8W 929583 1 6 12 Table 6 2 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Reference Designator Fluke Stock Description No ZENER UNCOMP 6 8V 5 20MA 0 2W SOT 23 837195 HEADER 1 ROW 100CTR 2 PIN 643916 DC POWER WIRE 938139 CRYSTAL 15 36MHZ 50PPM SURFACE MT 943167 CRYSTAL 20 00MHZ 30PPM HC 49M 867051 RES CERM NET CUSTOM 821157 RES CERM SOIC 16 PIN 15 RES 22K 2 867841 RES CERM SOIC 20 PIN 10 RES 47K 2 867846 Tot Qty ooo ee Notes 6 6 13 NetDAQ Service Manual TPS acm ie Luc ur
130. C Volts and Thermocouples Measurement Circuitry Ohms and RTD Measurement Circuitry AC Volts Measurement Frequency Measurements essere rennen Active Filter Filter Voltage Reference Circuit eese Analog Digital Converter Circuit eene Inguard Digital Kernel Circuitry Open Thermocouple Detect Circuitry ii Contents continued 2 75 A4 Analog Input PCA Circuit Description 2 76 to A D Converter Communications 2 TT Special Codes T 2 78 tavta ta tag 2 79 Commands cci cete m sss 2 80 SCAM Mc 2 81 Perform Self Test 2 82 Return Main Firmware Version 2 83 Return Boot Firmware Version 2 84 Set Global Configuration sees 2 85 Set Channel Configuration eese 2 86 Do Hou sekeeping 2 87 CHECK SUMS i he iD rote PE 2 98 EOTS opisina 2 89 Power Up ee tet aTa 2 90 Inguard 2
131. CAL CLR CAL CONST CAL CONST CAL REF CAL REF and CAL STEP The other commands are described in this chapter The instrument does not accept the calibration commands unless calibration mode is enabled In calibration mode the instrument does not accept some non calibration commands It is expected that users will make all calibration adjustments and exit calibration mode before performing calibration verification Calibration verification readings will be made in the slow reading rate which is the power on and reset default therefore no command is provided for setting the rate Table 5 7 RS 232 Command Set Identification query z OPC Operation complete query Not Cal RST Reset TST Self test query SELFTEST Return current selftest results reference value CAL Start calibration procedure for indicated P function CAL Return the identifier of any CAL procedure in progress CAL CLR Reset calibration constants to nominal value CAL_CONST Query the value of a particular calibration constant CAL_REF Specify value to calibrate to in place of default CAL REF Query the present calibration reference value CAL STEP Calibrate and query the calibrated value of the input FUNC Configure function range terminals for channel 1 FUNC Query function range terminals for channel 1 MEAS Trigger and query a measurement on channel 1
132. COM o TESTPORTRECV LT 1129 5 RS232 on OTCCLK OTC EN OTC DISCHARGE VBOOT FROM SHEET 4 2645A 1003 1000PF Sheet 1 of 6 Figure 7 4 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 20 Schematic Diagrams 7 DATA lt 7 0 gt DATA lt 7 0 gt LATCH ENABLE 0 ADDRESS lt 16 0 gt 74 32 SERIAL BUS 74AC32M SB RECV Y2 402 10 0 MHZ N U18 EPM7128LC84 4 lO MC3 lO MC59 IO MC5 IO 61 IO MC8 IO MC64 IO MC8 IO MC65 IO NCH IO MC67 IO NC13 IO MC69 IO MC14 IO 72 IO 6 IO MC73 IO 17 IO MC75 IO NC19 IO MC77 DE INT IO MC21 IO MC80 IO MC24 IO MC83 IO MC25 IO MC85 3 IO 27 IO MC86 AAA IO MC29 IO MC88 IO MO32 I IO MC35 IO MC93 IO MC37 IO MC94 IO MC38 IO MC96 IO MC40 IO MC97 IO MC43 IO MC99 IO MC45 IO MC101 IO MC46 IO 104 AA IO MC48 IO MC105 IO 49 IO MC107 IO MC51 IO MC109 IO MC53 IO MC112 A D INTERRUPT IO MC56 IO NC115 IO 57 IO MC117 IO MC118 INOE1 IO MC120 2 IO NC123 IO NC125 IN GCLR IO MC126 2 5 2 INGCLK 19 728 FOUT SCF IMAGE STAL SELECT UA CONTROL BUS I T9 1454060 RS232 IC145406DW IG RESET A D SM SELE
133. CR17 CR11 12 20 CR22 DS1 DS2 3 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 L1 Description BATTERY LITHIUM 3 0V 0 560AH CAP AL 220UF 20 35V SOLV PROOF CAP CER 0 033UF 20 100V X7R 1206 CAP CER 22PF 10 50V COG 1206 CAP AL 47UF 20 50V SOLV PROOF CAP AL 10000UF 20 35V SOLV PROOF CAP AL 1UF 20 50V SOLV PROOF 1000 5 50 06 1206 CAP AL 470UF 20 16V SOLV PROOF CAP AL 2200UF 20 10V SOLV PROOF CAP CER 0 1UF 10 25V X7R 1206 CAP AL 2 2UF 20 50V SOLV PROOF CAP CER 1000PF 20 3000V Z5U CAP AL 47UF 20 100V SOLV PROOF CAP CER 0 01UF 10 50V X7R 1206 CAP CER 0 047UF 10 100V X7R CAP CER 180PF 10 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 0 01UF 100 0 1600V Z5U CAP CER 4700PF 10 50V X7R 1206 CAP TA 10UF 20 16V 6032 DIODE SI 60 PIV 3 AMP SCHOTTKY DIODE SI 600 PIV 1 5 AMP DIODE SI BV 70V IO 50MA DUAL SOT23 DIODE SI 40 PIV 1 AMP SCHOTTKY DIODE SI SCHOTTKY DUAL 30V SOT 23 DIODE SI BV 100 IO 100MA DUAL SOT23 DIODE SI BV 75V IO 250MA SOT23 LED YELLOW RIGHT ANGLE 3 MCD LED RED RIGHT ANGLE 3 0 MCD HEADER 1 ROW 050CTR 20 PIN HEADER 1 ROW 100CTR 3 PIN CONN D SUB PWB RT ANG 9 PIN HEADER 1 ROW 197CTR RT ANG 10 PIN HEADER 1 ROW 197CTR RT ANG 8 PIN FERRITE CHIP 95 OHMS 100 MHZ 3612 Fluke Stock No 821439 929708 886655 740563 740563 822403 822403 875203 782805 867408 867408 772855 875208 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 769687 8
134. CT A D TRIGGER CMND STROBE IG RESET UA o UNUSED printed Fri Apr 8 44 24 44 PDT 1984 RS232 ciasaospw 2 74 EPM7128LC84 4 0 R ann HM628128LFP MC145406DW MC68302 00 OD E Le e Na 16 13 23 29 34 44 57 67 84 102 1 ULN2004 2645A 1003 Sheet 2 of 6 Figure 7 4 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont 7 21 RJSENSE SSTH17 R120 2640A 2645A Service Manual C76 p S SSTH17 SSTH17 SSTH17 Jr 4 3PF 50V R139 nos SSTH17 Q12 Q10 015 SSTH17 gt AAA 100K 196 MMBD7000 SB90041 HI SENSE R111 D OHMS 3VDC amp 3VDC HI R110 CH24 CR15 SB90041 C98 180PF 50V SB90041 30VDC 300VDC HI SENSE OHMS HI SOURCE FUSIBLE R146 S42 BIAS_AMP BIAS AGND NBIAS MPS6560 _ 15M 270
135. Calibration command is shown continue to Step 4 otherwise continue to Step 3 Utilities Binary to ASCII Conversion ASCII Timestamp Conversion Binary to Trend Link Conversion Instrument Calibration Close the Logger for Windows application Complete the following procedure to append the C switch on the NetDAQ Logger command line which enables and displays the Instrument Calibration command under the Utilities menu a Select but do not open the NetDAQ Logger icon in the Fluke NetDAQ Logger group in Program Manager below Fluke NetDAQ Logger Release Notes Logger b Select the Properties command in Program Manager File menu to open the Program Item Properties dialog box c Append the C switch at the end of the command line text Example C NNETDAQNNETDAQ EXE as shown below If you have also included a setup file on the command line place the C switch after the setup file name Click OK Program Properties Description NetDAQ Logger Command Line C NETDAQ_EXE Working Directory C NETDAQ Shortcut Key None 0 Run Minimized Change Icon d Open NetDAQ Logger from the Fluke NetDAQ Logger group in Program Manager Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration 4 Select the Instrument Calibration command from the Utilities menu opening the Instrument Calibration dialog box below Instrument Calibratio
136. Configure the performance test setup as described below The performance test requires a complete network connection between the host computer and instrument under test including a host computer Ethernet interface and installation of NetDAQ Logger for Windows software If you have not yet configured and tested a network connection for the host computer and instrument complete the appropriate installation procedure for your network configuration in the separate NetDAQ Getting Started manual before conducting any performance testing 1 Connect the Instrument and the Host Computer Connect the supplied 50 ohm coaxial cable with a BNC T or Y and 50 ohm terminator between the host computer BNC Ethernet port and the instrument BNC Ethernet port The 50 ohm terminator with the ground lead is used at the instrument with the terminator ground lug connected to the ground terminal adjacent to the BNC port Figure 4 1 2 Connect the 5700A to Channel 1 Connect a cable from the Output VA HI and LO connectors of the 5700A to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 connecting the 5700A HI to terminal H and LO to terminal L Insert the Universal Input Module into the instrument under test Figure 4 2 4 3 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 4 Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment Instrument Type Minimum Specifications Recommended Model Multifunction DC Voltage Fluke 5700A Calibrator Range 9
137. DAQ Service Manual Conventions 1 8 Throughout the manual set certain notational conventions are used A summary of these conventions follows e Instrument Reference The term instrument is used in this manual to refer to both the 2640A NetDAQ and 2645A NetDAQ networked data acquisition units The model number 2640A or 2645A is used when discussing characteristics unique to one instrument e Printed Circuit Assembly The term pca is used to represent a printed circuit board and its attached parts e Signal Logic Polarity On schematic Diagrams a signal name followed by a character is active or asserted low Signals not so marked are active high e Circuit Nodes Individual pins or connections on a component are specified with a dash following the assembly and component reference designators For example pin 19 of U30 on assembly A1 would be A1U30 19 e Front Panel Interface User Notation For front panel operation XXX an uppercase word or symbol without parentheses indicates a button to be pressed by the user Buttons can be pressed in four ways 1 Press a single button to select a function or operation 2 Press a combination of buttons one after the other 3 Press and hold down a button then press another button 4 Press multiple buttons simultaneously Computer Interface User Notation For computer interface operation XXX An uppercase word without parentheses identifies a command by name XXX Angle br
138. DC voltage levels greater than 3V are attenuated To measure resistance a dc current is applied across a series connection of the input resistance and a reference resistance to develop dc voltages that can be ratioed DC volts and ohms measurements are filtered by a passive filter AC voltages are first scaled by an ac buffer converted to a representative dc voltage by an rms converter and then filtered by an active filter Analog to Digital a d Converter 2 14 The dc voltage output from the signal conditioning circuits is applied to a multi slope A D converter The input voltage is applied to a buffer integrator that charges a capacitor for an exact amount of time During this time positive and negative reference voltages are alternately applied to the integrator The references are switched in a sequence controlled by the A D Electrically Programmed Logic Device EPLD A3U18 which prevents the integrator from saturating The amount of time that each reference is applied to the integrator and the amount of time required to discharge the capacitor are measured by digital counter circuits in the A D EPLD A3U18 These times are used by the inguard microprocessor A3U5 to calculate the level of the unknown input signal Inguard Microcontroller 2 15 This microprocessor A3U5 and associated circuitry controls all functions on the A D Converter PCA and communicates with the digital kernel on the Main PCA Upon request by the Main PCA
139. Drive Circuit 2 52 The Beeper Drive circuit drives the speaker A2LS1 to provide an audible response to a button press A valid entry yields a short beep an incorrect entry yields a longer beep The circuitry consists of a dual four bit binary counter 204 and a NAND gate A2U6 used as an inverter One four bit free running counter A2U4 divides the 1 024 MHz clock signal E from the FPGA DSCLK by 2 to generate the 512 kHz clock CLK1 used by the Display Controller This counter also divides the 1 024 MHz clock by 16 generating the 64 kHz clock that drives the second four bit binary counter A2UA The second four bit counter is controlled by an open drain output on the Display Controller A2U1 17 and pull down resistor A2R1 When the beeper A2LS1 is off A2U1 17 is pulled to ground by A2R1 This signal is then inverted by A2U6 with A2U6 6 driving the CLR input high to hold the four bit counter reset Output A2U4 8 of the four bit counter drives the parallel combination of the beeper A2LS1 and A2R10 to ground to keep the beeper silent When commanded by the Microprocessor the Display Controller drives A2U1 17 high enabling the beeper and driving the CLR input of the four bit counter A2U4 12 low A 4 kHz square wave then appears at counter output A2U4 8 and across the parallel combination of A2LS1 and A2R10 causing the beeper to resonate 2 28 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Watchdog Timer and Reset C
140. ES OR LOSSES INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA WHETHER ARISING FROM BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BASED ON CONTRACT TORT RELIANCE OR ANY OTHER THEORY Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 5602 B D Eindhoven 98206 9090 The Netherlands 5 94 SAFETY TERMS IN THIS MANUAL This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC publication 1010 1 1992 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Measuring Control and Laboratory Equipment and ANSI ISA 582 01 1994 and CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 This User Manual contains information warning and cautions that must be followed to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Use of this equipment in a manner not specified herein may impair the protection provided by the equipment This instrument is designed for IEC 1010 1 Installation Category use It is not designed for connection to circuits rated over 4800 VA WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of li
141. ET MF FRIT SIP HI V DIVIDER Fluke Stock No 930201 929690 783266 650085 746313 810424 746230 783241 926691 615435 867689 746677 836387 887109 816090 837211 914101 821538 910831 949680 838029 92964 838276 822197 910836 821009 742007 853671 830703 806893 929695 929604 929596 929013 707653 905315 837237 933502 929075 837187 837161 643916 943167 520239 926688 849984 645341 655811 847363 926733 Tot Qty woe ae HOD Notes List of Replaceable Parts 6 Parts Lists Table 6 5 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont Reference NS Fluke Stock Description Designator No Tot Qty Notes Z8 _RNET MF POLY SIP 2280 LO V DIVIDER 611186 1 1 FUSIBLE RESISTOR USE EXACT REPLACEMENT ONLY 6 25 NetDAQ Service Manual
142. Error Code Description RAM constants corrupt Ethernet chip or RAM failure A1 Main PCA A1 Main PCA Suspect Assembly Error Code Discussion Background The A1U11 real time clock device has resident RAM that stores constants A1U11 is powered by Vbb the source of which is either the battery BT1 or the supply Vcc depending if the instrument is powered or not via A1U10 Failure For this error to occur the constants are no longer stored 1011 RAM Correction This might happen if the battery BT1 is dead or a problem with A1U10 power supply monitor or the A1U11 chip itself Background The Ethernet controller A1U32 has associated RAM A1U33 The addition of the 10BASE2 transceiver A1U16 completes the device complement of the Ethernet interface Failure For this error to occur the self test that simulates Ethernet activity using A1U32 and A1U33 has to fail Correction Check Ethernet operation using both 10BASE2 and 10BASE T If the Ethernet interface operates over 10BASE T but not 10BASE2 then the Ethernet transceiver A1U16 is suspect If Ethernet does not operate over either interface then 1032 and 1033 are suspect Also see Troubleshooting the Digital Kernel Also check A1U29 for I O and memory decoding Note 1 Obviously if the display is not operating the display may not show an error code You can extract the error codes via the RS 232 interface See Retrieving Error Codes using
143. F command for the full scale measurement if the specified reference is less than 33 of full scale or greater than 100 of full scale for any range An execution error gt is returned by the CAL REF command for the low scale measurement if the specified reference is less than 10 of full scale or greater than 30 of full scale for any range Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration Table 4 6 Manual VAC Calibration Command Response Action CAL 2 gt Puts NetDAQ in calibration CAL_REF 30 0000 3 5700A Source 30 mV ac 1 kHz CAL_STEP 30 0000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL REF 300 000E 3 5700A Source 300 mV ac 1 kHz CAL STEP 300 000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL REF 300 000 3 5700A Source 300 mV ac 1 kHz CAL_STEP 300 000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 3 00000E 0 5700A Source 3V ac 1 kHz CAL_STEP 3 00000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 3 0000E 0 5700A Source 1 kHz CAL_STEP 3 0000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 30 0000E 0 5700A
144. FPWR RPCTL 2W 3 9 14 19 23 37 39 44 64 FPWR RPCTL 13 19 28 35 37 39 44 64 FPWR RPCTL 2w300ka 8 12 19 23 35 37 39 44 64 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL lowsmo 7 11 19 23 35 37 39 44 64 FPWR RPCTL 4 3000 10 15 19 23 35 37 39 44 64 FPWR RPCTL 4W 9 14 19 23 35 37 39 44 64 FPWR RPCTL 8 13 19 23 35 37 39 44 64 BR3 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL lawsooko 8 12 19 28 35 37 39 44 64 FPWR RPCTL 7 11 19 23 35 37 39 44 64 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL Freq 300 mV 1 17 18 26 32 34 38 44 64 ACR1 FPWR FHYSTO FHYST1 RPCTL Freq 3V 17 18 26 32 34 44 64 2 FPWR FHYSTO FHYST1 RPCTL Freq 30V 1 17 18 26 32 34 38 44 64 FPWR FHYSTO FHYST1 RPCTL Freq HIV 17 18 26 32 34 38 44 64 FPWR FHYSTO FHYST1 RPCTL i same as VDC 90 mV ACR4 ACR5 FPWR RPCTL BR2 ACR4 ACR5 FPWR RPCTL ACR4 ACR5 FPWR RPCTL ACR4 FPWR RPCTL BR4 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL ACR4 FPWR RPCTL BR2 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL BR1 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL Zero BR1 23 35 37 39 44 64 Zero BR2 23 35 37 39 44 64 Zero B
145. Hardware Elermients eiit meiner aaa apuka Channel MUX u saa ahinata eOr Function Rel Stallion Chip and Signal Conditioning AID Timing QS REN Control Signals Counters Convertin g Counts to essere DISCHARGE Signal Open Thermocouple Detector Channel Measur IUE Reading Rates o ur Era Measurement a ak eei hee t He ott VAC VDC Fast Rate 2645A THerinOCOuples oth Reference JUNCTION lores E VAC Discharge ar Autoranging Overload Housekeeping Readings 0 Reading o e Reference Balance Readings Zero Offset Readings attt rint Housekeepin Self Tests p Schedule eee erret ee ie Power Up Self ette t inedit Self Test 22 201 1 22 214 4 isise ni Reference Balance Test Ohms Overload OTC Test Introduction 2 2 3 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 4 Theory of Operation 2 Introduction Introduction 2 1 The theory of ope
146. I s21 s19 20 20095132 Lus 1 O fU 0I amp UL O NO D RNODEC13 0 o NODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE ANODE GRID 1 4 GRID 9 GRID 8 GRID 7 GRID 6 S GRID 4 GRID 3 GRID 12 ANODE RNODEC2 ANODEC2 38 ANODE WONAUAWNHO 2620A 1002 11 Fes 00 d PRIMARY DISPLAY NODE DEFINITIONS SECONDARY DISPLAY ANODE 13 Figure 7 2 A2 Display PCA Assembly cont 7 11 2640A 2645A 159 R18 RIS 1 R7 8184 693 2640A 1603 RII i2 R 000 Ries RESA gay ced agaaa E90 28 126 R71 N Del x
147. LK1 L1RQ RTS1 GCIDCL L1CLK RCLK1 L1RXD RXD1 PAO RXD2 PA1 TXD2 PA2 RCLK2 PA3 TCLK2 PA4 CTS2 PAS RTS2 PA7 SDS2 BRG2 PA8 RXD3 PA9 TXD3 PA10 RCLK3 PA11 TCLK3 PA12 BRG3 PA13 DREQ SPCLK CDS L1TXD TXD1 BRG1 51 52 54 55 56 R141 R140 MC145406DW 1 14 3 o CONTROL 3 10 7 U13 15 2 o 013 12 5 013 1 11 6 d 656 54 2645 1001 Sheet of 7 Figure 7 1 A1 Main PCA Assembly cont 7 5 2640A 2645A Service Manual RX m vec 300 061 sw ETHERNET INTERFACE Cg U32 U32 U32 U32 U33 ull vec CR4 L4 t T 1 1 BAW56 170 OUT C75 C22 C68 25 OUT 1 4 4 4 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 260 259 58 EPC1018H T Jj LEDC LEDL LEDT LEDR IN OUT 4 C10 BA15 UPD43256BGU IN OUT 1000PF MB86965APF BA14 0 BA13 D1 U32 BA12 A2 22 D2 BA11 A3 D3 BA10 A4 D4 BA9 A5 D5 D6 BA7 A7 A T3 D7 BA6 A8 D8 BAS AQ PE 65728T D9 BA4 A10 D10 100 11 D11 BA2 _ 101 A12 D12 BA1 102 A13 D13 103 A14 D14 D15 BWE 106 _ BCS0 SB SW BCS1 BOE p 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
148. LYES 0 47UF 10 50V CAP AL 470UF 20 10V SOLV PROOF CAP POLYES 1UF 10 50V CAP TA 33UF 10 6V CAP POLYPR 1000PF 1 100V CAP CER 1000PF 5 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 4 3PF 0 5PF 50V C0G 0805 CAP CER 0 047UF 20 50V X7R 1206 CAP POLYES 0 1UF 10 1000V CAP CER 2500PF 20 250V X7R CAP CER 15PF 10 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 68PF 2 50V C0G DIODE SI BV 70V IO 50MA DUAL SOT23 CONN DIN41612 TYPE C RT ANG 48 PIN CONN MICRO RIBBON PLUG RT ANG 20 POS JACK PWB RT ANG 1 3MM PIN HEADER 2 ROW 100CTR 10 PIN RELAY SOLID STATE DUAL 1FA 400V 20MA RELAY ARMATURE 2 FORM C 5VDC LATCH RELAY ARMATURE 4 FORM C 5V LATCH FERRITE CHIP 600 OHM 100 MHZ 1206 INDUCTOR 15MH 5 0 021ADC INDUCTOR 33UH 10 0 115ADC INSUL PT TRANSISTOR MOUNT DAP TO 5 RIVET S TUB OVAL STL 087 343 HEADER 1 ROW 100CTR 3 PIN TRANSISTOR SI N DMOS FET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI N JFET SOT 23 TRANSISTOR SI P CHAN SOT 23 REF AMP SET __TRANSISTOR SI N JFET SOT 23 Fluke Stock No 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 747287 867572 867572 867572 747261 800508 747378 514208 854641 446781 697409 822387 733089 866897 844816 867408 514216 782615 837518 485680 837393 715300 742320 742320 867333 876107 943113 756858 929703 836486 715078 943704 944251 944509 152207 838458 845334 927538 929588 832477 936047 876263 Tot Qty 58 10 a ap A Ls
149. M 1206 RES CERM 1K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RNET MF FRIT SIP LO V SOURCE RES TINOX 39K 5 2W RES CERM 24 9K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 39K 5 125W 200PPM 1206 RES CERM 1M 1 125W 100PPM 1206 RES CERM 43 2K 1 125W 100PPM 1206 JUMPER WIRE NONINSUL O 200CTR C COMPARATOR DUAL LOW PWR SOIC C CMOS SRAM 128K X 8 100 NS SO32 C CMOS RS232 DRIVER RECEIVER SOIC C INTEGR MLTIPROTOCOL MPU 16 MHZ QFP PROGRAMMED FLASH FFE C CMOS OCTAL D F F EDG TRG SOIC IC VOLT REG 5 V LO DO IQ 500MA SOT223 C CMOS QUAD 2 INPUT OR GATE SOIC C COMPARATOR HI SPEED PRECISION AMP DUAL PICOAMP 18 508 C ARRAY 7 NPN DARLINGTON PAIRS SOIC C LSTTL BCD DEC DECODER DRIVER SOIC C CMOS OCTAL BUFFER LINE DRVR SOIC C CMOS QUAD INPUT NAND GATE SOIC C CMOS HEX INVERTER UNBUFFERED SOIC C EPLD PROGRAMMED 2645A 90220 PLCC84 C OP AMP DUAL LO POWR SNGL SUP 8PDIP C OP AMP DUAL RAIL RAIL VOUT SO8 IC CMOS TRIPLE 2 1 LINE ANLG MUX SOIC C BPLR TRUE RMS TO DC CONVERTER C OP AMP PRECISION SINGLE SUPPLY SO8 C OP AMP JFET INPUT DECOMP SOIC IC TWIN WELL STALLION ASSEMBLY TESTED C OP AMP DUAL HIGH BW SNGL SUP SO ZENER UNCOMP 15V 5 8 5MA 0 2W SOT 23 ZENER UNCOMP 6 0V 5 20MA 0 2W SOT 2 HEADER 1 ROW 100CTR 2 PIN CRYSTAL 15 36MHZ 50PPM SURFACE MT CRYSTAL 10MHZ 0 01 HC 18 U RNET MF FRIT SIP A TO D CONV RNET CERM SIP 2620 LO V DIVIDER RNET MF POLY SIP 1752 LO V DIVIDER RNET MF POLY SIP 8840 LO V DIVIDER RNET CERM SIP 2620 HI V AMP GAIN _RN
150. OHMS 3VDC amp 3VDC FUSIBLE 4 R104 ans 100K 1 AGND NBIAS NBIAS t DISCHARGE 111 HI R110 CH24 30VDC 300VDC HI SENSE OHMS HI SOURCE VCLAMP MPS6560 C73 STALLION T 2200PF 100V 2704 80VDC 300VDC LO SENSE OHMS LO SOURCE LOSENSE 8132 1 C gt SB90041 100K ht m Q23 3VDC 3VDC OHMS LO SENSE 180PF 50V 29 OSCILLATOR SB90041 CS HRESET 54 4098 SND BRS ROV SCK VDD MPS6560 Q OTCCLK mE R107 SB90041 10 3906 VDDB 027 1 SB LM393DT SB XMIT 4 AD706 SBRECV STAL SELECT MPS6560
151. P 15V 5 8 5MA 0 2W SOT 23 ZENER UNCOMP 6 0V 5 20MA 0 2W SOT 23 HEADER 1 ROW 100CTR 2 PIN CRYSTAL 15 36MHZ 50PPM SURFACE MT CRYSTAL 10MHZ 0 01 HC 18 U RNET MF FRIT SIP A TO D CONV RNET CERM SIP 2620 LO V DIVIDER RNET MF POLY SIP 1752 LO V DIVIDER _RNET MF POLY SIP 8840 LO V DIVIDER Fluke Stock No 328120 658401 811828 930201 929690 783266 650085 810424 746230 783241 926691 820811 867689 820878 836387 746388 714337 851803 816090 837211 914101 821538 910831 949685 838029 929641 838276 822197 910836 821009 742007 853317 806893 929695 929604 929596 929013 707653 905315 837237 933502 929075 837187 837161 643916 943167 520239 926688 849984 645341 655811 Tot Qty Sy es a aa c wi con qq a a pe ONS TT m AR 6l Notes 6 6 19 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 6 4 2640A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly cont Designator Reference 1 FUSIBLE RESISTOR Fluk k Description M us Tot Qty Notes RNET CERM SIP 2620 HI V AMP GAIN 847363 1 RNET MF FRIT SIP HI V DIVIDER 926733 1 _ RNET MF POLY SIP 2280 LO V DIVIDER 611186 1 USE EXACT REPLACEMENT ONLY 6 20 List of Replaceable Parts 6 Parts Lists
152. Q Service Manual MP71 From A1 Main PCA Assy P10 B e e H52 Black of MP71 Sa AES White Part of MP71 i N tab of MP22 MP98 From L tab ure of MP22 of MP22 2640A 2645A T amp B Sheet 3 of 4 Figure 6 1 2640A 2645A Final Assembly cont 6 8 List of Replaceable Parts Parts Lists Red 2 from A1 Main PCA Assy P10 2640A 2645A T amp B Sheet 4 of 4 Figure 6 1 2640A 2645A Final Assembly cont 6 6 9 NetDAQ Service Manual 6 10 Table 6 2 A1 Main PCA Assembly Reference Designator BT1 1 18 C2 C3 8 38 C89 4 6 11 C15 30 31 C7 C9 32 34 C10 35 53 C81 C12 13 C14 C16 19 22 C24 25 29 C33 36 40 C42 60 62 C65 67 69 C71 73 75 C80 82 84 C86 88 90 C92 93 95 C96 C17 C23 28 C26 C27 37 C39 102 C43 52 54 C59 C61 C97 C98 101 CR1 10 CR2 3 CRA 14 15 CR18 19 21 5 6 16 CR7 CR8 9 13
153. R143 afte Vee K24 9 12 K5 K19 017 O T Kit K14 ES f 98 B R132 ated R138 K4 K8 52 q 5 152 a ons e 9 8156 SU SU SUSU SU SU SU SU SU SU SH 19 13 195 13 13 19 134 17 40 3 s0 S0 D SU 30 0 80 90 0 50 S0 50 30 20 30 20 80 3 R ROSS 3 RISISUISISISISISISISISUSISISISI SI SI ca2 51 Bi 2640 1603 Figure 6 4 2640 A D Converter Assembly 6 21 NetDAQ Service Manual 6 22 Table 6 5 2645A A3 A D Converter PCA Assembly Reference Designator C1 4 6 203 C12 16 24 C28 30 32 C34 36 42 C47 49 55 C61 63 69 C70 75 77 C78 81 86 C88 91 94 C97 C5 13 15 C31 33 45 C46 67 68 C25 48 C26 27 C35 56 C43 C44 C57 59 C60 C64 65 C66 C71 72 C73 C74 87 C76 C79 C80 C82 C83 84 C85 1 6 8 CR9 J1 J2 J3 J10 K1 24 K25 26 K27 L1 49 51 L50 52 L61 100 MP200 MP813 815 P1 2 Q1 Q2 4 Q3 Q5 Q6 10 13 Description CAP CER 0 1UF 10 25V X7R 1206 CAP TA 10UF 20 16V 6032 CAP CER 0 01UF 10 50V X7R 1206 CAP CER 27PF 10 50V C0G 1206 1000PF 10 50V C0G 1206 CAP CER 3 3PF 0 5PF 50V C0G 0805 CAP POLYPR 1500PF 2 5 100V CAP POLYPR 0 1UF 10 160V CAP PO
154. R3 23 35 37 39 44 64 Zero BR4 23 35 37 39 44 64 REFBAL2 26 34 37 39 44 64 REFBALO 26 34 37 39 44 64 REFJUNC 17 21 34 37 39 44 A OTC Dischg 17 23 34 37 42 43 44 46 64 65 2 n i in 2 52 Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description A D After the input channel has been selected and the Stallion chip programmed appropriately there is a minimum time required for the signal conditioning circuitry to settle This settling time varies depending on the function and range being measured and is given in Table 2 18 Signal Conditioning Settling Time Table 2 18 Signal Conditioning Settling Time Function Time VDC 30 us VAG fast 100 ms VAC medium 150 ms VAC slow 200 ms 3002 20 us 3 100 us 30 kQ 400 us 300 kQ 2ms 3 MQ 10 ms Frequency fast 100 ms Frequency medium 150 ms Frequency slow 200 us Zero BR1 30 us Zero BR2 30 us Zero BR3 30 us Zero BR4 30 us Reference Balance both references on 30 us Reference Balance both references off 30 us Reference Junction 30 us 2 96 The multi slope A D converter in the instrument uses a hardware state machine A3U18 to control the switching of the voltage references during the A D conversion This state machine also contains the counters that measure how long each reference is switched in
155. ROR will be set Retrieving Error Codes using RS 232 5 7 You can retrieve error codes from the instrument using the instrument rear panel RS 232 port and an ASCII terminal or PC running ASCII terminal emulation Complete the following procedure to retrieve error codes from the instrument using an RS 232 connection 1 Connect the instrument to a PC COM port and setup the RS 232 parameters and connection as described in the procedure Calibration Procedure Manual in Chapter 4 2 Enter the command TST to invoke the instrument selftest routine and return the result or just SELFTEST for the results of the most recent self test If you use TST allow several seconds for the tests to complete The TST test does not include the RAM test because this test cannot be performed when the instrument is operating 3 Observe the returned number after the selftest routine Refer to Table 5 1 for an analysis of the return For example a return of 64 is the same as error code 7 on the front panel display Retrieving Error Codes using the Network 5 8 A selftest can be performed from the User Network Interface with the NETCMD RUN SELFTEST network command Selecting the Diagnostic Tools 5 9 5 6 This section describes the instrument diagnostic tool menu and other diagnostic features The diagnostic tool menu is hidden from the user There are three separate diagnostic tools that can be selected from the menu each of which is desc
156. SPECHICAT ONS RR 1 18 2640A Frequency Measurement Specifications 1 19 NetDAQ Service Manual 1 2 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 2645 A SpecifICatiOnS u u besa 2645A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2645A AC Voltage Measurement Specifications 2645A Four Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2645A Two Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 2645 Four Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement SPECIICAU ONS u T 1 24 2645A Thermocouple per ITS 1990 Measurement IMMER 1 24 2645A Frequency Measurement Specifications 1 26 Introduction and Specification 1 Introduction Introduction 1 1 This Service Manual supports performance testing calibration servicing and maintenance of the 2640 NetDAQ and 2645A NetDAQ networked data acquisition units Figure 1 1 NetDAQ networked data acquisition units are 20 channel front ends that operate in conjunction with a host computer to form a networked data acquisition system The host computer and instruments are interconnected using an Ethernet network and the host computer runs the NetDAQ Logger for Windows application to provide an operating environment for the instruments including testing and calibration The 26404 and 2645 networked data acquisition units are identical in operation and appearance and vary o
157. USE FUSE 25X1 25 0 15A 250V SLOW LABEL ADHES VINYL 1 500 312 LABEL PAPER ITS 90 T C CABLE ASSY COVER RELAYS LABEL MYLAR GROUND SYMBO AC SHIELD CARD REGISTRATION 2620A DATA ACQ CABLE 55 4 ADAPTER COAX BNC M BNC F BNC F TERMINATION COAX BNC M 50 OHM 264X SERIES USERS MANUAL Fluke Stock No 938089 814194 938100 932652 814210 334458 152140 320093 721118 876479 110551 874081 874107 874110 735274 938142 938118 938134 935890 824433 784777 938126 938121 874099 928627 874181 876185 864470 343723 929885 844704 938147 875880 949602 757294 939673 939678 944629 844712 928101 871512 939744 911388 949669 896969 943600 942813 942834 942623 Tot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 2 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 6 6 5 NetDAQ Service Manual MP22 4 Places 6 Places H52 hr MP990 MP48 H52 2 Places VXWORKS LABEL 4 Places H52 a 2 Places 2640A 2645A T amp B Sheet 1 of 4 Figure 6 1 2640A 2645A Final Assembly 6 6 List of Replaceable Parts 6 Parts Lists From A1 Main PCA P10 x OA Tn H52 2 Places 2640A 2645A T amp B Sheet 2 of 4 Figure 6 1 2640A 2645A Final Assembly cont 6 7 NetDA
158. V Vcc supply and each side 15 alternately connected to common through transistors A1Q7 and A1Q8 A1R38 be removed to disable the inverter supply for troubleshooting purposes A1Q7 and A1Q8 are driven by the outputs of D flip flop A1U22 Resistors 1 34 and A1R28 and diodes and A1CR12 shape the input drive signals to properly drive the gate of the transistors D flip flop A1U22 is wired as a divide by two counter driven by a 110 kHz square wave The 110 kHz square wave is generated by hex inverter A1U23 which 15 connected as an oscillator with a frequency determined by the values of resistors 1 40 and 1 47 and capacitor A1C35 The resulting ac voltage produced across the secondary of is rectified to provide the input to the inverter inguard and outguard supplies Inverter Outguard Supply 2 28 The inverter outguard supply provides three outputs 30V dc and 5 4V ac for the display and 5 0V dc Vee for the RS 232 drivers and receiver 30V dc Dual diodes AICR8 and A1CR9 provide full wave rectification of ATTI outputs pins 4 5 and 8 creating the 30V dc supply Output filtering for the 30V dc supply is provided by capacitor A1C17 5 4V ac The 5 4V ac supply is sourced from a secondary winding on transformer T1 pins 7 and is biased at 24V dc with zener diode A1VR3 and resistor AIR22 5 0V dc Vee Dual diode AICR13 rectifies an input from the inverter circuit with the diode and cap
159. abeled keep any new or removed component in a labeled package Surface mount components are removed and replaced by reflowing all the solder connections at the same time Special considerations are required e The solder tool uses regulated hot air to melt the solder there is no direct contact between the tool and the component Surface mount assemblies require rework with wire solder rather than with solder paste A 0 025 inch diameter wire solder composed of 63 tin and 37 lead is recommended A 60 40 solder is also acceptable 5 3 NetDAQ Service Manual Error Detection 5 4 good connection with SMT requires only enough solder to make a positive metallic contact Too much solder causes bridging while too little solder can cause weak or open solder joints With SMT the anchoring effect of the through holes is missing solder provides the only means of mechanical fastening Therefore the pca must be especially clean to ensure a strong connection An oxidized pca pad causes the solder to wick up the component lead leaving little solder on the pad itself Refer to the Fluke Surface Mount Device Soldering Kit for a complete discussion of these techniques 5 3 At power up the instrument software performs self tests If any errors in instrument operation are detected they are reported on the instrument front panel with Error in the primary display and a decimal error code number in the secondary display If there
160. acitors A1C30 and A1C31 configured as a voltage doubler generating 12V dc This voltage is applied to the three terminal regulator A1U18 which regulates the output for the 5 0V dc Vee source Capacitor A1C32 is used for transient response performance of the three terminal regulator Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Inverter Inguard Supply 2 29 The inverter inguard supply provides three outputs 5 2V dc Vdd and 5 2V dc Vss for the inguard analog and digital circuitry and 5 6V dc Vddr for the relays Diodes 5 and A1CR6 and capacitor A1C12 create 6 8V dc source while diodes A1CR7 and capacitor A1C13 create 9 5V dc source 5 2V dc Vdd The 5 2V dc Vdd source is regulated from a 6 8V dc input to A1U24 with resistors 1 9 and AIR10 setting the output voltage and handling transient loads Resistors 4 AIR130 1 128 and A1R13 along with transistor A1Q1 comprise a current limiting circuit which prevents 1024 from supplying more than 60 mA of load current 5 2V dc Vss The 5 2V dc Vss source is regulated from a 9 5V dc input to 1025 with resistors A1R11 and A1R12 setting the output voltage and 1 5 handling transient loads Resistors AIR14 AIRI5 1 129 A1R122 along with transistors A1Q5 and 106 comprise current limiting circuit which prevents 1025 from supplying more than 40 mA of load current Capacitor A1C9 enables the regulator to start up
161. ackets around all uppercase letters mean press the XXX key xxx A lowercase word in parentheses indicates a keyboard input Specifications 1 9 Specifications are divided into three sections The first section contains the combined specifications that apply equally to both the 26404 and 2645A instruments The second section contains specifications that apply only to the 2640A instrument The third section contains specifications that apply only to the 2645A instrument 2640A 2645A Combined Specifications 1 10 The following specifications apply equally to both the 2640A and 26454 instruments The topics include e 2640A 2645A General Specifications e 2640A 2645A Environmental Specifications e 2640A 2645A Digital and Totalizer Interface 1 8 Introduction and Specification Specifications 2640A 2645A General Specifications 1 11 Table 1 5 provides the general specifications for the 2640A and 26454 instruments Table 1 5 2640A 2645A General Specifications Specification Channel Capacity Characteristic 20 I O Lines Total 12 Size 9 3 cm 3 67 in high 21 6 cm 8 5 in wide 36 2 cm 14 28 in deep Weight Net 4 kg 8 8 Ib Shipping 6 0 kg 13 2 Ib Power 107 to 264V ac no switching required 45 to 65 Hz 15 VA maximum 9V dc to 16V dc 6W maximum Specifications are for 50 or 60 Hz operation If both sources are applied simultaneously ac voltage is used if it exceeds approximately 8 ti
162. ading the Main Firmware 1 The bat files contain a checklist of instructions and then launches the 1d26xx exe file with its appropriate switches for this loading procedure For example the file 1oad451 bat might launch the file 1426 Fmm0104 bin 1 B R2 M2 where Fmm0104 bin is the name of the Main Firmware file followed 1 for COM1 for batch mode notice the required Cn and Fname switches R2 for baud rate 38400 and M2 for 2640A 2645A instruments 5 40 The instrument Main Firmware is stored in an electrically erasable and programmable Flash memory A1U21 The firmware is easily updated without opening the instrument case or replacing any parts This procedure requires the NetDAQ Embedded Firmware Memory Loader diskette that contains the software loader and the latest release of Main Firmware The Main Firmware is identical for both the 2640A and 2645A 5 37 NetDAQ Service Manual Complete the following procedure to load the Main Firmware Use this procedure only if the normal defaults specified for the bat file are acceptable If you want to customize this installation refer to Table 5 16 1 Set up the instrument for RS 232 communications as described in Calibration Procedure in Chapter 4 only use baud rate of 38400 instead of 19200 Note which PC COM port was used for the RS 232 connection At the PC obtain the DOS prompt C N gt Do not shell to the DOS pr
163. age Accuracy Specifications 2640A Four Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient 640A Four Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications 2640A Four Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications 2640A Four Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient 2640A Four Wire RTD Specifications eese 2640A Thermocouple General Specifications 2640A Thermocouple Specifications 2640A Frequency Accuracy Specifications 2640A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications 2645A DC Voltage General Specifications 2645A DC Voltage Resolution and Repeatability Specifications 2645A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications 2645A AC Voltage General Specifications 2645A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications 2645A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications 2645A Four Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient 2645A Four Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications NetDAQ Service Manual 1 36 2645A Four Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications
164. alculation where the lowTarget and lowMeas are both assumed to be zero FrequencyConstant targetFreq measFreq To retrieve the calibration constants set up the instrument in the manual calibration configuration described in Calibration Procedure Manual in Chapter 4 Then retrieve the desired calibration constant with the CONST xx command where xx denotes the calibration constant number shown in Table 5 15 Each constant reflects the correction applied to the uncompensated measurement result as an offset or as a gain multiplier For example CAL CONST 8 might return 998 939E 3 indicating the uncompensated value for the 3V dc range is multiplied by 0 998939 to achieve specification Loading Embedded Instrument Firmware 5 38 Instrument firmware consists of the following components Main Firmware Loaded from a floppy disk on the PC to the instrument via the instrument rear panel RS 232 port This is a closed case procedure and it is not necessary to open the instrument to load the Main Firmware The Main Firmware is identical for both model instruments A D Firmware Loaded from a floppy disk on the PC to the instrument directly to a 3 pin connection on the A3 A D Converter PCA This also requires a separate power supply connection to the A3 A D Converter PCA Flash Memory and custom cables for making the connections This is not a closed case procedure and it is necessary to open the instrument to load the A D Firmware The
165. alue rather than the default calibration Yes reference value CAL REF Return the present calibration reference Yes CAL_STEP Calibrate and return the calibrated value of the input Yes CAL_CLR Reset all calibration constants to nominal values clearing Yes present calibration Use with caution This clears all contents for all functions VDC VAC resistance and frequency 4 36 Performance Testing and Calibration The calibration procedure calculates gain and offset calibration constants for all of the VDC ranges The 750 mV range is not user accessible but is used to measure the reference junction voltage and must be calibrated Complete the following procedure to manually calibrate the VDC function 1 If you have not already done so complete the procedure Preparing for Calibration earlier in this chapter 2 Connect the instrument and 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 7 3 Complete the sequence of manual steps shown in Table 4 5 Measuring channel 1 provides the full scale reading and measuring the short on channel 2 determines the Zero offset error Both readings are accomplished automatically with the CAL STEP command Command CAL 1 CAL REF Table 4 5 Manual VDC Calibration gt Response Am Puts NetDAQ in VDC calibration 90 0000E 3 5700A Source 90 mV dc CAL_STEP 90 0000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration cons
166. and provides the A3U5 A D microprocessor with its interface to the A D A synchronous serial port is used to transfer the counter contents from the state machine to the A3U5 A D microprocessor These counter values can then be manipulated to form an A D reading There are two counters NCOUNT and PCOUNT which measure how long the negative and positive references respectively are switched in 2 53 NetDAQ Service Manual Timing 2 97 The timing for the 2645A and 2640A A Ds is shown in Figures 2 14 and 2 15 These figures apply to normal readings For Reference Balance readings the timing for both 2645A and 26404 is given by Figure 2 15 AZ DE UAZ Autozero Integrate Deintegrate Untimed Autozero 200 0 us 491 2 us 140 8 us Trigger Figure 2 14 A D Timing 2645A Normal Reading AZ DE UAZ Autozero Integrate Deintegrate Untimed Autozero 244 8 us 2948 8 us 140 8 us Trigger Figure 2 15 A D Timing 2640A Normal Reading 2640A and 2645A Reference Balance After the Trigger signal from the A3U5 A D microprocessor is recognized the A D goes into the Autozero period Immediately following this are the Integrate and Deintegrate periods The only time that the input signal is actually being measured by the A D is during the Integrate period Therefore the channel can be deselected and the Stallion programming for the next channel begun during the Deintegrate period Also the signal conditioning doe
167. and the number of wait states for the memory accessed by each output The FLSH signal A1U1 128 enables accesses to 512 kilobytes of Flash Memory A1U21 The FLSH signal goes through jumper W3 which must always be installed during normal instrument operation W3 is removed only during the initial programming of the Flash Memory during production at the factory Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description The signal A1U1 127 enables access to the Static RAM A1U20 1030 A1U34 or A1U35 There are two banks of static RAM The SRAM decoding circuit 1014 1015 AIRI25 and A1R126 selects one of the two banks The RAMI signal selects one bank 1020 and 1030 and RAM selects the other bank A1U34 1035 AIR125 is installed for 128Kx8 SRAMs or 126 is installed for 512Kx8 SRAMs The and signals go to the I O Decoder 1029 which decodes small areas of address space for I O devices like the FPGA the Real Time Clock and the Ethernet Interface There no wait states for accesses FLSH and SRAM but two wait states are used for any access to I O Each wait state adds approximately 65 nanoseconds to the length of a memory read or write cycle The Ethernet Interface A1U32 handles wait state timing for any accesses to ENET When the Microprocessor is starting up also referred to as booting the address decoding maps the address space as shown in Table 2 2 Tab
168. arallel with 300 pF maximum for ranges 3V 10 in parallel with 100 pF maximum for ranges 3V Normal Mode Rejection Common Mode Rejection Medium and Fast Rates 50 dB minimum at 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 Slow Rate 120 dB minimum at dc 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 195 1 imbalance Slow Rate 80 dB minimum at dc 60 dB at 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 1 imbalance Channel to Channel Crosstalk error on channel 2 cause a 10 uV error on channel 2 120 dB minimum Slow Rate e g 30V dc on channel 1 may cause a 30 uV 80 dB minimum Medium and Fast Rates e g 1V dc on channel 1 may Temperature Coefficient below 18 C or below 18 C For 96 input Add 1 10th the 90 day specification per C above 28 C or For floor error V Add 1 20th the 90 day specification per C above 28 C Maximum Input Voltage The lesser voltage of Or 50V dc or 30V ac rms from any input terminal to earth 50V dc or 30V ac rms from any input terminal to any other input terminal 1 20 Table 1 29 2645A Introduction and Specification Specifications DC Voltage Resolution and Repeatability Specifications Resolution Range 90 mV 300 mV 3V 30V 50V Table 1 30 2645A DC Voltage Accuracy Specifications Accuracy 30 input V 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C Range 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Slow Fast Slow Fast Slow Fast 90 mV 01 20 uV 01 50uV 013 23uV 013 50 uV 042 52 uV
169. arm Configuration After Steps 5 and 6 are completed the portion of the Main Window for channels and alarms configuration will appear as shown below Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Chan Function Range Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Mx B Units Label 0101 3Y LO gt DO0 OFF OFF Label 0102 3Y LO gt DO1 OFF OFF v DC Label 0103 LO gt DO2 OFF OFF Label 0104 3Y LO gt DO3 OFF OFF Label 0105 3Y LO gt DO4 OFF OFF Label 0106 3Y LO gt DO5 OFF YDC Label 0107 LO DOB OFF OFF VDC Label 0108 3Y LO gt DO7 NA OFF Label 8 Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button Bar to start the instruments scanning The instruments must be scanning to set the DIO lines 9 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select 01DIO Click OK to open the Spy window 10 Verify Digital I O Output for all Set Lines The Spy window summarizes the 8 DIO binary lines as a decimal equivalent i e 0 for the present condition of all lines set 00000000 11 Measure DIO Lines Using a digital multimeter measure the output of each DIO line referenced to the GND line for a voltage less than 0 8V dc 12 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box 13 Stop Instrument Scanning Click
170. arm Output AO 2 and Trigger Output 3 The two Alarm Outputs AO lt 0 gt and ADO lt 1 gt are not supported These registers are both written and read by the Microprocessor The FPGA logic also implements an eight bit input buffer so that the Microprocessor can read the eight Digital Input lines 01 lt 0 gt through DI lt 7 gt See also Digital Input Buffers and Digital and Alarm Output Drivers Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Totalizer Debouncing and Mode Selection Logic internal to the FPGA lets the Microprocessor enable a debouncer in the Totalizer input signal path You can find the detailed description of the Totalizer Debouncer and Mode Selection later in this chapter under the heading Totalizer Input Totalizer Counter There is a 16 bit counter internal to the FPGA to count the totalizer inputs When the 16 bit counter overflows the microprocessor is interrupted and a software counter is incremented External Trigger Logic Logic internal to the FPGA allows the Microprocessor to set up the External Trigger Logic to interrupt on rising or falling edges of the XTI input to the FPGA The FPGA also allows the Microprocessor to pulse an external trigger output from the FPGA The detailed description of the External Trigger operation may be found later in this chapter in the External Trigger Circuits section Serial Communication Guard Crossing 2 39 The transmission of information from the Micro
171. arm Output Drivers 2 45 Since the 11 Digital Output and Alarm Output Drivers are identical in design the following example description references only the components that are used for the Master Alarm Output AO 2 The Microprocessor controls the state of the Master Alarm Output Driver by writing to the Alarm Output register in the FPGA 1031 to set the level of output A1U31 61 When A1U31 61 is set high the output of the open collector Darlington driver A1U17 14 sinks current through current limiting resistor 1 60 When A1U31 61 is set low the driver output turns off and is pulled up by A1Z2 and or the voltage of the external device that the output is driving If the driver output is driving an external inductive load the internal flyback diode A1U17 9 conducts the energy into MOV 1 to keep the driver output from being damaged by excessive voltage Capacitor A1C56 ensures that the instrument meets electromagnetic interference EMI and electromagnetic compatibility EMC performance requirements Totalizer Input 2 46 The Totalizer Input circuit consists of Input Protection a Digital Input Buffer circuit and a Totalizer Debouncing circuit The Digital Input Buffer for the totalizer is protected from electrostatic discharge ESD damage by 1 49 and A1C43 Refer to the detailed description of the Digital Input Buffer circuit for more information The Totalizer Debounce circuit in the FPGA A1U31 allows the Micropr
172. art number and revision level of the pca printed circuit assembly containing the part e Reference designator e Fluke stock number e Description as given under the DESCRIPTION heading e Quantity Manual Status Information 6 3 The Manual Status Information table that precedes the parts list defines the assembly revision levels that are documented in the manual Revision levels are printed on the component side of each pca 6 3 NetDAQ Service Manual Newer Instruments 6 4 Changes and improvements made to the instrument are identified by incrementing the revision letter marked on the affected pca These changes are documented on a supplemental change errata sheet which when applicable is included with the manual Service Centers 6 5 A list of service centers that may be contacted for any items on the Parts Lists is located at the end of this chapter NOTE Ni Cd This instrument may contain a Nickel Cadmium battery Do not mix with the solid waste stream Spent batteries should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler Contact your authorized Fluke service center for recycling information WARNING THIS INSTRUMENT CONTAINS A FUSIBLE RESISTOR PN 650085 TO ENSURE SAFETY USE EXACT REPLACMENT ONLY MANUAL STATUS INFORMATION Ref or Option number Assembly name Fluke Part Number Revision Level A1 Main PCA 938089 D A2 Display PCA 814194 2640
173. aster Alarm output Digital I O 1 14 Table 1 7 provides a summary of the Digital I O specifications for the 8 Digital I O lines 0 to 7 Digital I O is located on the DIGITAL I O connector terminals 0 to 7 and GND Table 1 7 2640A 2645A DIGITAL I O Specification Specification Characteristic Maximum Input Voltage 30V Minimum Input Voltage 4V Isolation None dc coupled Threshold 1 4V Hysteresis 500 mV Specification Characteristic Output Voltage TTL Logical Zero 0 8V maximum for an lout of 1 0 mA 1 LSTTL load Output Voltage TTL Logical One 3 8V minimum for an lout of 0 05 mA 1 LSTTL load Output Voltage Non TTL Load Zero 1 8V maximum for an lout of 20 mA Output Voltage Non TTL Load One 3 25V maximum for an lout of 50 mA Introduction and Specification Specifications Trigger In 1 15 Table 1 8 provides a summary of the Trigger In specifications The Trigger In input is located on the ALARM TRIGGER I O connector terminals TI and GND Table 1 8 2640A 2645A Trigger In TI Specification Specification Characteristic Logical High Trigger not set Minimum 2 0V Maximum 7 0V Logical Low Trigger set Minimum 0 6V Maximum 0 8V Trigger Out 1 16 Table 1 9 provides a summary of the Trigger Out specifications The Trigger Out output 15 located on the ALARM TRIGGER I O connector terminals TO and GND Table 1 9 2640A 2645A Trigger Out TO Specification
174. asurements are out of tolerance A4Q1 may be suspect To verify the operation of A4Q1 connect multimeter test leads across A4R2 marked and clearly visible in the open module and power the instrument At normal room temperatures the voltage across A4R2 is a nominal 1V dc If the measured voltage is 401 is probably open and should be replaced For this test you may find it easier if you remove the cover portion of the Universal Input Module by gently lifting one of the tabs the form the cover hinge and removing the cover N WARNING To avoid electric shock disconnect all channel inputs from the instrument before performing any troubleshooting operations The 401 circuit is calibrated at the factory by adjusting the potentiometer A4R3 Do not disturb this adjustment unless you have replaced A4Q1 If you have replaced A4Q1 allow the instrument to stabilize in an ambient temperature of exactly 22 C and then adjust A4R3 for a reading of 1 00V dc across A4R2 5 33 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 34 Troubleshooting Calibration Failures 5 36 The paragraphs in this section describe troubleshooting actions when there is a calibration failure Calibration procedures are provided in Chapter 4 Calibration of the instrument through the computer interface is described in Chapter 4 of this manual Generally a calibration failure is indicated by a Device Dependent Error and gt prompt after a CAL STEP command These indication
175. ations Guard Crossing RAM and Real Time Clock Address Decoding Ethernet Interface Display Controller Front Panel Switches A2 Display Reset Circuits gt RS 232 10BASE2 10BASE T 5 6V dc Vddr gt 5 2 Vdd Inguard I 95 5 2V dc Vss 44 9V dc Vcc 5 0V dc Vee 30V dc display 5 4V ac display Outguard A1 Main Figure 2 2 Overall Functional Block Diagram P Digital Theory of Operation 2 Functional Block Description A1 Main PCA Block Description 2 3 The A1 Main pca description is divided into sections for each primary pca function as described below Power Supply 2 4 The Power Supply functional block Figure 2 3 provides voltages required by the outguard digital circuitry 4 9V dc Vcc the vacuum fluorescent display 30V dc and filament voltage of 5 4V ac the inguard circuitry 5 2V dc Vdd 5 6V dc Vddr and 5 2V dc and RS 232 interface voltage 5 0V dc Vee Within the power supply the raw dc supply converts 107 to 264V ac line voltage into a dc level and applies it to the power switch and or the 9 to 16V dc input is applied to the power switch The 5V Switcher A1U9 A1U28 converts the dc from the power switch into 4 9V 0 05V dc which is used by the Inverter A1U22 A1U23 in generating the above mentioned outputs
176. ay be monitored at one of 101 microprocessor chip select outputs for example FLSH at A1U1 128 or at A1U1 127 It might be easier to measure signals at places other than the pins of the AIUI microprocessor for example measure A1U1 128 at resistor AIR144 If there is brief chip select activity and then the activity stops this indicates that the A1U1 microprocessor tried to start operation but one or more of the outboard devices did not respond and the A1U1 microprocessor was unable to continue initialization If there is no chip select activity when power is first applied to the instrument then the A1U1 microprocessor may have been damaged by static electricity If the problem seems to be in the outboard devices then probe them with a logic analyzer or oscilloscope looking for missing signals or dc power or by touch to find a device that is excessively warm Be careful to touch only the case of the device and not the pins These devices include 1021 Flash Memory A1U20 1030 1034 1035 Static RAM 1011 Real Time Clock 1010 Power Monitor 1012 Flash Programming Power Supply and related logic devices such as AND gates OR gates and inverters Check A1UI crystal frequency at A1TP11 to make sure there is a clock input to the 101 microprocessor The crystal frequency should measure 15 36 MHz Check the jumper A1W3 near A1U21 Flash Memory and make sure it is in place If this jumper is missing the in
177. by a 10 resistor in network A2Z1 Normally the resistance between any two of the interface signals is approximately 20 Checking resistances between any two signals SWRI through SWR verifies proper termination by resistor network 42271 2 27 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 2 5 Front Panel Switch Scanning Interface Signal States or Key Sensed Step SWR6 SWR5 SWR4 SWR3 SWR2 SWR1 1 2517 2510 2512 2518 2513 2 2511 0 3 0 2 4 2514 2515 2516 0 2 2 5 0 2 2 2 6 A2S21 0 2 2 2 2 A2Sn indicates switch closure sensed 0 indicates strobe driven to logic 0 Z indicates high impedance input state ignored Display 2 51 The custom vacuum fluorescent display A2DS1 consists of a filament 11 grids numbered 0 through 10 from right to left on the display and up to 14 anodes under each grid The anodes make up the digits and annunciators for their respective area of the display The grids are positioned between the filament and the anodes A 5 4V ac signal biased at a 24V dc level drives the filament When a grid is driven to 5V dc the electrons from the filament are accelerated toward the anodes that are under that grid Anodes under that grid that are also driven to 5V dc are illuminated but the anodes that are driven to 30V dc are not Grids are driven to 5V dc one at a time sequencing from GRID 10 to GRID O left to right as the display is viewed Beeper
178. c Tool Diagnostic Tool idS aiite io Diagnostic Tool Diagnostic Display COMM Parameter Reset a Using the RS 232 Interface i onere Command 55 Instrument Configuration esses nennen Command ne IRE Eae Troubleshooting the Instrument eene General Troubleshooting PCA Troubleshooting 2 Troubleshooting the Al PCA Digital Kernel Troubleshooting the RS 232 Interface Troubleshooting the Ethernet Interface Troubleshooting the Digital I O Lines and Trigger Out Lines Troubleshooting the Totalizer and Trigger In Lines Troubleshooting the Power Supply A2 Display PCA Troubleshooting eee Variations in the Display 5 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 2 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 A3 A D Converter PCA Troubleshooting Kernel on Break Reset Circuit Out of Tolerance
179. cated inside the instrument To replace the fuse refer to Figure 3 1 and the following procedure N WARNING Do not operate the instrument without the cover properly installed 1 Disconnect all rear panel cables to the instrument power Universal Input Module and I O connectors 2 Invert the instrument on a protective surface and remove the four 1 4 inch 6 32 Phillips head screws on the bottom of the case 3 Turn the instrument upright and remove the two 1 2 inch 6 32 Phillips head screws from the rear panel bezel 4 Remove the rear panel bezel and case assembly Do not touch any internal parts of the instrument 5 Locate the fuse holder at the back of the chassis near the power input connector Using a non metallic tool carefully pry the fuse from the holder 6 Insert the new fuse into the holder You must use a 15 100 ampere 250V time delay line fuse replacement PN 944629 7 Reinstall the case to its original position the rubber feet are towards the front of the instrument 8 Reinstall the rear panel bezel rubber feet towards the bottom and attach it with the two 1 2 inch 6 32 Phillips head screws 9 Invert the instrument on the protective surface and reinstall the four 1 4 inch 6 32 screws on the bottom securing the case 10 Reinstall the cables removed in Step 1 3 5 NetDAQ Service Manual
180. ce personnel DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES To avoid explosion do not operate the instrument in an atmosphere of explosive gas DO NOT REMOVE COVER DURING OPERATION To avoid personal injury or death do not remove the instrument cover without first removing the power source connected to the rear panel Do not operate the instrument without the cover properly installed Normal calibration is accomplished with the cover closed Access procedures and the warnings for such procedures are contained in this manual Service procedures are for qualified service personnel only DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE IF PROTECTION MAY BE IMPAIRED If the instrument appears damaged or operates abnormally protection may be impaired Do not attempt to operate the instrument under these conditions Refer all questions of proper instrument operation to qualified service personnel Chapter Table of Contents Introduction and Specification J J 1 1 1 26 gt 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 11 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 1 2 3 8 9 0 1 2 5 4 5 Jntroduction Options and Accessories Instrument Connector Set 2620A 100 2 ecran 1 6 Host Computer Ethernet
181. channels 1 and 11 2 Open thermocouple detection is supported on a per channel basis 3 Minimum frequency is 20 Hz Signal strength must be at least 50 mV ac rms 4 Shunt resistor required enter value default is 10 ohms The 4 to 20 mA scale displayed as 0 4 mA to 100 20 mA Table 1 3 Summary of 2640A 2645A Features Feature Analog Channels Computed Channels Description 20 channels 1 to 20 10 channels 21 to 30 Alarm Limits Two per channel Mx B Scaling Any configured channel 1 to 30 Scan Triggering Interval External Alarm Trigger Channel Monitoring Any configured channel scanning or not scanning Setup and Operation Communications Ports Via host computer Ethernet 10BASE2 and 10BASE T Primary Power AC 107 to 264V ac 50 60 Hz DC 9 to 16V dc Nonvolatile Memory unaffected by cycling instrument power Permanent Data Storage Instrument parameters Base Channel Number Line Frequency Network Type Socket Port IP Address Baud Rate See Chapter 2 Via host computer Real Time Trend Plotting Via host computer Introduction 1 1 5 NetDAQ Service Manual Options and Accessories Table 1 4 summarizes the available models options and accessories including measurement transducers software connector sets Ethernet interfaces cables and components Table 1 4 Models Options and Accessories
182. channels 1 and 11 than can be applied to the other rear channels Strain relief for the user s sensor wiring is provided both by the Connector PCA housing and the two round pin headers Each pin of the strain relief headers is electrically isolated from all other pins and circuitry 2 43 NetDAQ Service Manual Temperature sensor transistor A4Q1 outputs a voltage inversely proportional to the temperature of the input channel terminals This voltage is 0 6V dc at 25 C increasing 2 mV with each degree decrease in temperature or decreasing 2 mV with each degree increase in temperature For high accuracy 401 is physically centered within and thermally linked to the 20 input terminals Local voltage reference 4 and resistors through A4R3 set the calibrated operating current of the temperature sensor Capacitor A4C1 shunts noise and EMI to ground A1 Main to A3 A D Converter Communications 2 76 The exclusive means of communication between the inguard and outguard is a bidirectional asynchronous optically isolated serial link This link operates at a rate of 120 000 baud The individual bytes are transmitted with eight data bits one stop bit and one even parity bit The outguard can send either a reset or a command to the inguard A reset consists of a number of consecutive break characters and causes a complete reset of the inguard hardware and software The inguard returns no response to a reset A command is a s
183. check of the PCOUNT and NCOUNT values The hardware is designed so that there are sufficient guard bits on the A D counters to avoid overflow The counters are cleared at the beginning of the Integrate period This means that when taking continuous readings the A3U5 A D microprocessor has only the length of the Autozero period to read the counters Converting Counts to Volts 2 100 If we assume perfect voltage references and no offsets the basic formula for obtaining volts from N and P counts is as follows z 16P NK where V volts P P counts N N counts 0 1 2 3 45 16 307 1 6 2645 K 0 1 2 3 45 16 1843 1 6 2640A For higher resolution measurements and N counts accumulated for the total number of A D readings in the measurement and then used in the above formula We call these Ptot and Ntot The final voltage is then divided by the number of A D readings in the measurement In reality we do not have perfect references so we must apply a scale factor The scale factor is applied to P counts in the above formula giving V 16PS NK where S scale factor The scale factor is derived from the reference balance readings See Reference Balance Readings The scale factor has a nominal value of 1 0 and a typical value between 0 99 and 1 01 2 56 Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description We also must subtract the correct zero offset from the measuremen
184. complete set of specifications is presented Chapter 2 Theory of Operation This chapter first categorizes the instrument s circuitry into functional blocks with a description of each block s role in overall operation detailed circuit description is then given for each block These descriptions explore operation to the component level and fully support troubleshooting procedures defined in Chapter 5 Chapter 3 General Maintenance Provides maintenance information covering handling cleaning and fuse replacement Access and reassembly procedures are also explained in this chapter Chapter 4 Performance Testing and Calibration This chapter provides performance verification procedures which relate to the specifications presented in Chapter 1 To maintain these specifications a full calibration procedure is also presented Chapter 5 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting The troubleshooting procedures presented in this chapter rely closely on both the Theory of Operation presented in Chapter 2 the Schematic Diagrams shown in Chapter 7 and the access information provided in Chapter 3 Chapter 6 List of Replaceable Parts Includes parts lists for all standard assemblies Information on how and where to order parts is also provided Chapter 7 Schematic Diagrams Includes schematic Diagrams for all standard and optional assemblies A list of mnemonic definitions is also included to aid in identifying signal name abbreviations Net
185. configured The A D is placed in normal measurement mode The number of readings to average is the same as for a normal reading see Table 2 20 A D Readings to Average to Obtain a Measurement Zero offset measurements are converted to volts in the same way as normal channel measurements except of course that no zero offset is subtracted The reference balance scale factor is used Housekeeping Schedule 2 118 Housekeeping readings are always taken in response to a Do Housekeeping command from the outguard as described in Do Housekeeping earlier in this chapter Setting the HK bit in a configuration command causes the inguard to schedule housekeeping readings on a rotating basis taking one at the end of each channel scan It also enables a timer which is started at the end of a scan or after a configuration command Whenever the timer expires the next housekeeping reading in the schedule is measured and the timer is restarted The timer is set to expire after 17 476 seconds On the medium and slow rate all six housekeeping readings are scheduled as described in the preceding paragraph On the fast rate however only zero offset readings are scheduled This is because a single reference balance reading is longer than a normal reading on the fast rate which would cause scans containing them to take longer Self Tests 2 119 There are two series of self tests performed by the inguard those done automatically at power up and tho
186. cribe the operation of the circuits on the A3 A D Converter PCA See Figure 2 7 for a block diagram and Chapter 7 for a schematic diagram The 2640A and 2645A A D Converter PCAs are identical except for signal switching and both use the following e Motorola 68302 microprocessor e Flash ROM e RAM e Serial Interface to the Main Board e Fluke manufactured Stallion IC 030 for range selection and frequency measurements e Muli Slope A D converter comprised of discrete components and an FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array U18 The difference between the A D boards is that the 2640A uses reed relays while the 2645A uses optically coupled solid state relays 2 31 NetDAQ Service Manual A4 Analog Input EMI Filters Ch1 to 10 gt Ch11 to 20 Scanner Relays Scanner Relays Relay Drivers n di ___ Relays A Ohms Current Source Voltage Input Input Protection 1 i Signal Conditioning 4 Selectable Gains x1 BR4 DC Buffer Amplifier x10 x4 021 BR2 x32 168 BR1 3 45V A D Converter lt gt References 0 RAM Serial Bus A D Latches Microprocessor j Vdd 5 2V dc Serial Digital Output Vss 5 2V dc Gua
187. current protection and diode 1 1 for reverse input voltage protection Capacitor A1C59 is used for EMI EMC requirements Resistor A1R48 and capacitors 1 102 and A1C39 are also used for EMI EMC performance requirements If both ac power and dc power are connected to the instrument the instrument uses ac power when it exceeds approximately eight times the value of the dc voltage Automatic switchover occurs between ac and dc power without interrupting instrument operation Auxiliary 6V Supply 2 25 Three terminal regulator A1U19 voltage setting resistors 44 and A1R46 and capacitor A1C34 make up the auxiliary 6 volt supply This supply is used to power the inverter oscillator and inverter driver 5V Switcher 2 26 The 5V switcher supply uses a controller switch device 109 and related circuitry to produce the 4 9V dc Vcc output 4 9V dc The 8V to 35V dc input is regulated to 4 9V Vcc through pulse width modulation at a nominal switching frequency of 100 KHz The output voltage of the switcher supply is controlled by varying the duty cycle ON time of the switching transistor in the controller switch device A1U9 A1U9 contains the supply reference oscillator switch transistor pulse width modulator comparator switch drive circuit current limit comparator current limit reference and thermal limit Dual inductor A1T2 regulates the current that flows from the raw supply to the load as the switching transist
188. d causes the inguard to measure each channel indicated These channels must have been previously defined using the Set Channel Configuration command One response packet is sent to the outguard for each channel measured If any thermocouple channels are requested in this scan the first response packet is the reference junction reading If a requested channel has not been defined its value is returned as NaN There are several bits in the command that exist for debugging purposes only These bits indicate that the current stored value for the corresponding housekeeping reading should be returned The actual value returned for these bits depend on the current measurement rate since a different value is stored for each measurement rate Note that these bits do not cause any physical measurement to take place they simply cause the latest values to be returned 2 45 NetDAQ Service Manual Response Packets Returned The inguard returns one response packet for the reference junction reading if any of the measured channels is a thermocouple channel followed by a response packet for each channel measured returned in ascending channel order followed by a response packet for each housekeeping reading specified by the scan command Response Packet Format Each response packet for a Perform Scan command consists of a floating point number representing the measurement value the range used to take the measurement the channel number and the checksu
189. dicates the command was entered with incorrect syntax for example misspelling the command Reenter the command using the correct syntax Manual VDC Calibration Procedure 4 43 4 37 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 38 Resolve any calibration problems based on the following An execution error gt is returned by the CAL STEP command if the full scale measurement is off by more than 5 from the target or if the zero measurement is off by more than 1 of full scale from the target When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step When CAL STEP reports an execution error gt due to an out of range measurement it returns the raw measured reading to give you an indication of what was measured When STEP completes successfully it returns the reference value If CAL STEP returns an execution error while measuring the short circuit on channel 2 the procedure freezes at the internal step that measures the short This way you can send a CAL REF command and it will return 0 V indicating that the problem was probably caused by a misapplied short on channel 2 device dependent error is returned by the CAL STEP command if an internal error such as a measurement timeout is detected When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step An execution error is returned by the CAL REF command if the specified refe
190. dure Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Introduction Introduction 4 1 This section of the Service Manual provides performance tests that are used at any time to verify that the operation of the instrument networked data acquisition units 2640A or 2645A is within published specifications complete calibration procedure is also included The performance test and if necessary the calibration procedures are performed periodically as well as after service or repair Performance Test 4 2 When received the 2640A 26454 is calibrated and in operating condition The following Performance Test procedures are provided for acceptance testing upon initial receipt or to verify correct instrument operation The performance tests must be performed in sequence If the instrument fails a performance test the instrument requires service or repair To perform these tests you will need a Fluke 5700A Multifunction Calibrator and several other pieces of equipment that meet the minimum specifications given in Table 4 1 Each of the measurements listed in the following steps assume the instrument is being tested after a 1 2 hour warm up in an environment with an ambient temperature of 18 to 28 C and a relative humidity of less than 70 N WARNING The 2640A 2645A instruments contain high voltages that are dangerous or fatal Only qualified personnel should attempt to service the instruments Configuring the Performance Test Setup 4 3
191. e Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Using the RS 232 Interface Diagnostic Display Test 5 13 For a constant front panel display with all sesments lit turn off the instrument then turn the power on again while holding down the front panel key After the instrument beeps release the key The front panel display remains on until any front panel key 5 pressed This allows you to inspect the display segments COMM Parameter Reset 5 14 To reset all the communication parameters to the factory defaults Table 5 5 turn off the instrument then turn the power on again while holding down the front panel COMM key After the instrument beeps and the message rESEt is displayed for one second release the key Table 5 5 Instrument Default COMM Parameters Parameter Default Setting Base Channel Number 1 Line Frequency 60 Hz Network Selection Isolated Network Socket Port 4369 Internet Protocol Address dashes Baud Rate 38400 Using the RS 232 Interface 5 15 The instrument supports calibration adjustment and verification using ASCII commands on the RS 232 interface since Met Cal does not have network capability and field calibration stations probably won t either The instrument also supports several commands for factory testing and several for software testing The RS 232 interface is also used to download the main software to flash The RS 232 interface does not pe
192. e Reinstall the DIGITAL I O connector Connect ALARM TRIGGER I O Test Leads Remove the 8 position ALARM TRIGGER I O connector from the instrument rear panel or from the connector kit supplied with the instrument Connect a test lead to each line MA Master Alarm TO Trigger Output TI Trigger Input plus a test lead to the common GND line Accuracy Performance Tests 4 5 This accuracy performance test assumes you have completed Initializing the Performance Test Setup above Do not begin this test until the instrument has temperature stabilized for a minimum of 30 minutes Do not use the instrument front panel monitor function for performance testing use the higher resolution Spy window at the host computer as specified in the procedures The Accuracy Performance Tests include the following Volts DC Accuracy Test Volts AC Accuracy Test Frequency Accuracy Test Analog Channel Integrity Test Computed Channel Integrity Test Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test Open Thermocouple Response Test Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test RTD Temperature Accuracy Test Resistance Source RTD Temperature Accuracy Test DIN IEC 751 RTD Source Tests for current dc are not included since these functions are derived from volts dc 4 7 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 8 Volts DC Accuracy Test 2640A Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the volts dc function for the 2640A
193. e Manual List of Figures Title 2640A 2645A NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Units Interconnection Diagram essen ene enne Overall Functional Block Diagram 2 Power Supply Block Diagram Command Byte Transfer Waveforms eese Grid Control Signal Grid Anode Timing Relationships A D Converter Block Diagram eel DC Volts 300V Range Simplified Schematic RTD Measurement Simplified Schematic AC Volts Range Simplified Schematic Integrator Output Waveform for Input Near 0 Integrator Output Waveform for Input Near Full Scale Integrator Output Waveform for Input Near Full Scale A D Timing 2645A Normal Reading A D Timing 2640A Normal Reading 2640A and 2645A Reference AID 51 Replacing Fuse ss einen ee 2640A and 2645A Assembly Details Power Input Connections at the Power Switch Performance Test Two Terminal Connections to 5700 Four Terminal Connections
194. e Spy Window Resistance Range Resistance Range Decade Resistor Short Circuit Zero 2902 Short Circuit Zero 2 9 29 290 2 9 MQ 5700A Short Circuit Zero 1900 Short Circuit Zero 1 9 KQ 19 190 1 9 MQ Minimum Reading 02 289 810 02 2 8981 28 981 288 37 2 8600 MQ Minimum Reading 02 189 860 02 1 8986 kQ 18 986 kQ 188 90 kQ 1 8733 MQ Maximum Reading 0 19 290 192 1 00 2 9019 29 019 291 63 2 9400 The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0 0196 decade resistance Maximum Reading 0 19 190 140 1 00 1 9014 kQ 19 014 KQ 191 100 1 9267 MQ To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box RTD Temperature Accuracy Test Resistance 2640A 4 18 The following RTD accuracy test applies to the 2640A and uses the four wire connection see Figure 4 3 1 Connect the Decade Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Sense and channel 11 Source as shown in Figure 4 3 Configure Channel 1 for RTD 4W In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for RTD 4W and RTD RO for 100 ohms Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog chann
195. e loads from an internal connection at A3P1 This means you must remove the case to load the A D firmware The A D Firmware is specific to the 2640A or 2645A Be sure you are loading the correct program 5 38 Complete the following procedure to load the A D Firmware Use this procedure only if the normal defaults specified for the bat file are acceptable If you want to customize this installation refer to Table 5 16 l Remove the instrument case as described in the procedure Removing the Instrument Case in Chapter 3 Locate contacts for A3W5 and install a jumper across these contacts This connects to the line VBOOT for the A3U5 microprocessor and prevents A3U5 from initializing the A3 A D Converter PCA kernel Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Loading Embedded Instrument Firmware N WARNING To avoid electric shock do not touch any portion of the instrument except as described in this procedure 3 Turn on the instrument power and observe self test reports error 7 4 Connect selected PC COM port to A3P1 using the connection shown in Figure 5 3 This connection must be made when instrument power is on Use standard connector parts to assemble this custom cable NetDAQ A D A D RS 232 Extender Cable RS 232 Cable Model RS40 PC 25 Pin PN 851712 DB 9S 2 TX Gai 2 3 g D nI RX 5 5 4 Signal Ground y PN 845339 Socket 1
196. easurement runs at high voltages and high common mode voltages then the relays may start to act up after a few years This includes failure to open failure to close excessive contact resistance and so forth If your instrument is not subject to these extremes then relay failures become less likely An example of a relay failure is when the reading on one channel affects the readings on another channel beyond the normal effects of cross talk for ac measurements This is especially true for dc volts resistance or thermocouple measurements If a group of channels is causing problems particular for channels 1 to 10 and 11 to 20 then it may be a bus problem bank1 and bank2 If the banks are interacting the treeing relays A3K21 to A3K24 may be at fault You may find it easier to measure relay conditions by removing the A3 A D Converter PCA and measuring at the bottom of the pca However removing the pca could unstick a stuck relay and complicate relay troubleshooting Also for relay troubleshooting applying 1V dc to the even channels and 1V dc to the odd channels can assist you in signal tracing Crossed relays for example might cause a OV reading where you expected 1V A4 Analog Input PCA Troubleshooting 5 35 The A4 Analog Input PCA is essentially a passive assembly of terminal blocks with the exception of a small active network formed around 401 that provides a temperature reference for thermocouple measurements If thermocouple me
197. ed in Calibration Mode Notes If executed during a calibration procedure it aborts the current procedure and begins another This command returns an execution error if not in the Calibration Mode This command returns a device dependent error if an internal error such as a guard crossing error is detected while attempting to determine the instrument type This command returns a device dependent error if it is unable to set the default cal configuration This could happen if scanning was enabled via the network interface after the cal procedure was initiated 5 15 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 16 Command CAL Description Return the procedure identifier of any calibration procedure in progress Parameters none Response procedure where procedure 0 No calibration procedure currently active 1 VDC 2 VAC 3 Ohms 4 Frequency Restrictions Only allowed in Calibration Mode Notes This command returns an execution error if not in the Calibration Mode NetDAQ Logger for Windows uses this command to determine when a calibration procedure has completed Command CAL_REF Description Specify value to calibrate to in place of default reference Parameters lt new calibration reference value gt lt new calibration reference value gt floating point reference value Response None Restrictions Calibration mode only Notes This command returns an execution error if the specified calibration reference is
198. een the minimum and maximum values Source Value Decade Resistance Simulated Temperature C Minimum Reading Maximum Reading 100 0 0 31 0 31 200 266 34 265 94 266 74 300 557 70 C 557 07 C 558 33 C 5 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box RTD Temperature Accuracy Test DIN IEC 751 RTD The following RTD accuracy test applies to both the 2640A and 2645A and uses the four wire connection see Figure 4 3 4 20 1 Connect the RTD Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect the R TD to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Sense and channel 11 Source as shown in Figure 4 3 4 19 NetDAQ Service Manual Configure Channel 1 for RTD 4W In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for RTD 4W and RTD for 100 ohms assuming the reference RO 100 enter the correct value for RO Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog channel 01 Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Insert the RTD and a mercury thermometer in room temperature bath Allow 20 minutes for thermal stabilization The value displayed on the mercury thermometer should equal the value in the Spy Window 0 15 C 2640A or 0 32 26454 plus sensor inaccuracies Close Spy Window To close the Spy window doub
199. el 01 Click OK to open the Spy window 4 RTD Temperature Accuracy Test Resistance 2645A Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output values below and verify the Spy window simulated temperature measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Simulated Maximum Reading Temperature C Decade Resistance Minimum Reading Source Value 100 0 C 0 13 C 0 13 C 200 266 34 C 266 13 C 266 55 C 300 557 70 C 557 40 558 00 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box 4 19 The following RTD accuracy test applies to the 2645A and uses the four wire connection see Figure 4 3 1 Connect the Decade Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Sense and channel 11 Source as shown in Figure 4 3 Configure Channel 1 for RTD 4W In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for RTD 4W and RTD RO for 100 ohms Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog channel 01 Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output values below and verify the Spy window simulated temperature measurement is betw
200. el selection is done by a set of 24 relays organized in a tree structure Relays A3K1 through K20 select the specific channel 1 20 The selection of relays A3K21 through K24 Treeing Relays depends on which bank of 10 channels is being used both banks are selected for four wire ohms and the channel function and range being used DC Volts and Thermocouples Measurement Circuitry 2 61 For 3 volts and lower ranges the input to Stallion A3U30 are as follows for signal HI and signal LO inputs e Hlisa direct input via the HI SENSE line A3R11 A3K26 A3R130 and pin 50 input of A3U30 e LOisaninput to LO SENSE via A3R132 to pin 80 1 02 of A3U30 For the 30 and 300 volt range the input to Stallion A3U30 are as follows for the HI and LO signal inputs e The HI signal is scaled by 377 The input is applied to pin 1 of A3Z7 and a 101 1 divider is formed by the 10 100 resistors when switches S3 and 513 are closed The attenuated HI input is then sent via S24 S64 and 544 to the Buffer Amplifier and then to A D Converter e The LO signal is sensed through A3L52 A3R146 A3K27 A3R119 and 533 and S37 The outputs from Stallion A3U30 are as follows pin 20 is to Buffer Amplifier circuitry A3U27 3028 e pin 100 is to Buffer Amplifier circuitry A3U27 and A3U28 The ranges for the buffer amplifier are shown in Table 2 7 and measurement matrix in Table 2 8 Figure 2 8 shows a simplified sig
201. er A3U27 A3U28 and related devices which scales the voltage to approximately 3V Full Scale for measurement by the multi slope A D converter circuitry The scalings of the buffer amplifier are x1 x4 021 x10 and x32 168 Accuracy is derived by software calibration constants AC volts signal conditioning consists of conversion of an ac level to a scaled and corresponding dc level The ac level is scaled by resistor network A3Z6 and switches A3Q10 to A3Q16 and is processed by A3U29 Input protection is via A3Z6 and A3CRS DC voltages below 3V can be applied directly to the Stallion IC while higher dc input voltages are scaled by A3Z7 Ohms inputs are converted to a dc voltage and ac inputs are first scaled then converted to a dc voltage Noise rejection is provided by the A D for dc inputs and an active filter for ac inputs Function Relays 2 59 For both the 2640A and 2645 the function relays A3K25 A3K26 and A3K27 route the input signal to the correct measurement path They are latching relays and switched when a 6 ms pulse is applied to the set or reset coils The A D Microprocessor A3U5 controls the relay drive pulses by putting a data word on the bus and latching it into F F A3U10 The drive pulses are sent by A3U10 to the appropriate coils 2 33 NetDAQ Service Manual Channel Selection Circuitry 2 60 Channel selection is done using reed relays on the 2640A and by optically coupled solid state relay on the 2645A Chann
202. er for importation costs of repair replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country Fluke s warranty obligation is limited at Fluke s option to refund of the purchase price free of charge repair or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period To obtain warranty service contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center or send the product with a description of the difficulty postage and insurance prepaid FOB Destination to the nearest Fluke authorized service center Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit Following warranty repair the product will be returned to Buyer transportation prepaid FOB Destination If Fluke determines that the failure was caused by misuse alteration accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work Following repair the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges FOB Shipping Point THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAG
203. erret Rer C eet bez Overhead temet orc aaa Inguard Digital Kernel Circuitry eene Op en Thermocouple Detect Circuitry A4 Analog Input PCA Circuit Description Main to A D Converter Communications Special Code cc Resets 2 79 2 80 2 81 2 82 2 83 2 84 2 85 2 86 2 87 2 88 2 89 2 90 2 9 2 92 2 93 2 94 2 95 2 96 2 97 2 98 2 99 2 100 2 101 2 102 2 103 2 104 2 105 2 106 2 107 2 108 2 109 2 110 2 111 2 112 2 113 2 114 2 115 2 116 2 117 2 118 2 119 2 120 2 121 2 122 2 123 2 124 2 125 2 126 Commands Theory of Operation Perform uestre te ee oreet ee vot eee uon de voe Perform Self Return Firmware Version Return Boot Firmware Version Set Global C eee ERS Set Channel Configuration aaa Do Housekeeping tene rino eter tinea Checksums Powet Up Protocol s uet tre au Inguard eer Inguard Software Description a
204. est 11 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box 12 Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop instrument scanning 4 22 Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Totalizer Sensitivity Test 4 26 This test checks the ability of the Totalizer feature to count voltage transition at a particular sensitivity level 1 Connect Test Leads At the DIGITAL I O connector connect the gt Totalizer test lead and GND test lead to a signal generator s output terminals Adjust the signal generator for an output of 1 5V rms sine wave at 10 Hz Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button Bar to start instrument scanning Scanning is initiated to enable the return of TOTAL status to the Spy window Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select 01 Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Totalizer Count The Spy window summarizes the Totalizer count Verify the totalizer count is advancing at approximately 10 Hz per Spy window update nominal 1 second intervals Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop instrument scanning Master Alarm Output Test 4 27 This test checks the Master Alarm output for a logic low when a channel is in alarm
205. etailed Circuit Description PCA Circuit Description Power Supply Circuit Description Raw DC Supply Auxiliary OV Supply itecto Switcher aed etes lins Inverter Outguard Supply eene Inverter Inguard Supply eee Power Fail 2 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 2 2 31 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 2 36 2 37 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 42 2 43 2 44 2 45 2 46 2 47 2 48 2 49 2 50 2 51 2 52 2 53 2 54 2 55 2 56 2 57 2 58 2 59 2 60 2 61 2 62 2 63 2 64 2 65 2 66 2 67 2 68 2 69 2 70 2 71 2 72 2 73 2 74 2 75 2 76 2 77 2 78 Digital Kernel dee aen Reset Circuits iie eene rte pente teo o Ee Address Decoding ener teet etes Flash Memory Real Time 2 FPGA Field Programmable Gate Serial Communication Guard Crossing 5 252 Ethernet Digital Inputs and
206. etup menu The CTS modem control signal from A1J4 goes to the RS 232 receiver A1U13 6 which inverts and level shifts the signal so that the input to the Microprocessor A1U1 58 transitions between 0 and 5 0V dc When the instrument is cleared to send characters to the RS 232 interface the receiver output 1013 11 is 5 0V dc If the RS 232 CTS signal is not driven by the attached RS 232 equipment the receiver output A1U13 11 is near OV dc Ethernet Interface 2 41 2 22 The Ethernet Interface is the primary means the instrument uses to communicate with a host computer The interface is comprised of an Ethernet chip a buffer memory two physical connectors and electrically isolated interfaces between the Ethernet chip and the connectors Only one of the two connectors are used at a time Ethernet Chip and Buffer Memory The Ethernet chip A1U32 is directly connected to the Microprocessor s address and data bus Three address lines are used to select registers within the Ethernet Chip and data is transferred over 16 data lines The chip select is performed by read and write strobe signals EIOR and EIOW A1U32 154 and A1U32 155 EIOR is driven low when the Microprocessor is reading from the Ethernet Chip and EIOW is driven low when the Microprocessor is writing to the Ethernet Chip The Ethernet chip signals the end of a read or write cycle by driving its RDY output A1U32 151 low This enables the output of tri state buffer 1102
207. fe CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to equipment SYMBOLS MARKED ON EQUIPMENT WARNING Risk of electric shock Refer to the manual L GROUND Ground terminal to chassis earth A Attention Refer to the manual This symbol indicates that information about usage of a feature is contained in the manual This symbol appears on the rear panel ground post and by the fuse compartment AC POWER SOURCE The instrument is intended to operate from an ac power source that will not apply more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is required for safe operation USE THE PROPER FUSE To avoid fire hazard for fuse replacement use only the specified unit 15 100 ampere 250V time delay GROUNDING THE INSTRUMENT The instrument utilizes controlled overvoltage techniques that require the instrument to be grounded whenever normal mode or common mode ac voltages or transient voltages may occur The enclosure must be grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord or through the rear panel ground binding post USE THE PROPER POWER CORD Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and plug configuration in your country Use only a power cord that is in good condition Refer power cord and connector changes to qualified servi
208. for Ohms 2T 30k range Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select channel 0101 instrument 01 channel 01 from the Channel list Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 2 Resistance Range Decade Resistor Minimum Reading Maximum Reading 3 MQ 30 kQ Short Circuit Zero 700Q 1 30 29 29 681 30 019 300 290 289 07 292 63 kQ 2 9 2 8607 2 9410 The resistance accuracy in this table makes up to 0 05 ohm of lead wire resistance plus 0 01 decade resistance tolerance You must add any additional lead wire resistance present in your setup to the resistance values given in this table The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0 05 ohm of lead wire resistance You must add any additional lead wire resistance present in your setup to the Resistance Range 5700A Minimum Reading Maximum Reading 30 Short Circuit Zero 7000 30 19 19 686 20 014 300 190 kQ 189 60 192 10 kQ 3 MQ 1 9 MQ 1 8740 MO 1 9277 MQ resistance values given this table 5 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double c
209. from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Reinstall the Universal Input Module You may also use the 5700A resistance calibration output instead of the Decade Resistance Source Tables are provided for both connections Configure Channel 1 for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for Ohms 2T 300 range 2640A or 30K range 2645A Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select channel 0101 instrument 01 channel 01 from the Channel list Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 2 Resistance Range Decade Resistor 3000 Short Circuit Zero 00 100 3000 2900 289 860 300 140 Short Circuit Zero 00 10 50 3 2 9 kQ 2 8986 kQ 2 9114 kQ 30 29 28 983 29 027 300 290 289 61 290 39 3 MQ 2 9 MQ 2 8914 MQ 2 9086 MQ The resistance accuracy in this table makes allowance for up to 0 1Q of lead wire resistance plus 0 01 decade resistance tolerance You must add any additional lead wire resistance present in your setup to the resistance values given in this table Resistance Range 5700A 3000 Short Circuit Zero
210. ftware If everything seems to be correct troubleshoot the RS 232 interface 1013 drivers in particular A1TP12 for the receive RX input Troubleshooting the Ethernet Interface 5 24 If Ethernet operates IOBASE T but not 10BASE2 the 1016 transceiver is suspect Check pin A1U16 18 for a nominal 7V dc and A1U16 19 for a nominal 8V dc Since the A1U16 device is powered by power supply module A1U38 you should also check 1038 for the correct output of 9V dc Also check 102 which processes the A1U32 Ethernet Controller interrupt output Finally if there still is an Ethernet problem the fault could be caused by the A1U32 Ethernet Controller itself or its associated RAM device 1033 One check is to measure the bias voltage at A1U32 21 at resistor A1R107 For a normally operating A1U32 device this voltage is a nominal 1 22 dc Troubleshooting the Digital I O Lines and Trigger Out Lines 5 25 When the instrument is powered the A1U31 Field Programmable Gate Array is programmed by the A1U1 microprocessor as part of the initialization routine Thus programmed the FPGA interfaces with the keys portion of the A2 Display PCA and the DIO lines such as the instrument rear panel DIGITAL I O dio7 to dio0 as well as the trigger output and input lines If there are any problems in this area check the A1U31 signal conditions in particular the D clock output at A1U31 19 If all appears well check the associated receivers A1U3 and A1U4
211. g Error Codes using the NetworkKk 5 9 Selecting the Diagnostic 5 5 10 Diagnostic 2 2 nce 5 11 Diagnostic Tool 14 5 12 Diagnostic Tool 5 13 Diagnostic Display 5 5 14 COMM Parameter Reset ciet ee i 5 15 Using the RS 232 Interface 5 16 Command Processing l epe 5 17 Instrument Configuration eese 5 18 Command annii a lan EODD ER 5 19 Troubleshooting the Instrument 5 20 General Troubleshooting 5 21 1 PCA Troubleshooting eene 5 22 Troubleshooting the Al PCA Digital Kernel 5 23 Troubleshooting the RS 232 Interface 5 24 Troubleshooting the Ethernet Interface 5 25 Troubleshooting the Digital Lines and Trigger Out Lines 5 26 Troubleshooting the Totalizer and Trigger In Lines 5 27 Troubleshooting the Power Supply 5 28 A2 Display PCA Troubleshooting 5 29 Variations in the Display 5 30 A D Converter
212. gnals The instrument is designed for bench top field service and system applications A dual vacuum fluorescent display uses combinations of alphanumeric characters and descriptive annunciators to provide prompting and measurement information during setup and operation modes Some features provided by the instrument are listed in Table 1 3 For additional information regarding instrument features and capabilities refer to the NetDAQ Users Manual PN 942623 nw CAL ENABLE N Figure 1 1 2640A 2645A NetDAQ Networked Data Acquisition Units NetDAQ Service Manual 1 4 Table 1 1 Summary of 2640A 2645A Specifications Maximum Reading Rates Volts DC Only Maximum Single Channel Scan Reading Rates 2 Volts DC Accuracy 90 day 1V dc input Thermocouple Accuracy 90 day Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs Resolution Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs Accuracy Time to Change Functions Between V dc V ac Frequency and Ohms 143 readings second scanning 20 channels 80 readings second Drift Correction enabled 120 readings second Drift Correction disabled 0 02 0 3 C 0 003 C 0 12 C 6 ms Specification 2640A 2645A Maximum Normal Mode Voltage 150 300V 1 50V Maximum Common Mode 150 300V 1 50V Voltage Input Overload Protection 1600V 300V 1000 readings second scanning 20 channels 250 reading
213. gure 4 2 Two Terminal Connections to 5700A NetDAQ Service Manual Initializing the Performance Test Setup 4 4 Complete the following procedure to initialize the performance test setup It is assumed you have configured the host computer and instrument as described in Configuring the Performance Test Setup above Testing begins with the instrument and host computer unpowered This assures that at power up self tests are completed successfully the correct host computer Ethernet port is activated the host computer configuration is accurately reflected and other background operations are completed This procedure clears the instrument of any existing BCN Line Frequency and Network settings 1 Apply Instrument Power with Configuration Reset Hold down the COMM key on the instrument front panel and apply power to the instrument After the instrument beeps and momentarily displays Reset release the COMM key If any self test errors are reported on the front panel display refer to Self Test Diagnostics and Error Codes in this chapter Configuration Reset sets the instrument to the default parameters BCN 1 Line Frequency 60 and Isolated Network 2 Setthe Line Frequency If the ac power applied to your instrument is 60 Hz default continue to Step 3 If the ac power applied to your instrument is 50 Hz complete this step Press the COMM key for 3 seconds until your hear a beep and the SET annunciator in the display
214. h measurement A thermocouple resistance greater than 1 k to 10k is To calculate Thermocouple accuracy for temperatures between 28 C and 60 C or 10 C and 18 C use a linear interpolation between the two applicable points For example if the applicable specification at 28 C is 0 6 and the specification at 60 C is 1 1 then the specification at 40 C is 1 1 0 6 x 40 28 60 28 0 6 0 7875 Introduction and Specification 0 to 150 2 19 20 4 0 24 150 to 650 1 1 6 17 35 1 8 650 to 1000 5 1 4 1 7 3 2 2 0 1000 to 1800 2 0 2 5 45 3 2 1800 to 2316 5 3 1 3 8 6 8 5 1 Specifications Table 1 40 2645A Thermocouple Specifications Accuracy C Thermocouple Resolution 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Type Temperature C Slow Slow Fast Slow Fast 100 to 80 3 0 8 0 9 16 0 9 17 80 to 230 2 0 7 0 8 1 4 0 9 15 230 to 760 2 0 7 0 8 13 1 0 15 100 to 25 4 1 0 14 2 0 12 2 1 25 to 120 3 0 8 0 9 17 1 0 18 120 to 1000 3 0 9 14 18 1 5 2 2 1000 to 1372 3 12 15 23 20 29 N l00to 25 5 1 4 1 5 2 8 1 5 2 9 25 to 120 5 14 13 23 13 24 120 to 1000 4 1 0 14 2 0 12 2 1 1000 to 1300 3 1 0 12 19 1 6 24 100to 25 3 0 8 0 9 1 5 1 0 16 25 to 20 2 0 7 0 7 12 0 8 1 3 20 to 600 2 0 6 0 7 14 0 8 4 2 600 to 1000 2 0 6 0 8 12 1 1 15 40000 4 14 12 22 1 3 2 3 0 to
215. hat is pulsed low when the Microprocessor writes a bit to a register in the FPGA A1U31 The trigger output line TGOUT A1J6 3 is pulsed low for 250 to 500 microseconds at the beginning of the first measurement of each acquisition scan The pulse width is set by circuitry within the FPGA The output circuitry for the trigger output is the same as for the digital and alarm output buffers except for transistor A1Q10 This transistor is used to increase the amount of current the trigger output can sink This allows the trigger output to drive the trigger inputs of up to 19 instruments A2 Display PCA Circuit Description 2 48 Display Assembly operation is classified into six functional circuit blocks as follows Main PCA Connector e Front Panel Switches e Display e Beeper Drive Circuit e Watchdog Timer Reset Circuit e Display Controller Each circuit block is described in the following paragraphs Main PCA Connector 2 49 2 26 The 20 pin Main PCA Connector A2J1 provides the interface between the Main PCA and the other functional blocks on the Display PCA Seven of the connector pins provide the necessary connections to the four power supply voltages 30V dc 5V dc Vee 4 9V and 5 4V ac filament voltage see Table 2 4 Six pins are used to provide the interface to the Front Panel Switches A2SWR1 through A2SWR6 The other seven signals interface the Microprocessor A1U4 to the Display Controller A2UI and
216. he diagnostic tool menu 4 Select another diagnostic tool using the up down arrow key or exit by pressing the Diagnostic Tool conF 5 12 The conF diagnostic tool allows you to configure the reading rate and channel functions and channel ranges for channels 1 to 20 Complete the following procedure to configure the reading rate and channel functions 1 Select the conF diagnostic tool using the procedure Selecting the Diagnostic Tool Menu Reading Rate Use the up down arrow keys to show rAtE in the primary display then press the e key Using the up down arrow keys sequence through the reading rates SLO Slow FASt Fast and HALF Medium stopping at the desired rate then press Gi Select the conF diagnostic tool using Selecting the Diagnostic Tool Menu Channel Functions Use the up down arrow keys to show chAn in the primary display then press the Gi key a Using the left right and up down arrow keys select the desired channel for configuration 01 to 20 then press the b Using up down arrow keys chose the measurement function for the selected channel then press the e key c Using the up down arrow keys chose the range for the measurement function except frequency which has no range selection then press the Repeat Step 4 for each channel you wish to configure Select another diagnostic tool using the up down arrow key or exit by pressing th
217. he instrument firmware as an indication to start scanning and the rising edge is used as an indication to stop scanning The External Trigger Input is pulled up to 5V dc by A1Z2 and is protected from electrostatic discharge ESD damage by 1 58 A1C54 A1Z3 and 15 Capacitor A1C54 helps ensure that the instrument meets EMI EMC performance requirements 2 25 NetDAQ Service Manual The input is then routed to the FPGA A1U31 that contains the External Trigger control circuitry The Microprocessor sets control register bits in the FPGA A1U31 to control the external trigger circuit The External Trigger control circuit output A1U31 9 drives an interrupt input on the Microprocessor 101 121 If External Triggering is enabled see User Manual the Microprocessor sets FPGA control register bits to allow a low level on the TGIN input to cause the External Trigger Interrupt XTINT A1U31 9 to go low The Microprocessor then changes the FPGA control register bits to allow a high level on the TGIN input to cause XTINT A1U31 9 to go low Thus the Microprocessor can detect both rising and falling edges on the TGIN input Normally the XTINT output of the FPGA A1U31 9 should be low only for a few microseconds at any time If it is held low constantly the instrument does not operate Resistor ATR39 pulls the XTINT output high to ensure that it is high during power up The instrument has a trigger output line t
218. he Power Switch Input Connector 3 27 Installing the A1 Main eee 3 28 Installing the A2 Display 3 29 Installing the A D Converter PCA 3 30 Installing the A4 Analog Input PCA 3 3 Assembling the Front Panel Assembly 3 32 Installing the Front Panel Assembly eene 3 33 Installing the Instrument Case eere Performance Testing and Calibration 4 1 m 4 2 Performance 4 3 Configuring the Performance Test Setup 4 4 Initializing the Performance Test Setup 4 5 Accuracy Performance Tests rennen 4 6 Volts DC Accuracy Test 2640A 4 T Volts DC Accuracy Test 2645A 4 8 Volts AC Accuracy eee inia 4 9 Frequency Accuracy 4 10 Analog Channel Integrity Test a 4 11 Computed Channel Integrity Test
219. he instrument sets the configuration to the values shown below in Table 5 6 Table 5 6 Instrument Configuration Configuration Element Power on Reset Selftest Channel 1 to 20 configuration Channel 1 only is VDC Off Autorange Off Off ff function range terminals TC Off 1 0 1 0 type RTD Channel 1 to 20 OTC Channel 21 to 30 Equation Channel 1 to 30 Mx B Channel 1 to 30 Alarm Limits 0 0 Channel 1 to 30 Alarm None None Association Channel 1 to 30 Alarm Trigger Disabled Disabled Reading Rate Slow Slow Primary Interval 0 0 Conditional Interval 0 0 Alarm Check Interval 0 0 Primary Interval Triggering Disabled Disabled External Triggering Disabled Disabled Alarm Triggering Disabled Disabled Scan Queue Mode Overwrite Old Scans Overwrite Old Scans Trigger Output Disabled Disabled Temperature Scale F or C C C Totalizer Debounce Disabled Disabled Housekeeping Drift Enabled Disabled Correction Inactive Client Scan Disable Enabled Enabled The prompts provide error information And the TST query provides failure information Power on selftest results can be retrieved with the SELFTEST query NetDAQ Service Manual 5 12 Command Set 5 18 The instrument RS 232 command set is shown in Table 5 7 RS 232 Command Set The calibration commands are described in more detail in Chapter 4 These are CAL
220. hold Capacitor A1C29 filters the divider voltage at the input of ATUS Digital Input Buffers 2 44 2 24 Since the eight Digital Input Buffers are identical in design only components used for Digital Input O are referenced in this description If the Digital Output Driver A1U17 12 is off the input to the Digital Input Buffer is determined by the voltage level at A1J5 10 If the Digital Output Driver is on the input of the Digital Input Buffer is the voltage at the output of the Digital Output Driver The Digital Input Threshold circuit and resistor network 171 determine the input threshold voltage and Hysteresis for inverting comparator A1U3 The inverting input of the comparator A1U3 2 is protected by a series resistor 173 and diode 1 14 A negative input clamp circuit 109 A1Z2 and A1CR17 sets a clamp voltage of approximately 0 7V dc for the protection diodes of all Digital Input Buffers A negative input voltage at A1J5 10 causes 14 to conduct current clamping the comparator input 103 2 at approximately OV dc The input threshold of 1 4V dc and a hysteresis of 0 5V dc are used for all Digital Input Buffers When the input of the Digital Input Buffer is greater than approximately 1 65V dc the output of the inverting comparator is low When the input then drops below about 1 15V dc the output of the inverting comparator goes high Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Digital and Al
221. hould be off will show a shadowing or speckling effect 3 Check the clock signal at A2TP2 A2UI 2 and A2U4 3 This signal should be a 512 kHz square wave 1 953 microseconds per cycle This signal depends on an E clock signal also known as DCLK of 1 024 MHz from the Main Assembly If the E clock is not correct the problem may be in the Al Main PCA or in the ribbon cable system connecting the two assemblies 4 Check the state of the RESET signal A2UI 1 This signal should be low once the reset time is completed after power up Also verify that the RESET signal A2U6 3 is high after the reset time is completed 5 Verify that the DISRX signal A2U1 39 goes low after RESET A2U1 1 goes low If this sequence does not occur communication to the Microprocessor is held off with the DISRX signal high If DISRX stays high but is not shorted to VCC A2UI must be faulty 6 Verify activity for both the DISTX and DSCLK signals These signals are driven by the Microprocessor and must be transitioning for the Display Controller to receive commands from the Microprocessor 7 Ifall segments of a particular digit do not turn on at power up the grid drive from 201 may not be connected properly to A2DS1 Grids are numbered from 10 to 0 left to right as the display is viewed For a digit to be enabled the respective grid drive signals GRID 10 0 must be at approximately Vcc 4 9V dc For a digit to be disabled the drive mus
222. ick OK in the message box and then the Close button in the Communications Configuration File dialog box to return to the Main Window 4 6 7 10 Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Configure Icon Note the Icon Bar in the Main Window If the Icon Bar shows instrument 01 complete Reset Instrument Icon below If the Icon Bar does not show instrument 01 complete Create Instrument Icon below Reset Instrument Icon Select the Delete Instrument Icon form the Setup menu If the command is dimmed Configuration Lockout is checked in the Options menu Click Yes in warning message Complete Create Instrument Icon below This sequence clears all configuration data from the instrument Create Instrument Icon Select the Create Instrument Icon from the Setup menu If the command is dimmed Configuration Lockout is checked in the Options menu Select instrument 01 on the Available Instruments List Click OK Select Reading Rate and Trigger Out Click the Instrument Config button on the Button Bar opening the Instrument Configuration dialog box Select Reading Rate Slow and check the Trigger Out box Click OK to return to the Main Window Connect DIGITAL I O Test Leads Remove the 10 position DIGITAL I O connector from the instrument rear panel or from the connector kit supplied with the instrument Connect a test lead to each DIO line 0 to 7 plus a test lead to the gt Totalizer input and the common GND lin
223. ing the A1 Main 3 27 Complete the following procedure to install the A1 Main PCA I Tiltthe rear portion of the pca slightly downwards and position the pca in the chassis Slide the pca towards the rear and into position 2 Install the RS 232 connector hardware N at the rear panel using a 3 16 inch nut driver 3 Install the two screws M that secure the pca to the chassis N WARNING Make sure you correctly connect the switch and power terminals at the power switch There is a risk of electric shock if the connection is incorrect Refer to Figure 3 3 for the input power terminal connections 4 Thread the two red wires through the pca and connect to the power switch Either red wire can be connected to either switch terminal Do not accidentally connect the red wires to any input power terminal If you removed the power input terminals reconnect them as shown in Figure 3 3 5 Reconnect the transformer cable at A1J3 6 Route the pendant A D ribbon cable J from A1P10 through the chassis opening and reconnect it to the A3 A D Converter PCA connector A3J10 7 Gently reconnect the display ribbon cable E to the connector A1J2 8 Complete the procedure Installing the Instrument Case as required Installing the A2 Display PCA 3 28 To install the A2 Display PCA see Assembling the Front Panel Assembly Installing the A3 A D Converter PCA 3 29 Complete the following procedure to install the A3 A D Converter PCA
224. invalid The allowable limits for each reference are specified for each procedure in Chapter 4 Performance Testing and Calibration This command returns an execution error if no cal procedure is active Command CAL_REF Description Query the present calibration reference value Parameters None Response lt reference value gt lt reference value gt floating point number Restrictions Calibration mode only Notes This command returns an execution error if no cal procedure is active Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Using the RS 232 Interface Command CAL_STEP Description Calibrate and query the calibrated value of the input Parameters None Response lt calibrated value gt lt calibrated value gt floating point number Restrictions Calibration mode only Notes This command returns an execution error if the measured reading is outside of the limits specified for each function For vdc resistance and frequency functions the calibration constant value cannot exceed 5 of the function range for vac the calibration constant cannot exceed 10 of the function range This command returns an execution error if no cal procedure is active This command returns a device dependent error if an internal error such as measurement timeout is detected If the CAL STEP command completes successfully the calibrated value returned is the reference value If the command fails because the measured reading is outside
225. ircuit 2 53 The Watchdog Timer and Reset circuit has been defeated by the insertion of the jumper between TP1 and TP3 on the Display Assembly In this instrument the reset circuitry is on the Main Assembly and the Watchdog Timer is part of the Microprocessor 101 The Display Reset signal DRST drives the RESET2 signal on the Display Assembly low when the instrument is being reset This discharges capacitor A2C3 and NAND gate output 206 11 provides an active high reset signal to the Display Processor The Watchdog Timer on the Display Assembly A2U5 A2U6 and various resistive and capacitive timing components is held cleared by TP1 being held at 0V dc by a jumper and output A2U5 12 is high Display Controller 2 54 The Display Controller is a four bit single chip microcomputer with high voltage outputs that are capable of driving a vacuum fluorescent display directly The controller receives commands over a three wire communication channel from the Microprocessor on the Main Assembly Each command is transferred serially to the Display Controller on the display transmit DISTX signal with bits being clocked into the Display Controller on the rising edges of the display clock signal DSCLK Responses from the Display Controller are sent to the Microprocessor on the display receive signal DISRX and are clocked out of the Display Controller on the falling edge of DSCLK Series resistor A2R11 isolates DSCLK from A2U1 40 preventi
226. irs are used in a cable One pair is used to transmit data A1P1 1 and 2 and the other is used to receive data A1P1 3 and A1P1 6 Resistors A1R86 A1R95 and capacitor A1C60 provide a termination network for data received through the pulse transformer 1 4 Resistors 1 32 AIR76 AIR92 A1R100 and A1R120 provide a termination network for data transmitted through the pulse transformer A1T4 Connector provides chassis potential on pins 9 and 10 to shield the cable and provide a system ground Capacitor A1C28 helps the instrument meet EMI requirements 10BASE2 Ethernet Connector Ethernet transceiver chip A1U16 drives and receives data on the IOBASE 2 Coaxial interface connector A1P2 In addition 1016 detects collisions on the Ethernet Data and collision detect signals are transferred between the transceiver chip A1U16 and the Ethernet Interface A1U32 through pulse transformer Power supply module A1U38 provides a 9V isolated power supply to the 10BASE 2 transceiver chip 1016 The power supply module be powered down by signal from the Ethernet Chip A1U32 64 when the 2 interface is not being used The transceiver chip A1U16 is protected from electrostatic discharge ESD by resistors A1R136 A1R77 capacitors AIC23 A1C61 and MOV AIRV2 AIR18 sets internal bias currents in 1016 2 23 NetDAQ Service Manual Pulse transformer A1T3 provides elect
227. is performed only in response to a self test command from the outguard Inguard Unresponsive 2 90 The inguard does not contain any kind of watchdog timer If for whatever reason the inguard fails to respond after the expected length of time the outguard should reset the inguard by sending a series of break characters The expected length of time for a scan command is variable depending on the number and types of channels defined and is calculated by the outguard at run time Inguard Software Description 2 91 The major functional blocks of the inguard are given in Figure 2 7 The arrows show the flow of measurement information There is a control interface not shown between the A3US A D microprocessor and every other functional block The channel scanner relays select the desired channel to be measured and route it to the function relays The function relays route the signal to the appropriate portion of the Signal Conditioning circuitry depending on the function being measured VAC VDC ohms etc The Signal Conditioning circuitry converts the signal into a form that can be measured by the A D i e a DC voltage with a range of 3 to 3V The A D converts the analog voltage to a digital value which is then read by the A3U5 A D microprocessor The box labeled A D microprocessor represents the microcontroller and its associated memory and glue logic upon which the inguard software runs It controls all of the other hardware eleme
228. itional Ethernet Transceiver device A1U32 is used These circuits require power supply voltages from the Power Supply and signals from the Digital Kernel A2 Display PCA Block Description 2 9 The Display Assembly controller communicates with the A1 Main PCA microprocessor 101 over a three wire communication channel Commands from the microprocessor inform the Display Controller how to modify its internal display memory The Display Controller A2U1 then drives the grid and anode signals to illuminate the required segments on the Display The A2 Display requires power supply voltages from the 1 PCA power supply voltages and a clock signal from A1U4 microprocessor A D Converter PCA Block Description 2 10 2 8 The following paragraphs describe the major blocks of circuitry on the A D Converter PCA Theory of Operation Functional Block Description Analog Measurement Processor 2 11 The Analog Measurement Processor A3U30 provides input signal conditioning ranging and frequency measurement This custom chip is controlled by the A D Microprocessor A3U5 The A D Microprocessor communicates with the Main PCA Microprocessor 101 over a serial interface Input Protection 2 12 This circuitry protects the instrument measurement circuits during overvoltage conditions Input Signal Conditioning 2 13 Here each input is conditioned and or scaled to a dc voltage for measurement by the a d converter
229. ity for the 2645A Table 1 37 2645A Four Wire RTD Temperature Coefficient Specification Temperature Coefficient Table 1 38 2645A Four Wire RTD Specifications Accuracy Characteristic To calculate RTD accuracy for temperatures between 28 C and 60 C or 10 C and 18 C use a linear interpolation between the two applicable points For example if the applicable specification at 28 C is 0 2 and the specifications at 60 C is 0 75 then the specification at 40 C 75 2 x 40 28 60 28 2 406 Temperature Resolution 90 Day 18 C to 28 C Slow Fast Slow Fast 200 C 0 03c 0 060 o19c 0 25 C 0 0 030 0 06 100 0 030 0 06 300 C 0 030 0 06 600 C 0 030 0 06 C 1 Year 18 C to 28 C Slow 0 25 C 0 31 C 0 34 C 0 41 C 0 63 C 2645A Thermocouple per ITS 1990 Measurement Specifications 1 Year 10 C to 60 C Slow Fast 0 62 C 1 10 C 0 85 C 1 30 C 0 95 C 1 40 C 1 18 C 1 70 C 1 62 C 2 12 C 1 35 Tables 1 39 to 1 40 provide 2645A specifications for the thermocouple measurement function per ITS 1990 Table 1 39 2645A Thermocouple General Specifications Specification Input Impedance Characteristic 100 MO minimum in parallel with 300 pF Open Thermocouple Detect Temperature Coefficient detected as an open input Operates by injecting a small ac signal into the input after eac
230. ix byte packet hereafter referred to as a command packet that causes the inguard to perform some action and return one or more six byte response packets Transactions between the outguard and inguard are always initiated by the outguard The inguard never sends data across the guard without being asked to do so There are two modes of communication between the inguard and outguard non pipelined and pipelined In the non pipelined mode commands and responses are synchronous i e the outguard waits for the response to a command before sending another command In the pipelined mode the outguard may send a second command before the first command has completed The outguard must wait for the response from the first command before sending a third command Special Codes 2 77 ACK response packet is arbitrarily defined as the sequence of bytes 42 0 0 0 0 x where x is the checksum byte A NAK response packet is defined as 255 255 255 255 255 x where x is the checksum byte A break is an all zeros character without stop bits Resets 2 78 2 44 A reset consists of 5 ms of consecutive break characters sent to the inguard A hardware circuit on the inguard detects this condition and causes a complete reset of the inguard subsystem The inguard sends no response to a reset After sending a reset the outguard must wait a predefined amount of time before attempting further communication with the inguard This is the same amount of time it
231. k the Close button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box to return to the NetDAQ Logger for Windows Main Window Otherwise continue to the next calibration function 4 32 Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration Resistance Calibration Procedure 4 39 This procedure uses the calibration feature of NetDAQ Logger for Windows Complete the Calibration Procedure Semiautomatic before using this procedure 1 Click the Resistance button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box opening the first Calibration Steps Resistance dialog box below Calibration Steps Resistance Apply 190 Ohms Actual Perform Calibration Step If you get an error message check the RS 232 parameter settings and cabling and make sure no other application such as terminal or internal modem is using the selected COM port The error Calibration Mode not enabled means you have not pressed the CAL enable button at the instrument front panel 2 Connect the 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 8 and source an output of 190 ohms Note that this must be a four wire connection Also verify the calibrator output is set up for a four wire source Click the Perform Calibration Step button to calibrate the selected value After the calibration step completes the next calibration appears in the Actual box 3 Inasimilar manner source the 5700A Calibrator for the values 1 9k 19k 190k ohms and so forth until the Done button is no longer di
232. l measurement regardless of the voltage measured See Open Thermocouple Detector Thermocouple readings also require an isothermal block reference junction reading to be taken If any thermocouple channels are measured in a scan a reference junction measurement is taken first before any channel measurements Reference Junction 2 109 The reference junction reading is similar to a VDC reading However no channel selection or function relay switching is required however the Stallion must be configured The reference junction reading is converted to a floating point value and returned to the outguard Frequency 2 110 There are actually two parts to a frequency measurement First a normal VAC measurement is taken using the highest range You must do this to determine the amplitude of the input signal and thus the most appropriate gain setting to use for the actual frequency measurement The frequency measurement circuitry works best with a large amplitude input signal Therefore the gain setting used is one higher than would be used for a normal VAC measurement For example if the autosensitivity reading indicates that the input amplitude is 3V you take the frequency measurement is taken with the AC buffer amplifier set to the 300 mV range See Table 2 21 Frequency Sensitivity For input signals whose measured amplitude is very low a frequency reading is still attempted since the frequency response of the VAC measurement circuitry r
233. le 2 2 Booting Microprocessor Memory Map Hexadecimal Address 000000 07FFFF Flash A1U21 200000 27FFFF SRAM A1U20 A1U30 A1U34 and A1U35 400000 401000 Microprocessor Internal 500000 50000F Ethernet Interface A1U32 600000 60007F FPGA Configuration A1U31 600080 6000FF Real Time Clock A1U11 Just before beginning execution of the instrument code the address decoding is changed to map the address space as shown in Table 2 3 This change switches the positions of Flash Memory and Static RAM within the address space of the Microprocessor Note that the Flash Memory is duplicated at two address ranges When the instrument code begins executing it runs out of the address range beginning at 088000 Hex Table 2 3 Instrument Microprocessor Memory Map Hexadecimal Address 000000 07FFFF SRAM A1U20 A1U30 A1U34 and A1U35 080000 87FFFF Flash A1U21 088000 8FFFFF Flash A1U21 400000 401000 Microprocessor Internal 500000 50000F Ethernet Interface A1U32 600000 600007 FPGA Control Status A1U31 600008 60000F Alarm Outputs 1031 600010 600017 Digital Outputs A1U31 600018 60001F Read Only Digital Inputs A1U31 600020 600027 Read Only Keyboard Input 1031 600028 600022 Read Only Totalizer LSB Input 1031 600030 600037 Read Only Totalizer MSB Input 1031 600080 6000FF Real Time Clock A1U11 NetDAQ Service Manual Flash Memo
234. le click the upper left hand corner control menu box Digital Input Output Tests 4 21 The Digital Input Output Tests check the eight Digital I O lines on the DIGITAL I O connector for output and input functions Digital I O Output Test 4 22 This test checks the Digital I O lines when used as outputs 1 7 4 20 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select 01DIO Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Digital Output for all Unset Lines The Spy window summarizes the 8 DIO binary lines as a decimal equivalent 1 255 for the present condition of all lines unset 11111111 Measure DIO Lines Using a digital multimeter measure the output of each DIO line referenced to the GND line for a voltage greater than 3 8V dc Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Configure Channels 1 to 8 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channels 1 to 8 for Volts dc 3V range Configure Channels 1 to 8 for Alarms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure each channel 1 to 8 for an Alarm 1 with Alarm Sense LO Alarm Value 1 and Digital Outputs assigned as below Channel 1 Digital Output DOO Channel 2 Digital Output DO1 Channel 3 Digital Output DO2 Channel 4 Digital Output DO3 Channel 5 Digital Output DO4 Channel 6 Digital Output DOS Channel 7 Digital Output DO6 Channel 8 Digital Output DO7 Verify Channels and Al
235. lick the upper left hand corner control menu box Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2640A 4 16 Ensure that the Accuracy Tests above have been completed before performing this test on the 2640A 1 Connect the Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Sense and channel 11 Source as shown in Figure 4 3 Reinstall the Universal Input Module You may also use the 5700A resistance calibration output instead of the Decade Resistance Source Tables are provided for both connections Refer to Figure 4 4 for the 5700A four wire connections 2 Configure Channel 1 for Resistance In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for Ohms 4T 300 range 3 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog channel 01 Click OK to open the Spy window 4 Wire 4T Connection 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ur ar aL ar nt nr SOURCE 4 WIRE Input Module HL H SENSE 4 WIRE HL HrL HL HL 10 Decade Resistance Box or DIN IEC75 RTD Figure 4 3 Four Terminal Connections to the Universal Input Module Resistor 4 15 NetDAQ Service Manual 11 12 13
236. lose button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box to return to the NetDAQ Logger for Windows Main Window Otherwise continue to the next calibration function VAC Calibration Procedure 4 38 This procedure uses the calibration feature of NetDAQ Logger for Windows Complete the Calibration Procedure Semiautomatic before using this procedure 1 Click the Volts AC button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box opening the first Calibration Steps Volts AC dialog box below Calibration Steps Volts AC Apply 0 03 1 kHz Actual Perform Calibration Step If you get an error message check the RS 232 parameter settings and cabling and make sure no other application such as terminal or internal modem is using the selected COM port The error Calibration Mode not enabled means you have not pressed the CAL enable button at the instrument front panel 2 Connect the 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 7 and source an output of 0 03V ac at a frequency of 1 kHz Click the Perform Calibration Step button to calibrate the selected value After the calibration step completes the next calibration appears in the Actual box 3 Inasimilar manner source the 5700A Calibrator for the values 0 3V 0 3V 3V 3V values repeat and so forth until the Done button is no longer dimmed 4 Click the Done button to exit the volts ac calibration cycle If this completes your calibration requirements clic
237. ls can accommodate a wide range of wire sizes starting with 12 gauge as the largest size The two rows of terminal blocks are maintained very close to the same temperature for accurate thermocouple measurements Reference Junction Temperature 2 20 A semiconductor junction is used to sense the temperature of the thermocouple input terminals The resulting dc output voltage is proportional to the block temperature and is sent to the A D Converter PCA for measurement Detailed Circuit Description 2 21 The following circuit descriptions describe the theory of operation for each Instrument pca For these descriptions refer to the associated schematic diagram in Chapter 7 A1 Main PCA Circuit Description 2 22 The following paragraphs describe the operation of the circuits on the A1 Main PCA The schematic for this pca is located in Chapter 7 Power Supply Circuit Description 2 23 The power supply portion of the A1 Main pca consists of three major sections e Raw DC Supply The raw dc supply converts line voltage 107V to 264V ac into a dc output of 8V to 35V e 5V Switcher Supply The 5V switcher supply regulates the 8V to 35V dc input into the 4 9V 0 05V dc Vcc source Inverter Using the 5V switching supply output the inverter generates the 30V dc and 5 4V ac supply levels needed for the vacuum fluorescent display and the 5V dc supply for the RS 232 Interface The inverter also provides isolated 5 6V Vddr 5 2V Vdd and 5
238. ls to be driven low when POR is low When POR goes high the tri state buffer outputs A1U2 go to their high impedance state and the pull up resistors pull the outputs to a high level When HALT and are both driven low the Microprocessor 101 is reset and 15 in execution when they both go high The Microprocessor may execute a reset instruction during normal operation to drive 101 92 low for approximately 10 microseconds to reset all system hardware connected to the RESET signal The Display Reset signal DRST is driven low by A1U2 6 when POR is low or it may be driven low by the Microprocessor A1U1 56 if the instrument firmware needs to reset only the display hardware For example the firmware resets the display hardware after the FPGA is loaded at power up and the Display Clock DCLK signal from the FPGA begins normal operation This ensures that the Display Processor is properly reset while DCLK is active Microprocessor 2 33 The Microprocessor uses a 16 bit data bus and a 20 bit address bus to access locations in the Flash Memory A1U21 the Static RAM A1U20 A1U30 A1U34 and A1U35 the Real Time Clock A1U11 the FPGA A1U31 and the Ethernet Interface A1U32 All of the data bus lines and the lowest 12 address lines have series termination resistors located near the Microprocessor A1U1 to ensure that the instrument meets EMI EMC performance requirements When a memory access is done to the upper half
239. ly Installing the Instrument Case eese 3 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 3 2 General Maintenance 3 Introduction Introduction 3 1 This chapter provides handling cleaning fuse replacement disassembly and assembly instructions For replacement part information refer to Chapter 6 Warranty Repairs and Shipping 3 2 If your instrument is under warranty see the warranty information at the front of the Users Manual for instructions on returning the unit The list of authorized service facilities is included in Appendix I of the Users Manual General Maintenance 3 3 General maintenance includes information on the general aspects of instrument servicing including required test equipment power requirements static safe handling and servicing surface mount assemblies Required Equipment 3 4 Equipment required for calibration troubleshooting and repair of the instrument is listed in Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Refer to the Fluke Surface Mount Device Soldering Kit for a list of special tools required to perform circuit assembly repair In the USA call 1 800 526 4731 to order this kit Power Requirements 3 5 N WARNING To avoid shock hazard connect the instrument power cord to a power receptacle with earth ground The instrument operates on any line voltage between 107V ac and 264V ac and at any frequency between 45 and 65 Hz However the instrument
240. m The floating point format used is ANSI IEEE Std 754 1975 single precision Positive and negative overload conditions cause a value of PLUS OVLD VAL 0 7 800000 and MINUS OVLD VAL Oxff800000 respectively to be returned A frequency channel whose input frequency is too low to measure returns 0 Hz A channel with an open thermocouple condition causes the value of OTC VAL 0x7fc00000 to be returned The inguard waits until it has completed all measurement activity associated with a particular scan before beginning the transmission of the response packets for that scan to the outguard The floating point value returned has a nominal range of 3 0 to 3 0 The outguard must scale this according to the channel function and range to produce the correct volts or ohms For most ranges a full range value is returned as 43 0 For example on the 300 ohm range 3 0 represents 300 ohms For the 90 mV and 750 mV ranges however 43 0 represents 93 26 mV and 0 746083V respectively Also frequency readings always return the actual frequency measured and do not require range scaling by the outguard Perform Self Test 2 81 The Command Packet tells the A D to perform all self tests Response Packets Returned always returns a single response packet The Response Packet Format provides the following e self test result pass or fail Zero Offset self test result pass or fail e Reference Balance self test result pass or fail e Ohms Ove
241. mbly Removing the Instrument 5 Removing the Front Panel Assembly Disassembling the Front Panel Assembly Removing the Al Main Removing the A2 Display PCA sese Removing the A D Converter Removing the A4 Analog Input PCA Removing Miscellaneous Chassis Components Removing the Power Switch Input Connector Removing the Removing the Power Transformer Assembly Proced res ertet aee mte FI Installing Miscellaneous Chassis Components Installing the Power Transformer eee Installing the Fuseholder eene Installing the Power Switch Input Connector Installing the Al Main PCA ene Installing the A2 Display PCA aaa Installing the A D Converter PCA Installing the A4 Analog Input Assembling the Front Panel Assembly Installing the Front Panel Assemb
242. me Clock chip A1U11 causes the timer counter to be sampled every 1 64th of a second The CINT signal also interrupts the Microprocessor to provide a timing reference for the software The combination of the counter and the interrupt are used by the software to keep track of the time to the nearest millisecond referenced to the Real Time Clock Chip A second sixteen bit timer in the Microprocessor is used for an interval timer It is also clocked at a rate of 1 64th millisecond This timer interrupts the Microprocessor at a rate determined by the application The Microprocessor has two parallel ports Many of the parallel port pins are either used as software controlled signals or as inputs or outputs of timers and serial communication channels Port has 16 bits and Port B has 12 bits The Microprocessor communicates to the Display Controller using a synchronous three wire communication interface controlled by hardware in the Microprocessor Information is communicated to the Display Controller to display user interface menus and measurement data Details of this communication are described in the Display Controller Theory of Operation in this chapter The Microprocessor communicates to the A D Microprocessor on the A D Converter PCA via the Serial Communication circuit using an asynchronous communication channel at 120 000 baud Communication to the A D Microprocessor A3U5 originates at AIUI 80 Communication from the A D s Microprocesso
243. mes the dc voltage Automatic switchover occurs between ac and dc without interruption Standards Both instruments comply with Serial Interface RS 232C IEC 1010 1 UL 1244 CSA Bulletin 556B ANSI ISA S8201 1988 CSA C22 2 No 101 1 92 Vfg 243 1991 when shielded cables are used FCC 15B Class B level when shielded cables are used Connector 9 pin male DB 9P Signals TX RX DTR RTS GND Modem Control full duplex Baud rates 4800 9600 19200 38400 Data format 8 data bits no parity bit one stop bit Flow control XON XOFF Echo Off Common Mode Voltage Measurement Speed Scanning Rates 2640A 150V 300V on channels 1 and 11 2645A 50V dc or 30V ac rms 2640A Slow 6 readings per second Medium 48 readings per second 60 Hz Fast 143 readings per second 20 configured channels Single Channel 120 readings per second 2645A Slow 54 readings per second 60 Hz Medium 200 readings per second Fast 1000 readings per second 20 configured channels Single Channel 400 readings per second Accuracy of Medium Scanning Rate Equal to Fast Accuracy Rate Slow Accuracy Rate 2 Additional error if Automatic drift correction is turned off If the instrument is fully warmed up at the time drift correction was disabled i e turned on at least 1 hour earlier 1 10 of the 90 day specification per C change in ambient temperature from the temperature when drift correction
244. miautomatic using NetDAQ Logger for Windows Calibration takes place in conjunction with NetDAQ Logger for Windows that is a feature of the software is used to calibrate the instrument Since calibration is accomplished over an RS 232 connection between the instrument RS 232 port and a host computer serial COM port it is not necessary to have a network connection to accomplish calibration e Manual using a terminal and individual commands Calibration takes place using a host computer in a terminal mode With this method all commands and responses are considered individually 4 25 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 26 All methods use the instrument RS 232 serial interface Procedures cannot be performed over the network interface or from the instrument front panel Preparing for Calibration 4 32 Regardless of the method you are using for calibration automatic semiautomatic or manual the preparation for calibration is identical Complete the following procedure to prepare for calibration 1 Connect the instrument RS 232 serial port to a host computer COM serial port as shown in Figure 4 5 You can connect two instruments as shown although only one 15 calibrated at a time The RS cables used are standard null modem cables reversed transmit and receive lines that may be ordered from Fluke Wire the Universal Input Module so the high and low inputs to channels 1 and 11 are externally available In addition a four wire short
245. mmed 4 Click the Done button to exit the resistance calibration cycle If this completes your calibration requirements click the Close button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box to return to the NetDAQ Logger for Windows Main Window Otherwise continue to the next calibration function 4 33 NetDAQ Service Manual Frequency Calibration Procedure 4 40 This procedure uses the calibration feature of NetDAQ Logger for Windows Complete the Calibration Procedure Semiautomatic before using this procedure 1 Click the Frequency button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box opening the Calibration Steps Frequency dialog box below e Calibration Steps Frequency Apply 10k Hz 3V Signal Actual k Hz 3V Signal Perform Calibration Step If you get an error message check the RS 232 parameter settings and cabling and make sure no other application such as terminal or internal modem is using the selected COM port The error Calibration Mode not enabled means you have not pressed the CAL enable button at the instrument front panel 2 Connect the 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 7 and source an output of 3V ac at 10 kHz Click the Perform Calibration Step button There is only a single value 3 Click the Done button to exit the frequency cycle Calibration Procedure Manual 4 41 Manual calibration uses a calibration command set operated over an ASCII terminal or a computer running a termi
246. mperature Accuracy Test Resistance 2645A RTD Temperature Accuracy Test DIN IEC 751 RTD Digital Input Output Tests Digital Output Test a Digital Input Test une re nest ere repetere E Totalizer Count Test Totalizer Sensitivity 5 esee Master Alarm Output Test eese Trigger Input Trigger Output i edente nr tento 4 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 2 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 42 4 43 4 44 4 45 4 46 Calibration uere Methods of Calibration Preparing for Calibration Ending Calibration RS 232 Instrument Configuration Parameters Calibration Procedure Automatic Calibration Procedure Semiautomatic VDC Calibration Procedure VAC Calibration Procedure Resistance Calibration Procedure Frequency Calibration Procedure Calibration Procedure Manual Manual Calibration Commandis Manual VDC Calibration Procedure Manual VAC Calibration Procedure Manual Resistance Calibration Procedure Manual Frequency Calibration Proce
247. mum Reading Maximum Reading 0 0500 190 0880 0 500 1 90088 kQ 19 0107 kO 190 250 kQ 1 90575 MQ To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2645A 4 17 Ensure that the Accuracy Tests above have been completed before performing this test on the 2645A 1 Connect the Resistance Source to Channels 1 and 11 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a cable from the Decade Resistance Source to the Universal Input Module terminals for channel 1 Sense and channel 11 Source as shown in Figure 4 3 Reinstall the Universal Input Module You may also use the 5700A resistance calibration output instead of the Decade Resistance Source Tables are provided for both connections Refer to Figure 4 4 for the 5700A four wire connections Configure Channel 1 for Resistance In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for Ohms 4T 300 range Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog channel 01 Click OK to open the Spy window NetDAQ Service Manual 4 Verify Accuracy Configure the Decade Resistance Source for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 2 9 3002 3002 3 kQ 3 kQ 30 300 kO 3 MQ 3002 3000 3 3 kQ 30 kQ 300 3 MQ Clos
248. must be applied to channels 2 and 12 See Figure 4 6 Plug the module into the instrument Power the instrument and allow at least a 30 minute warmup period The instrument must be stabilized in an environment with an ambient temperature of 22 to 24 C and relative humidity of less than 70 Using the buttons at the instrument front panel set the desired baud rate for the instrument RS 232 port see below This is the only selectable RS 232 parameter The other instrument RS 232 parameters are fixed data bits 8 stops bits 1 parity none echo none flow control xon xoff Press the COMM key to review the baud rate or press and hold the COMM key for 3 seconds to set the baud rate the SET annunciator lights Press the up down arrow keys until 5232 is shown in the primary display comm is displayed in the secondary display Press the ENTER key bAud is displayed in the secondary display and the current baud rate in the primary display Press the up down arrow keys to select the desired number baud rate 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 The factory default value is 9600 baud Press the ENTER key to exit Pressing any other function key will cancel set operations 5 Activate the calibration mode at the instrument by pressing and holding the instrument front panel CAL Enable button for approximately 4 seconds Release the button after instrument beeps and CAL is shown on the primary display NOTE The C
249. n RS 232 Communication 85 232 Port Baud Rate on fag Calibration 5 Select the COM port and baud rate noted in Step 1 The instrument default baud rate 15 9600 baud VDC Calibration Procedure 4 37 This procedure uses the calibration feature of NetDAQ Logger for Windows Complete the Calibration Procedure Semiautomatic before using this procedure 1 Click the Volts DC button in the Instrument Calibration dialog box opening the first Calibration Steps Volts DC dialog box below Calibration Steps Volts DC Apply 0 09 VDC Actual Perform Calibration Step If you get an error message check the RS 232 parameter settings and cabling and make sure no other application such as terminal or internal modem is using the selected COM port The error Calibration Mode not enabled means you have not pressed the CAL enable button at the instrument front panel 2 Connect the 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 7 and source an output of 0 09 V dc Click the Perform Calibration Step button to calibrate the selected value After the calibration step completes the next calibration appears in the Actual box 3 Ina similar manner source the 5700A Calibrator for the values 0 3V 75 and so forth until the Done button is no longer dimmed 4 81 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 Click the Done button to exit the volts dc calibration cycle 5 Ifthis completes your calibration requirements click the C
250. n Interval 2 of 1 second Be sure Interval Trigger is not enabled Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows verify channel 1 is configured for Volts dc range Start Instrument Scanning Click the Start Instrument button on the Button Bar to enable instrument scanning although no measurement scanning takes place because the external Trigger Input is not set Open Logging Status Window Select the Show Logging Status command from the Options menu to display the Logging Status window Verify Logging Status Note in the Logging Status window that the Retrieved Scans count is zero and not incrementing Set Trigger Input While monitoring the Logging Status window connect the TI Trigger Input test lead to the GND test lead Note in the Logging Status window the Retrieved Scans count increments at 1 second intervals Disconnect the TI and GND test lead connection Stop Scanning Click the Stop Instrument button on the Button Bar to stop instrument scanning Trigger Output Test 4 29 This test checks the Trigger Output 125ys logic low that occurs each time the instrument scans 1 Configure Interval Trigger NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure the scan parameters for Interval Trigger with an Interval 1 of 1 second Verify Configuration Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows verify channel 1 is configured for Volts dc 3V range Measure Unset Trigger Output Line Using a digital
251. n between the two applicable points For example if the applicable specification at 28 C is 0 2 and the specification at 60 C is 0 75 then the specification at 40 C is 75 2 x 40 28 60 28 2 0 406 Table 1 23 2640A Four Wire RTD Specifications Accuracy 3o Resolution 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Temperature 18 C to 28 C 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C Slow Fast Slow Fast Slow Slow Fast 200 C 0 003 0 007 0 06 0 16 33 0 0 003 0 007 0 090 0 20 0 53 0 86 100 C 0 003 0 007 0 10 C 0 23 C 0 16 0 63 0 97 c c 300 C 0 003 C 0 007 0 14 C 0 30 C 1 20 C 600 C 0 003 C 0 007 0 19 C 0 53 C 1 60 C 1 20 C 2640A Two Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement Specifications 1 26 The 2640A specifications for the two wire Resistance Temperature Detector RTD measurement function is based on the four wire RTD measurement specification above except you add a nominal 5 ohm approximately 13 C positive offset This value varies for each channel and temperature gradient nominal 1 C Also note that the resistance of the RTD wiring adds directly to the error After 100 million operations of a measurement channel the offset will increase at an indeterminate rate 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 2640A Thermocouple per
252. n query command to get a response from the instrument when the non query command is finished executing For example sending CAL 1 OPC will get the 1 response when the instrument is ready to execute calibration procedure 1 5 13 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 14 Command RST Description Reset Resets the configuration to the values in Table 5 6 Instrument Configuration Clears DIO and other settings as shown in Table 5 8 Power on Reset Instrument State Parameters None Response None Restrictions None Notes If RST is used in calibration mode the instrument exits calibration mode If RST is used to exit calibration mode before the completion of a calibration procedure for a function VDC VAC OHMS FREQ any new calibration constants for that function will not be saved Table 5 8 Power on Reset Instrument State State Element Power on 32 bit totalizer Cleared to 0 Digital Output Deasserted Reset Selftest Cleared to 0 Deasserted Deasserted Master Alarm Output Trigger Output Deasserted Deasserted Deasserted External Trigger Input FPGA interrupt disabled Front Panel Quiescent FPGA interrupt disabled Goes to quiescent Error Status Errors from startup Errors not cleared Status always current Selftest Status Errors from startup Scanning Disabled Not affected Results of test Goes to disabled Disabled Monitor G
253. n reference sources closed case calibration has many advantages There are no parts to disassemble no mechanical adjustments to make and the instrument can be calibrated by an automated instrumentation system The instrument should normally be calibrated on a regular cycle typically every 90 days to 1 year The chosen calibration cycle depends on the accuracy specification you wish to maintain The instrument should also be calibrated if it fails the performance test or has undergone repair The calibration procedure uses the CAL ENABLE switch under the Calibration Seal on the instrument front panel Do not press CAL ENABLE unless you intend to calibrate the instrument If you have entered calibration and wish to exit press CAL ENABLE until CAL is removed from the primary display or just turn the instrument power off Once the instrument is in calibration mode closed case calibration is made for the four calibration groups as follows Volts DC Volts AC e Resistance e Frequency Once begun each group must be completed successfully for the results of the calibration to be made permanent It is not necessary to perform all calibration groups Methods of Calibration 4 31 There three methods of instrument calibration as follows e Automatic using Fluke MET CAL software MET CAL is a software package developed by Fluke that automates the calibration of Fluke instruments and popular instruments from other selected manufacturers e Se
254. nal emulation program The following procedure assumes you will be using the Windows Terminal feature of your host computer If you are using a different terminal adapt this procedure to suit Complete the following procedure to prepare the Windows Terminal feature 1 Complete the Preparing for Calibration procedure earlier in this chapter Note the instrument baud rate and host computer COM port that you selected for use 2 Open Windows to the Program Manager screen on your host computer 3 Open Terminal below from the Accessory group of Program Manager Terminal Untitled File Edit Settings Phone Transfers Help 4 34 Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration 4 Select the Communications command from the Setting menu Enter the same RS 232 baud rate and host computer COM noted in Step 1 The other parameters are selected as shown below Click OK Communications Baud Rate 300 0600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Data Bits Stop Bits 0s 07 Parity Flow Control Connector None Xon Xoff COM1 Odd Hardware COM2 Even None Mark Space Parity Check 0 Carrier Detect 5 Select the Terminal Preferences command from the Settings menu Check the boxes Local Echo and Outbound see below Click OK Terminal Preferences Terminal Hodes CR gt Line Wrap z Inbound 04 Local Echo 04 Outbound q Sound Cursor Colum
255. nal path for the 300V dc range Table 2 7 Range of Buffer Amplifier Range Buffer Range Control Signals Gain 90mV Range 32 168 gain 300mV Range x10 gain 750mV Range BR2 x4 021 gain 3V Range gain Range x10 gain 300V Range x1 gain 2 34 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Table 2 8 Measurement Matrix for DC Volts DC Volt Input to Full Scale Gain of DC Full Scale DC Buffer Range Range Stallion Output of Buffer Amplifier Volts Input to Control Signal Stallion Multislope A D 90mV Direct 90mv __ 32 168 av BRI 300 mV Direct 300 mV 10 00 BR3 750 Direct 750 mV 4 021 3V BR2 3V Direct av 1 000 BR4 30V Divide by 101 300 mV 10 000 3V BR3 150 300V Divide by 101 1 000 av BR4 CHANNEL 1 INPUTHI A3K1 A3K23 HI A3R110 1K Fusible A3K27 Reset A3Z7 10M 513 524 S64 S44 A3U27 27 100K A3U28 27 Reset ADHI A3R119 CHANNEL 1 1K 233 532 INPUT LO Lo A3L52 A3K1 23 Figure 2 8 DC Volts 300V Range Simplified Schematic 2 35 NetDAQ Service Manual Ohms and RTD Measurement Circuitry 2 62 Resistance measurements are made by sourcing dc current through the unknown resistor and measuring the resultant dc voltage see Table 2 9 The current source consists of operational amplifie
256. nel Switch Settling Times 2 15 Function Relays uu cte orna e 2 16 Function Relay Settling 2 17 Stallion Switch Settings 2 18 Signal Conditioning Settling Time eene 2 19 A D Command erret ttt tetra een 2 20 A D Readings to Average to Obtain a Measurement 2 2 requency Sensitivity ridendo o ten sasay 2 22 A D Readings to Average to Obtain a Reference Balance Measurernietit 2 tte e e eee ett e 4 1 Recommended Test 4 2 RS 232 Instrument Configuration for Calibration Procedures 4 3 Calibration 4 4 Manual Calibration Command Responses 4 5 Manual VDC 4 6 Manual VAC nennen 4 7 Manual Resistance Calibration 4 8 Manual Frequency 5 Selttest Error Codes x eere be e 5 2 FLASH ROM Parameter Defaults essen 5 3 Corrective Action for Background Error Checking 5 4 Instrument Firmware Descriptions eese 5 5 Instrument Default COMM Parameters
257. nels not just the channel used for the test 1 Configure Channel 1 for Frequency In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for frequency There is no range selection for frequency because all frequency measurements use Autoranging Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select channel 0101 instrument 01 channel 01 from the Channel list Click OK to open the Spy window 3 Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test Verify Accuracy Configure the 5700A for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 1 Frequency Range 5700A Output Minimum Reading Maximum Reading Autorange Only 1V 10 kHz 9 994 kHz 10 006 kHz 4 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Analog Channel Integrity Test 4 10 Complete the following procedure to test the integrity of each analog channel 2 to 20 to verify each analog channel is capable of making measurements 1 Configure Channel for Ohms In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channels 2 then 3 then 4 etc because this step is repeated to 20 for ohms 2T 300 range 2640A or 30K range 2645A Connect Test Leads Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument disconnect the test leads and connect them to the channel under test starting with channel 2 Reinstall
258. ng Both References 0 1 1 Reference Balance Reading Neither Reference There are two lines from the A D state machine A3U18 that indicate its state These are connected as interrupt request signals to the A3U5 A D microprocessor The falling edge of the A D Interrupt signal indicates that a reading is complete and the counters are ready to be read The A D Interrupt signal goes high at the beginning of the Integrate period when the counters are cleared and the signal is read by the A3U5 A D microprocessor reads the counters to make sure that they were read in time The DE signal indicates the beginning of the Deintegrate period See Figure 2 16 A D Status Signals AZ UAZ Autozero Integrate Deintegrate Untimed Autozero 7 DE INT A D Interrupt AUI Figure 2 16 A D Status Signals 2 55 NetDAQ Service Manual Counters 2 99 The counters in the A D state machine A3U18 are accessed through a synchronous serial interface This interface is connected to the SCP port of the A3U5 A D microprocessor which is also connected to the Stallion chip Chip select lines are used to indicate the device the A3U5 A D microprocessor is communicating The counter values from the A D are transmitted in five bytes The hardware state machine transmits bytes most significant bit first There is no hardware detection of overload An overload condition is detected by a software
259. ng this output from trying to drive A1U4 16 directly Figure 2 4 shows the waveforms during a single command byte transfer Note that a high DISRX signal is used to hold off further transfers until the Display Controller has processed the previously received byte of the command DSCLK OQ 7 872 BIT1 Y WN DISRX i BIT7 X BITS YBT3 Yarro CLEAR TO HOLDOFF ey CLEAR TO ik RECEIVE il RECEIVE 31 5 us 31 5 us Figure 2 4 Command Byte Transfer Waveforms Once reset the Display Controller performs a series of self tests initializing display memory and holding the DISRX signal high After DISRX goes low the Display Controller is ready for communication on the first command byte from the Microprocessor the Display Controller responds with a self test results response If all self tests pass a response of 00000001 binary is returned If any self test fails a response of 01010101 binary is returned The Display Controller initializes its display memory to one of four display patterns depending on the states of the DTEST 201 41 and LTE A2UI 13 inputs The DTEST input is pulled up by A2ZI but may be pulled down by jumpering A2TP4 to 2 GND The LTE input is pulled down by A2R12 but may be pulled up by jumpering A2TP5
260. nguard A D failure Inguard zero offsets test failed Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Error Detection Table 5 1 Selftest Error Codes cont Front Panel RS 232 Query Error Codes in E Code D ipti Error Codes Error Codes hexadecimal 10 512 0 00000200 reference balance test failed 11 1024 0x00000400 Inguard overload detection failed 12 2048 0x00000800 Inguard open thermocouple detect failed 13 4096 0x00001000 Communication parameters corrupt 14 8192 0x00002000 Ethernet address parameter corrupt 15 16384 0x00004000 RAM constants corrupt 16 32768 0x00008000 Ethernet chip or RAM failure FLASH ROM Parameter Defaults 5 4 The FLASH ROM U21 Main Board parameters are reset to defaults following the first power on and following power cycles after any FLASH ROM parameters are discovered to be corrupt These defaults are listed in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 FLASH ROM Parameter Defaults Parameter Default Ethernet Address ff ff ff ff ff ff Calibration Constants All gains are set to 1 0 all offsets are set to 0 0 IP Address 255 255 255 255 Port Number 4369 RS 232 Baud Rate 19200 BON 1 Line Frequency 60 Hz Network Type 0 isolated network Background Testing 5 5 Background testing is performed to ensure that communication configuration and calibration constants do not become corrupt over time Every 1
261. nly in emphasis The 2640A emphasizes precision and supports up to 100 measurements per second with 5 digits of resolution 02 accuracy and 150 volt common mode voltage 300 volts on channels 1 and 11 while the 2645A emphasizes increased measurement speed supporting up to 1000 measurements per second with 4 digits of resolution 04 accuracy and 50 volt common mode voltage Refer to Table 1 1 for a summary of instrument specifications For complete instrument specifications see Specifications later in this chapter The instruments measure dc volts ac volts ohms temperature frequency and dc current Temperature measurements use thermocouples or resistance temperature detectors RTDs Refer to Table 1 2 for a summary of instrument measurement capabilities In addition there are eight digital input output lines one totalizing input one external trigger input one trigger output and one master alarm output The instruments can be ac or dc powered An RS 232 serial port is supplied for servicing and maintenance procedures The term instrument is used in this manual to refer to both units The model number 2640A or 2645 is used when discussing characteristics unique to one instrument Instrument assemblies are identical except for the A3 Analog Digital Converter printed circuit assembly pca which is specific to the 2640A mechanical switching for measurement signals and 2645 solid state switching for measurement si
262. ns Block Underline 80 132 X Blink Terminal Font Translations None n United Kingdom n Denmark Norwa C IBM to ANSI X Show Scroll Bars Buffer Lines X Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows 4 35 NetDAQ Service Manual 6 Press the Enter key a few times and notice the gt returns indicating a successful connection see below If you do not receive these returns the RS 232 link is not operating Check the communication parameter settings and cabling Terminal Untitled File Edit Settings Phone Transfers Help Manual Calibration 4 42 The calibration procedures are performed in the terminal mode using the commands CAL CAL CAL_REF CAL_REF CAL_STEP and CAL_CLR Refer to Table 4 3 for information regarding these commands After each command 5 entered the terminal returns one of three responses as shown in Table 4 4 Table 4 3 Calibration Commands Command Description Cal Mode Only CAL x Start calibration of a new function where x an integerfrom Yes 1 to 4 For example CAL 1 for VDC calibration 1 VDC 2 3 Resistance 4 Frequency CAL Return identifier of currently active calibration procedure For Yes example CAL returns 2 for active calibration of the VAC mode 0 No cal procedure currently active 1 2 3 Resistance 4 Frequency CAL REF value Calibrate to v
263. nstrument Reading Rate Fast Reading Rate Medium Reading Rate Slow 2640A 1 5 60 Hz 45 60 Hz 6 50 Hz 48 50 Hz 2645A 1 4 20 60 Hz 24 50 Hz 2 105 There are several steps that you must perform at the beginning of any channel measurement e Set function relays See Function Relays earlier in this chapter This is a relatively slow operation and should be done only if the relay positions actually need to change e Set tree and channel switches See Channel MUX earlier in this chapter Program Stallion See Stallion Chip and Signal Conditioning earlier in this chapter e Wait for channel switches to settle See Table 2 14 Tree and Channel Switch Settling Times e Wait for signal conditioning circuitry to settle See Table2 18 Signal Conditioning Settling Time After these steps have been carried out the sequence of operations depends on the measurement function 2 106 These types of measurements all use the A D converter After selecting the channel and configuring the signal conditioning circuitry the A D is triggered and depending on the reading rate one or more readings taken The A D counts are converted to a floating point value and stored in a buffer for later transmission to the outguard The channel and tree switches are then deselected 2 107 Volts DC on the 26454 fast rate represent a special case To attain the required throughput you cannot perform the sequence
264. ntrols channel treeing and function relays 2 42 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Communication with the main processor is done using the IGDR line to receive and the IGDS line to send serial data On the A D side these signals are called RECV DATA and XMIT DATA pins A3U5 53 and A3U5 54 respectively The RESET signal is asserted on power up for reset and during operation when a break signal is received from The A D microprocessor guard crossing is bidirectional When the user finishes defining the channels and intervals and starts scanning the A1 Main PCA downloads all the channel information to the A D Converter PCA The A1 Main uses the guard crossing to advise the A3 A D Converter PCA when to start scans and then return the readings to the A1 Main PCA The arrangement keeps the guard crossing traffic to a minimum when scanning is taking place allowing peak performance during short scan intervals Open Thermocouple Detect Circuitry 2 74 The open thermocouple detect circuitry uses devices A3U23 and A3U32 Before every thermocouple measurement the open T C check is done by sending a small ac coupled signal to the thermocouple input The A D Microcomputer A3U5 initiates the open test by asserting EN and turning ON A3Q20 A 19 2 KHz square wave is sent out the line through A3Q20 and A3C82 to the thermocouple The resulting waveform is detected by A3U32 pin 3 and a pr
265. nts are tested against limits as are the differences between the counter values For both references on each counter must be less than 0x8000 and their difference must be less than 0x6000 For both references off each counter must be less than 0x2000 and their difference must be less than 0x200 Ohms Overload Test 2 125 For this test a two wire ohms measurement is attempted without any channel selected however the tree and function relays must be set This should result in an overload Any other value causes the test to fail Test 2 126 The OTC test attempts to do an open thermocouple check with no channel selected Unless this results in an open indication the test fails 2 2 63 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 64 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 Chapter 3 General Maintenance Title Introduction tine rab eerie e Rep CHR Warranty Repairs and Shipping esee General M3Int nance entere cete cette deeds edid ones Required Equipment cci Power Requirements Static Safe Handling Servicing Surface Mount Assemblies up Replacing the Line Fuse une Disasse
266. nts on the inguard and handles communication with the outguard The primary task of the inguard software is to interpret configuration information and scan requests from the outguard manipulate the hardware in the appropriate way to obtain the requested measurements and return the measurement data to the outguard Hardware Elements 2 92 This section contains information about the various hardware subsystems on the inguard board Channel MUX 2 93 The channel multiplexing consists of treeing and channel switches implemented with either FET switches 2645 or reed relays 2640A There are two sets of bits associated with these switches The tree bits must be set to indicate which bank of channels is being used where bank 0 is channels 1 to 10 and bank 1 is channels 11 20 For four wire ohms measurements both banks are selected The position of the tree switches is also a function of the channel function and range being measured 2 49 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 50 The channel bits are set to indicate which of the 10 channels within a bank is being selected To deselect a channel so that no channels are selected write 1111 to the channel bits The tree bits should not be deselected since this would result in excessive wear of these switches for the 2640A Table 2 12 Tree Bits gives the bit patterns for the tree bits and Table 2 13 Channel Bits gives the bit patterns for the channel bits Table 2 12 Tree Bits
267. o 150 Hz 0 4 2 5 mv 0 89545 mV 0 5 25mV 1 5 mV 150 Hz to 10 kHz 0 3 2 5 mV 0 69645 mV 0 4 2 5 mV 19645 mV 10 kHz to 20 kHz 0 4 2 5 0 8 5 0 5 2 5 1 5 20 kHz to 50 kHz 1 3 mV 1 5 6 mV 1 5 3 mV 2 6 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz 2 5 mV 3 10 3 5 mV 4 10 mV 30V 20 to 50 Hz 3964 25 mV 696450 mV 3 596425 mV 7964 50 mV 50 to 150 Hz 0 496425 0 8 50 mV 1 296425 1 396440 mv 150 Hz to 10 kHz 0 4 25 mV 0 8 50 mV 1 2 25 mV 1 3 40 mV 10 kHz to 20 kHz 0 4 25 mV 0 8 50 1 2 25 mV 1 3 40 mV 20 kHz to 50 kHz 1 30 mV 1 5 60 mV 1 2 30 mV 296450 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz V lt 20V 2 50 3 100 mV 2 5 50 mV 4 100 mV 2645A Four Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications Introduction and Specification Specifications 1 1 32 Tables 1 34 to 1 36 provide 26454 specifications for the four wire resistance measurement function The four wire measurements use 2 input channels a decade apart e g channels 4 and 14 Table 1 34 2645A Four Wire Resistance Temperature Coefficient Specification Temperature Coefficient Characteristic Add 1 10th the 90 day specification per C above 28 C or below 18 C Table 1 35 2645A Four Wire Resistance Range and Resolution Specifications Resolution Current Full Scale Maximum Voltage Range Slow Fast Applied Voltage Applied b
268. o marked are active high Servicing Surface Mount Assemblies 5 2 The instrument incorporates Surface Mount Technology SMT for printed circuit assemblies pca s Surface mount components are much smaller than their predecessors with leads soldered directly to the surface of a circuit board no plated through holes are used Unique servicing troubleshooting and repair techniques are required to support this technology The information offered in the following paragraphs serves only as an introduction to SMT It is not recommended that repair be attempted based only on the information presented here Refer to the Fluke Surface Mount Device Soldering Kit for a complete demonstration and discussion of these techniques In the USA call 1 800 526 4731 to order Since sockets are seldom used with SMT shotgun troubleshooting cannot be used a fault should be isolated to the component level before a part is replaced Surface mount assemblies are probed from the component side The probes should make contact only with the pads in front of the component leads With the close spacing involved ordinary test probes can easily short two adjacent pins on an SMT IC This Service Manual is a vital source for component locations and values With limited space on the circuit board chip component locations are seldom labeled Figures provided in Chapter 6 of this manual provide this information Also remember that chip components are not individually l
269. o the parameters given The Response Packets Returned always returns a single response packet The Response Packet Format returns an ACK response packet if the channel was successfully configured otherwise it returns a NAK 2 47 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 48 Do Housekeeping 2 86 The Command Packet tells the A D to do the following e Do all housekeeping readings if bit set Do the next housekeeping reading in the schedule if bit set e Prescan preset the function relays Checksum Action Performed is as follows e If the Housekeeping bit is 1 the inguard takes a complete set of housekeeping readings for the current measurement rate there is one set for each rate Ifthe Next bit is 1 the inguard does the next housekeeping reading indicated by its internal schedule This is the same schedule used for a housekeeping timeout Ifthe Do2 bit is 1 the inguard does the two reference balance readings Ifthe PS bit is 1 the inguard presets the function relays for the first defined channel These bits may be set or cleared independently Note that the actions described above are carried out regardless of whether scheduled housekeeping is enabled by the global configuration command Response Packets Returned Always returns a single response packet This packet is not returned until the inguard completes all indicated housekeeping measurements Response Packet Format Returns a single ACK packet Checksums 2
270. ocedure above Complete the following procedure to calibrate an instrument using NetDAQ Logger for Windows software This procedure integrates the four calibration cycles VDC VAC ohms and frequency Complete only the cycle or cycles of interest 1 If you have not already done so complete the Preparing for Calibration procedure earlier in this chapter Note the instrument baud rate and host computer COM port used for interconnection Performance Testing and Calibration 4 Calibration Universal 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Input SOURCE HL Module 4 WIRE SENSE HL 4 WIRE 10 Channel 1 Wires 5700A Calibrator Channel 11 OUTPUT SENSE Wires VOA Uem 9 26 NO B 272 GUARD GROUND CURRENT Figure 4 7 Two Wire Calibration Connection 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Universal Input SOURCE HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL HL Channel 11 4 WIRE Module Wires y y SENSE 4 WIRE Channel 1 Wires CURRENT Figure 4 8 Four Wire Calibration Connection 4 29 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 30 2 Atthe host computer open NetDAQ Logger from the Fluke NetDAQ Logger group in Program Manager Under the Utilities menu look for a listing of the command Instrument Calibration see below If the Instrument
271. ocedure remains at the same step When CAL_STEP reports an execution error gt due to an out of range measurement it returns the raw measured reading to give you an indication of what was measured When CAL_STEP completes successfully it returns the reference value A device dependent error is returned by the CAL_STEP command if an internal error such as a measurement timeout is detected When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step An execution error gt is returned by the CAL_REF command if the specified reference is less than 10 kHz or greater than 100 kHz 4 41 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 42 Chapter 5 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 u u ER Servicing Surface Mount Assemblies seen Error De te Ct On C FLASH ROM Parameter Defaults Background Testing oes eet Internal Software Errors eese eene Retrieving Error Codes using RS 232 Retrieving Error Codes using the NetwolkK Selecting the Diagnostic Tools esee Diagnosti
272. ocessor to select totalizing of either the input signal or the debounced input signal The buffered Totalizer Input signal TOTI goes into the FPGA at A1U31 12 Inside the FPGA the totalizer signal is routed to a 16 bit counter in the FPGA The counter can be read at any time by the microprocessor When the 16 bit counter overflows the microprocessor is interrupted by the Totalizer Interrupt signal TOTINT that comes from A1U31 8 The microprocessor uses this interrupt 101 97 to increment a software counter The actual debouncing of the input signal is accomplished by A1U31 Counters divide the 15 36 MHz system clock down to 128 kHz for the debouncing circuit An EXOR gate compares the input signal TOTI and the latched output of the debouncer If these signals differ the EXOR gate output goes high enabling the debouncer If the input remains stable for 1 75 milliseconds the debouncer output changes state If the input does not remain stable for 1 75 milliseconds the debouncer output does not change state If the Microprocessor selected totalizing of the debounced input signal the debouncer output is connected to the 16 bit counter inside the FPGA External Trigger Circuits 2 47 The External Trigger Input circuit be configured by the Microprocessor interrupt a rising or falling edge of the TGIN input 176 2 or to not interrupt on any transitions of the TGIN input The falling edge of the TGIN input is used by t
273. oes to disabled None Spy Disabled Goes to disabled Scan Queue Empty Gets flushed Last Scan Record Empty Gets flushed Latest Channel Measurements Empty Gets flushed Network Connections Not affected Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Using the RS 232 Interface Command TST Description Selftest query Initiates asynchronous selftest and then returns the selftest results This command resets the instrument configuration and state the same as RST Parameters None Response lt selftest result gt an integer which binary encodes the selftest results as shown in Table 5 1 Selftest Error Codes Multiple selftest errors are indicated by the selftest codes or d together Restrictions Not allowed in calibration mode Command SELFTEST Description Selftest results query Returns the selftest results from the last selftest performed This command can be used to retrieve the power on selftest results Parameters None Response lt selftest result gt an integer which binary encodes the selftest results as shown in Table 5 1 Multiple selftest errors are indicated by the selftest codes or d together Restrictions Not allowed in calibration mode Command CAL Description Initiate calibration procedure for the specified measurement function Parameters procedure procedure 1 VDC 2 2 VAC 3 Ohms 4 Frequency Response None Restrictions Only allow
274. of the data bus D15 through D8 the upper data strobe UDS goes low When a memory access is done to the lower half of the data bus D7 through DO the lower data strobe LDS goes low When a memory access is a read cycle R W must be high Conversely for any write cycle R W must be low The Microprocessor is a variant of the popular Motorola 68000 processor and is enhanced by including hardware support for clock generation address decoding timers parallel ports synchronous and asynchronous serial communications interrupt controller DMA Direct Memory Access controllers and a watchdog timer The 15 36 MHz system clock signal 1 is generated by the oscillator circuit composed of A1Y1 1 2 A1C3 and A1C8 This clock goes through a series termination resistor A1R17 to the FPGA 1031 This resistor is necessary to ensure that the instrument meets EMI EMC performance requirements The Microprocessor has four software programmed address decoders that include wait state control logic These four outputs are used to enable external memory and I O components during read and write bus cycles See Address Decoding for a complete description Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description One sixteen bit timer in the Microprocessor is used to keep track of the time to the nearest millisecond The timer counter runs off the 15 36 MHz clock at a rate of 1 64th millisecond The CINT signal from the Real Ti
275. olls off more quickly at higher frequencies than that of the frequency measurement circuitry 2 59 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 2 21 Frequency Sensitivity Measured Amplitude Range Used for Frequency Measurement Less than 3V ACRI 300 mV Between 3V and 30V ACR2 3V Greater than 30V 2640A only ACR3 The frequency measurement itself does not use the A D Frequency measurements are taken using the Stallion chip To reduce noise in frequency measurements the instrument takes eight frequency readings and averages them together to obtain a single frequency measurement There is only one frequency range this is different from sensitivity and therefore the range field of the channel configuration is ignored for a frequency channel The only difference between the three measurement rates for a frequency reading is the length of time allowed for settling See Table 2 18 Signal Conditioning Settling Time If the status bits returned by Stallion indicate a low frequency PEROVER bit set a value of 0 Hz is returned If they indicate a high frequency PEROVER bit clear and FREQOVER bit set a value of PLUS_OVLD_VAL defined in Perform Scan is returned If the FRDY interrupt is not received within 500 ms of starting a frequency measurement the input signal is assumed to be too low in amplitude or frequency to measure and a value of 0 Hz is returned VAC Discharge Mode 2 111 After a f
276. om the instrument and connect an 820 ohm resistor to the channel 1 terminals Reinstall the Universal Input Module Configure Channel 1 for Thermocouples In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for Thermocouples with Range thermocouple type K Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog channel 1 Click OK to open the Spy window The value displayed should approximate the ambient temperature Connect 10kQ Test Resistor Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect a 10kQ resistor to the channel 1 terminals to simulate an open thermocouple condition Reinstall the Universal Input Module Verify Open Thermocouple The Spy window indicates an open thermocouple detect condition by displaying Open TC in place of a temperature reading Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2640A Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test 4 14 Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the resistance function for the 2640A using two terminals Measurement accuracy applies to all channels not Just the channel used for the test The four terminal resistance accuracy test is more rigorous and you may wish to skip this step and continue to Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 1 Connect the Resistance Source to Channel Remove the Universal Input Module
277. om the capacitor This also ends the count accumulation in the FPGA counters The deintegrate2 state always takes 24 counts even though the data has already been accumulated This guarantees the entire measurement cycle is of fixed length so that line cycle rejection is maintained The data is sent to the microprocessor during the following autozero state It is sent with 20 bits each for the PREF and NREF times In the microprocessor the voltage is computed based on the difference between p counts and n counts Overhead 2 72 Overhead is a fixed amount of time required for signal settling and processing Inguard Digital Kernel Circuitry 2 73 The inguard digital kernel circuitry consists of devices A3U2 A3U5 A3U6 A3UT and A3UIO The memory consists of Flash ROM A3U6 that contains the internal A D program and RAM A3U2 The 68302 Microprocessor is 305 which communicates with the main processor A1U1 and the Stallion device via the serial lines SB CLK SB XMIT and SB RECV Kernel communications are via the A D State Machine FPGA IC A3U18 using serial lines SB CLK SB XMIT and SB RECV sends measurement commands and reads measurement data To start a measurement A D TRIGGER is asserted by the A D microprocessor A3U5 113 Communication is with Stallion if the processor sets STAL SELECT low A3US5 pin 115 The DISCHARGE signal at A3U5 59 is asserted to discharge the filter capacitors and a data word sent out on the DO D7 bus co
278. omplete the following procedure to remove the A3 A D Converter PCA O from the chassis 1 Complete the procedure Removing the Instrument Case to gain access to the instrument assemblies Verify the instrument is not powered from any ac or dc source 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable J at connector A3J10 that leads to the A1 Main PCA Remove the six screws P that secure the pca to the chassis 4 Slide the pca towards the front of the instrument so that the pca edge indentations match the guide tabs on each side of the chassis tilt slightly upwards and remove Be sure the Universal Input Module is not connected at the rear panel Removing the A4 Analog Input PCA 3 17 Complete the following procedure to remove the A4 Analog Input PCA from the Universal Input Module 1 Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument Open the module and disconnect all inputs to the terminal strips 2 Using a nonmetallic prying device widen the side of the module next to one of the securing tabs located near the ends of the terminal strips and pry one edge of the pca free of the module Lift the free edge of the pca upwards and remove from the module Removing Miscellaneous Chassis Components 3 18 Complete the following procedure to remove miscellaneous chassis components including the power switch input connector fuseholder and power transformer Removing the Power Switch Input Connector 3 19 Complete the following procedure
279. ompt from Windows If you have not already done so copy the contents of the diskette into a directory on your hard drive e g firmware and change to this directory C firmware gt After the DOS prompt in the directory with the diskette files type load451 bat if you connected to PC COM port 1 or load452 bat if you connected to PC COM port 2 For example type the command C firmware gt load451 bat then press Enter Observe the checklist for this installation a pause press lt Cntl gt lt C gt to escape at this point and then press any key to the launch the executable 1d26xx exe with its appropriate switches for this loading application see Table 5 16 While loading the instrument display shows boot Allow several minutes for the firmware loading process to complete The PC screen will show Loading Line as the firmware is loaded Do not interrupt this process by touching the PC keyboard or removing power from the instrument After the completion of the firmware the screen shows Done Loading and the DOS prompt is returned To confirm the successful loading of the new firmware see Diagnostic Tool idS earlier in this chapter and note the new version of the Main Firmware identified as Main Loading the A D Firmware 5 41 The instrument A D Firmware is stored in an electrically erasable and programmable Flash memory A3U6 The Program Power for A3U6 is from an external source at or A3J3 and the firmwar
280. oportional level is stored on A3C79 If the level is above a threshold level of about 2 7V Vth the resistance at the input is too large greater than 4 kohm to 10 kohm and open T C check is asserted by A3U32 pin 7 After a short delay the A D Microcontroller reads the signal and determines if the thermocouple should be reported to the main processor as open A4 Analog Input PCA Circuit Description 2 75 The Input Connector assembly which plugs into the A D Converter PCA from the rear of the instrument provides 20 pairs of channel terminals for connecting measurement sensors This assembly also provides the reference junction temperature sensor circuitry used when making thermocouple measurements Circuit connections between the Input Connector and A D Converter PCAs are made via connectors A4P1 and A4P2 Input channel and earth ground connections are made via A4P1 while temperature sensor connections are made through A4P2 Input connections to channels 1 through 20 are made through terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 Channel 1 and 11 HI and LO terminals incorporate larger creepage and clearance distances and each have a metal oxide varistor MOV to earth ground to clamp voltage transients MOVs A4RV1 through A4RVA limit transient impulses to the more reasonable level of approximately 1800V peak instead of the 2500V peak that can be expected on 240V ac IEC 664 Installation Category II ac mains In this way higher voltage ratings can be applied to
281. or in A1U9 is turned on and off Complementary switch 10 conducts when switching is turned off NetDAQ Service Manual The pulse width modulator comparator in A1U9 compares the output to an internal reference and sets the ON time OFF time ratio to regulate the output to 4 9V dc AICI is the input filter capacitor and A1C14 and A1C18 are the output filter capacitors Proper inductor and capacitor values set the filter frequency response to ensure best overall system stability 26 and A1C21 ensure that the switcher supply remains stable and operating in the continuous mode The power supply current is internally limited by A1U9 to 5 amps Resistors 1 5 AIR6 AIR27 AIR29 A1R30 and form a voltage divider that operates in conjunction with amplifier 1028 which is configured as a voltage follower A1U28 3 samples the 4 9 V dc output while 11728 2 is the voltage divider input The effect is to maintain the junction of R30 and R31 at 4 9V dc resulting in an A1U28 1 output level of 6 14V dc or 1 24V dc above the output This feedback voltage is applied to 109 2 which A1U9 interprets as 1 24V dc because A1U9 3 ground is connected to the 4 9 V dc output 109 maintains the feedback and reference voltages at 1 24V dc and thus regulates the 4 9 V dc source Inverter 2 27 The inverter supply uses two transistor driven push pull configuration The center tap of transformer ATTI primary is connected to the 4 9
282. ortion of the A D Converter PCA depends on accurate power supply levels 50 mV In particular Vddr 5 6V dc at A3U8 1 Vcc 5 0V dc at A3U8 3 Vdd 5 2V dc at A3C31 and Vss 5 2V dc at A3C33 See Troubleshooting the A3 A D Converter PCA and Troubleshooting the Power Supply 9 Inguard zero A3 A D Background Each measurement function VDC VAC offsets test failed Converter resistance and frequency is subject to some sort of signal PCA conditioning and if this circuitry fails it could introduce an expectedly large offset error Failure This error suggests a problem in the signal conditioning path rather than the A D converter itself Correction Check the components for each signal conditioning method depending the function that has failed You can for example apply different functions i e vac resistance or frequency and note which function measures incorrectly Then look in the signal conditioning components for the failure Be sure A3W8 jumper is in place 5 22 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument Table 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems cont Error Code 10 11 Error Code Description Inguard reference balance test failed Inguard overload detection failed A3 A D Converter PCA A3 A D Converter PCA Suspect Assembly Error Code Discussion Background The A D converter uses
283. oss A3R128 is exactly 3 45V dc and the voltage across A3Z7 9 and A3Z7 11 is 1 00V dc If all the voltages are correct the A3U30 Stallion device becomes more suspect 5 23 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors to Instrument Problems cont Error Error Code Suspect Error Code Code Description Assembly Discussion 12 Inguard open A3 A D Background The open thermocouple detect circuit thermocouple Converter checks on the amount of a 19 2 kHz voltage developed detect failed PCA across a thermocouple Similar to the overload detection the self test does not set any channel relays and the detection circuit should detect the open thermocouple Failure For this error to occur the open thermocouple circuit has failed to detect the simulated open thermocouple condition Correction Check the circuitry formed by the open thermocouple detect circuit formed by A3U32 peak detector and comparator and associated components operates by applying a 19 2 kHz clock from A3U5 via A3C82 into the measurement line It checks on the amount of 19 2 kHz voltage is developed If the developed voltage exceeds a certain level this is detected as an open thermocouple with a logic output at A3U32 7 Similar to the overload detection the self test does not set any channel relays and the detection circuit should detect the open thermocouple Also check the relays in the circuit path 13 Communication A1 Main
284. ot software is a factory procedure only The only recourse is to order a new A1U21 device programmed at the factory if the software is corrupted Also see Troubleshooting the Digital Kernel 2 Bad main software A1 Main Background The A1U21 FLASH memory device is image in FLASH PCA divided into sections One of these sections is the main ROM software that runs the instrument Failure For this error to occur the main software is either missing or is corrupted and must be reloaded This failure is detected by a boot monitor condition which means the boot software completed but the main software did not take over instrument operation Correction Reloading the main software is discussed in Updating Embedded Instrument Firmware later in this chapter Also see Troubleshooting the Digital Kernel 3 RAM test failure A1 Main Background The A1U20 1030 A1U34 and A1U35 PCA static RAM devices are divided into two banks RAM1 A1U20 and A1U30 and RAM2 A1U34 and A1U35 The boot software uses a portion of RAM1 as a memory device Failure For this error to occur the devices did not function correctly during the boot process Either the RAM devices failed or the address decoding for the RAM devices failed Most of the address decoding is located internal to the A1U1 microprocessor while the RAM1 and RAM2 enable signals are generated by logic devices A1U14 and A1U15 from A1U1 address bits 18 and 20 Note that depending
285. ovide an input of zero volts to the A D the A D can be triggered and then read as normal Note that a reference balance reading has different timing than a normal reading on the 2645 see Timing earlier in this chapter The number of readings to take and average for the different reading rates are given in Table 2 22 Table 2 22 A D Readings to Average to Obtain a Reference Balance Measurement Instrument Reading Rate Fast Reading Rate Medium Reading Rate Slow 2640A 1 5 60 Hz 45 60 Hz 6 50 Hz 48 50 Hz 2645A 1 1 5 60 Hz 6 50 Hz There are two reference balance readings one with both references on and one with both references off These readings are intended to compensate for unequal voltage references in the A D They are used to obtain a scale factor which is then applied to the P counter for normal measurements NetDAQ Service Manual 2 62 The scale factor is derived as follows 1 16P2 2 16P0 NO K2 where 5 scale factor P2 P counts both references on N2 N counts both references on PO P counts both references off NO N counts both references off K2 0 1 16 1843 1 6 Zero Offset Readings 2 117 There are four zero readings one for each gain setting of the DC buffer amplifier Zero offset readings are similar to VDC readings except that no channel selection is required and no function relay switching is required The Stallion chip must be
286. pling resistors and circuit traces Also check for devices that are too warm On the A D Converter PCA all devices run cool except 305 microprocessor and A3U8 FPGA which run warm but not hot A2 Display PCA Troubleshooting 5 28 The following provides troubleshooting hints for the A2 Display PCA Use this material in conjunction with Chapter 2 Theory of Operation A Display Extender Cable is available from Fluke PN 867952 for use during troubleshooting N WARNING To avoid electric shock disconnect all channel inputs from the instrument before performing any troubleshooting operations The Display Controller reads the DTEST and LTE inputs to determine how to initialize the display memory DTEST and LTE default to logic and logic 0 respectively to cause all display segments to be initialized to on DTEST is connected to test points A2TP4 and LTE is connected to 2 5 Either test point can be jumpered to VCC A2TP6 or GND A2TP3 to select other display initialization patterns Display Test Patterns 1 and 2 are a mixture of on and off segments with a recognizable pattern to aid in troubleshooting When either of the special display patterns is selected the beeper is also sounded for testing without interaction with the Microprocessor Table 5 13 indicates the display initialization possibilities Table 5 13 A2 Display PCA Initialization Routines A2TP4 DTEST A2TP5 LTE Power Up Display Initializa
287. processor A1UI to the A D Microprocessor A3U5 is accomplished via the circuit made up of 105 A1R8 1 16 A1CR22 The transmit output from the Microprocessor A1U1 80 switches current through optocoupler LED A1U5 3 Resistor A1R8 limits the current through the LED The photodiode A1U5 responds to the light emitted by the LED when A1U1 80 is driven low The open collector output 105 6 is pulled high by AIR16 and AICR22 This output is connected to a serial port input on the A D Microprocessor A3U5 53 The transmission of data from the A D Microprocessor A3U5 to the Microprocessor A1UI is accomplished via the circuit made up of 107 1 7 and A1R3 The transmit output from the A D Microprocessor A3U5 54 drives the optocoupler LED A1U7 3 The current through the LED is limited by resistor A1R7 The photodiode in 107 responds to the light emitted by the LED when A1U7 3 is driven low The photodiode 107 responds to the light emitted by the LED when A3U5 54 is driven low The open collector output A1U7 6 is pulled high by A1R3 This output is connected to a serial port input on the Microprocessor 101 52 RS 232 Interface 2 40 The RS 232 interface is composed of connector A1J4 RS 232 Driver Receiver 1013 and the serial communication hardware in Microprocessor A1UI The serial communication transmit signal A1U1 54 goes to the RS 232 driver A1U13 14 where it is inverted and level shifted
288. r 1031 FET 19 and switches internal to the Stallion four wire measurements use separate source and sense signal paths to the point of the unknown resistance This technique eliminates lead wire resistance errors Figure 2 9 shows a simplified signal path for an RTD four wire measurement Table 2 9 Measurement Matrix for Ohms Current Full Scale Full Scale Gain of DC Full Scale DC Buffer Used Input to Output of Buffer Volts input to Range Stallion Stallion Amplifier Multislope A D Control dc volts dc volts Signal 300 Ohm 1mA 300 mV 300 mV 10 3V 3k Ohm 100 300 mV 300 mV 10 3V 30k Ohm 10 pA 300 mV 300 mV 10 3V 300k Ohm 10 uA 3V 3V 1 3V 3M Ohm 1 uA 3V 3V 1 3V S64 S44 HI 111 A3K1 21 sense Fusible 26 A3R130 to A D CHANNEL 1 HI Buffer A3R110 CHANNEL II A3K11 24 1K Fusible A3K27 O O O O O O 3KQ Range 3000 Range 30K amp 300K Range 3 Range A3U31 3 45 Ret 031 A3Q19 RESISTOR BEING MEASURED 27 54327 A3Z7 54327 100K 4M 10K 1K CHANNEL 1 LO CHANNEL II LO gt Figure 2 9 RTD Measurement Simplified Schematic 2 36 AC Volts Measurement Circuitry Theory of Operation Detailed Circuit Description 2 2 63 AC coupled voltage inputs are scaled by an ac buffer A3U29 converted to dc by a true rms ac to dc converter A3U26 filtered by an active ac volt filter then sent to the Stallion IC the Buffer Amplifier
289. r to the Microprocessor appears at A1U1 52 When there is no communication in progress between the Microprocessor and the A D Microprocessor both of these signals are high The Microprocessor uses another asynchronous communication channel to communicate to external computing or modem equipment through the RS 232 interface This interface is described in detail in the RS 232 Interface Theory of Operation in this chapter The third asynchronous communication channel in the Microprocessor is connected to the Debug Interface P3 This connector is not installed in production assemblies The interrupt controller in the Microprocessor prioritizes interrupts received from hardware devices both internal and external to the Microprocessor Table 2 1 lists interrupt sources from highest to lowest priority 2 15 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 2 1 Microprocessor Interrupt Sources Microprocessor Pin Signal Name Description A1U1 96 CINT Real Time Clock Interrupt 64 per second A1U1 121 XTINT External Trigger Interrupt 101 120 KINT Keyboard Interrupt interrupts on each debounced change of keyboard conditions n a n a A D Communication Interrupt internal to the microprocessor n a n a RS 232 Interface Interrupt internal to the microprocessor n a n a Timer Interrupt internal to the microprocessor n a n a Debug Serial Interface Interrupt internal to the microprocessor A1U1 119 EINT E
290. ration begins with a general overview of the instrument and progresses to a detailed description of the circuits of each pca The instrument 15 first described in general terms with a Functional Block Description Then each block is detailed further with Detailed Circuit Descriptions Refer to Chapter 7 of this manual for full schematic diagrams The Interconnection Diagram Figure 2 1 illustrates the physical connections between each pca In all discussions signal names followed by a character are active asserted low All other signals are active high Functional Block Description 2 2 Refer to Figure 2 2 Overall Functional Block Diagram during the following functional block descriptions Digital I O Alarm Trigger A2 Display J1 10BASE T A1 Main P2 10BASE2 AC Power Debug RS 232 Channels 11 20 TB1 J10 A4 Analog Input A D Converter TB2 J3 Channels 1 10 Program Power Figure 2 1 Interconnection Diagram 2 5 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 6 Terminal Strips Reference Junction A4 Analog Input Vacuum Fluorescent Display Input Multiplexing gt Input Protection 4 Input Signal Conditioning 4 Analog Measurement Processor A D Converter Microprocessor RAM and Flash A3 A D Converter Inguard Serial Outguard Communic
291. rd Crossing Vddr 5 6V dc Reg p Vcc 5 0V Figure 2 7 A3 A D Converter Block Diagram 2 32 Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Description Stallion Chip 2 56 The Stallion IC A3U30 is a Fluke designed 100 pin CMOS device that performs the following functions under control of the A D Microprocessor A3U5 e Input signal routing e Input signal conditioning e A D buffer amplifier range switching e Frequency measurements e Active filtering of ac voltage measurements The Stallion IC design is based on the Mercury A D Chip used in Fluke 45 and Hydra except it does not contain the A D conversion function that is now done using discrete components using a multi slope technique Two separate signal paths are used One path is for the functions dcv ohms temperature and other path is used for ac voltages frequency Input Protection 2 57 Input protection is provided by series hold off resistors A3R111 A3R110 A3R138 and A3R132 and related transistor switches used as clamp devices Excessive voltages develop a current through the resistors that is sensed by the corresponding transistor which turns on to provide a signal path to ground For example an excessive input on the LO SENSE line is sensed by A3R132 100 kQ 3w and clamped to ground by A3Q17 Input Signal Conditioning 2 58 Each analog input is conditioned and or scaled to a dc voltage 3 volts or less for input to the buffer amplifi
292. ready been processed on that line its response would be sent before the prompt If the input queue size is exceeded the instrument throws away all further input until it receives a terminator and generates a device dependent error None of the commands in the queue are executed The instrument returns the gt prompt when it encounters the input terminator If the instrument receives an input line before its last prompt has been read out of its output queue the instrument will generate an execution error return the gt error prompt instead of whatever prompt it had planned to return and ignore the second input line If an input line contains more than one query command the responses will be returned in one response line separated by semicolons When sending a response or prompt the instrument appends an output terminator which is the CR LF character The instrument output can be held off with XON XOFF The string formats and general syntax rules are the same as Hydra s The following settings are fixed eight data bits no parity no echo XON XOFF flow control no CTS flow control The user can set the baud rate to 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Using the RS 232 Interface Instrument Configuration 5 17 The FUNC command 5 used to select a measurement function range and number of terminals on channel one only When executing the RST or TST command or when exiting calibration mode t
293. red Chapter 4 Performance Testing and Calibration 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 Performance Test u l uu u a aene Configuring the Performance Test Setup Initializing the Performance Test Setup Accuracy Performance Tests Volts DC Accuracy Test 2640A Volts DC Accuracy Test 2645A Volts AG Accuracy Pest a cents tenerte ves gan Frequency Accuracy Analog Channel Integrity Test eene Computed Channel Integrity Test Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test Open Thermocouple Response Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2640A Two Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2645A Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 26404 Four Terminal Resistance Accuracy Test 2645 RTD Temperature Accuracy Test Resistance 2640A RTD Te
294. rement on channel one and returns the measured value This command is new to the instrument Parameters None Response measurement IEEE 488 2 NR3 ASCII representation of a floating point value leading sign 5 or 6 digits with embedded decimal point for 2645 and 2640A respectively padded with leading and trailing zeroes if necessary signed exponent of 3 0 3 6 For example 115 67 0 An overload condition is indicated by a value of 001 00E 9 or 001 00E 9 in the 2645A 001 000E 9 or 001 000E 9 for the 2640A Restrictions Not allowed in calibration mode If channel one is not configured this command generates an execution error and does not return a value Notes While processing this query the instrument does not return a response or a prompt until the measurement has been taken The instrument generates a device dependent error if the measurement does not arrive after 30 seconds Open thermocouples return 999 99 9 9 Troubleshooting the Instrument 5 19 The following paragraphs describe an organized method of instrument troubleshooting The overall approach is to start with power up self test error codes and then proceed to more and more detailed procedures Begin troubleshooting with General Troubleshooting These procedures locate about 90 of the instrument faults The remaining faults require sleuthing that is beyond the scope of this manual For these cases review
295. rence is less than 33 of full scale or greater than 100 of full scale Manual VAC Calibration Procedure 4 44 The VAC calibration procedure calculates gain and offset calibration constants for all of the VAC ranges Complete the following procedure to manually calibrate the VAC function l If you have not already done so complete the procedure Preparing for Calibration earlier in this chapter Connect the instrument and 5700A Calibrator as shown in Figure 4 7 Complete the sequence of manual steps shown in Table 4 6 Measurements are made on channel 1 for each VAC range one at 10 of full scale and one at 100 of full scale All AC voltages must be applied at 1 kHz The VAC gain and offset calibration constants for each range are determined from the two measurements Resolve any calibration problems based on the following An execution error gt is returned by the CAL STEP command if the full scale measurement is off by more than 1046 from the target or if the low scale measurement is off by more than 190 of full scale 10 from the target When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step device dependent error is returned by the CAL STEP command if an internal error such as a measurement timeout is detected When an error is detected the cal constant is not updated and the procedure remains at the same step An execution error gt is returned by the CAL RE
296. requency Accuracy Specifications Frequency Measurement Accuracy 1 Year 10 C to 60 C Range Resolution Accuracy 96 input Hz Slow Fast Slow Fast 15Hzto900Hz 0 01 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 05 0 02 Hz 0 05 0 2 Hz 900 Hz to 9 kHz 0 1 Hz 1 Hz 0 05 0 1 Hz 0 05 1 Hz 9 kHz to 90 kHz 1 Hz 10 Hz 0 05 1 Hz 0 05 10 Hz 90 kHz to 900 kHz 10 Hz 100 Hz 0 05 10 Hz 0 05 100 Hz 1 MHz 100 Hz 0 05 100 Hz 0 05 1 kHz 1 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 1 27 2640A Frequency Sensitivity Specifications 15 Hz to 70 kHz 70 kHz to 100 kHz 100 kHz to 200 kHz 200 kHz to 300 kHz 300 kHz to 1 MHz 100 mV ac rms 100 mV ac rms 150 mV ac rms 150 mV ac rms Linearly increasing from 150 mV ac rms at 300 kHz to 2 V ac rms at 1 MHz 1 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only 2645A Specifications Frequency Measurement Sensitivity Sinewave Frequency Range Minimum Signal Maximum Signal V lt 150 300Vrms 1 and Vx Hz lt 2x105 10V ac rms 7V ac rms Linearly decreasing from 7 V ac rms at 300 kHz to 2 V ac rms at 1 MHz 1 29 This section includes specifications specific to the 2645A instrument by measurement function 2645A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications 1 30 Tables 1 28 to 1 30 provide 26454 specifications for the dc voltage measurement function Table 1 28 2645A DC Voltage General Specifications Input Impedance Specification Characteristic 100 MQ in p
297. requency or VAC reading the hardware is configured to discharge certain signal conditioning capacitors charged during the measurement This is done to avoid disturbing the measurement of a subsequent VAC or frequency measurement The function relays are set to the VAC discharge position as given in Table 2 15 Function Relays and the DISCHARGE signal is set high After 6 ms the DISCHARGE signal is once again set low Autoranging 2 112 2 60 The configuration of each channel includes the state of autoranging for that channel either enabled or disabled When performing a measurement on a channel that has autoranging enabled the instrument first attempts a measurement on the range that was used on that channel for the previous scan If this results in an overrange or underrange the instrument up ranges or down ranges accordingly Channels that are configured with autorange enabled but have not yet been measured start on the highest legal range for the channel s function type Autoranging may decrease the measurement rate since readings on multiple ranges may be required for a single channel On the slow and medium rates only the first A D reading of a measurement is used to determine whether a range change is required Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description The actual points where a channel up ranges or down ranges varies depending on the outguard calibration constants This happens because the overrange underrange dete
298. rform acquisition scans and does not save measured data in the scan queue or last scan record The user can configure the function range and number of terminals for channel one only RS 232 can be used to get a measurement on channel one Other configuration elements cannot be set by the user through the RS 232 interface The computed channels are not accessible Alarms are not configurable through the RS 232 interface The instrument does not set master alarm output trigger out or DIO output in response to an RS 232 measurement query The user has no access to the totalizer value or the state of the DIO lines through the RS 232 interface When calibration is enabled the secondary display shows CAL The instrument does not output measurements to an RS 232 printer as Hydra did The REM annunciator will not be lit because the instrument does not provide commands like Databucket s REMS LOCS RWLS 5 9 NetDAQ Service Manual 5 10 Command Processing 5 16 The instrument RS 232 interface processes input and output in a manner similar to Hydra The instrument receives a command or query from the host The instrument returns a response to a valid query The instrument always returns a prompt after processing an input line the prompt follows the response in the case of a query An input line to the instrument consists of one or more semicolon separated commands followed by an input terminator The instrument will accept CR LF or LF as
299. ribed below Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Selecting the Diagnostic Tools Complete the following procedure to select the diagnostic tools 1 2 Power the instrument and allow it to complete the normal power on sequence Press and hold the key for 3 seconds until tool appears in the secondary display Use the up down arrow keys to sequence you through the three diagnostic selections e dio used to set any of the instrument rear panel 4107 to 4100 digital i o lines 145 used to display the various firmware versions active within the instrument e used to configure the reading rate and channel functions and ranges Select the desired diagnostic tool using the up down arrow keys then press the GD key Other diagnostic tools include the display test and COMM parameter reset Diagnostic Tool dio 5 10 The dio diagnostic tool allows you to change the status of any eight dio lines dio7 4100 located on the instrument rear panel DIGITAL I O connector Complete the following procedure to change the status of any dio line 1 Select the dio diagnostic tool using the procedure Selecting the Diagnostic Tool Menu 2 Use the left right arrows to select the desired dio line 4107 to dio0 The format is nnnn nnnn representing dio lines 4107 to dio0 respectively The secondary display shows the selected line for example dio 7 Use the up down arrow keys to select the desired dio line status
300. rical isolation between the Ethernet Chip A1U32 and the IOBASE 2 transceiver chip 1016 Data is transmitted from the Ethernet Chip A1U32 to the transceiver chip A1U16 through pins 1 2 15 and 16 of pulse transformer A1T3 Resistor AI R24 terminates the outputs from the Ethernet Chip A1U32 Data is received from the transceiver chip 1016 through pins 4 5 12 and 13 of pulse transformer A1T3 Resistors 1 42 1 65 and capacitor A1C33 provide a termination network for data received through the pulse transformer A1T4 The transceiver chip indicates a collision was detected on the Ethernet through pins 7 8 9 and 10 of pulse transformer A1T3 Resistors 1 85 A1R87 and capacitor A1C69 provide a termination network for the collision detected signal received through the pulse transformer 1 4 Digital Inputs and Outputs 2 42 The following paragraphs describe the digital input output as follows e Digital Input Threshold e Digital Input Buffers e Digital and Alarm Output Drivers Totalizer Input e External Trigger Circuits Digital Input Threshold 2 43 The Digital Input Threshold circuit sets input threshold level for the Digital Input Buffers and the Totalizer Input A fixed value voltage divider 1 36 A1R37 and a unity gain buffer amplifier 108 are the main components in this circuit The voltage from the divider approximately 1 4V dc is then buffered by A1US which sets the input thres
301. rload self test result pass or fail e Open Thermocouple self test result pass or fail e Checksum Return Main Firmware Version 2 82 2 46 This Command Packet requests version number of the inguard main firmware and always returns a single response packet Response Packet Format The response consists of five ASCII characters plus the checksum byte in the form txxyy where t is F for FFE 2645A software and P for the PFE 2640A xx are the two digits of the major version number and yy are the two digits of the minor version number there is an implicit decimal point between the two Note that constraining the bytes to be ASCII characters causes the most significant bit of each character to be a 0 making the response packet always distinguishable from a NAK Theory of Operation 2 A1 Main to A3 A D Converter Communications Return Boot Firmware Version 2 83 This Command Packet Format requests version number of the inguard boot firmware and always returns a single response packet Response Packet Format The response consists of five ASCII characters plus the checksum byte in the form Bxxyy where B indicates boot software xx are the two digits of the major version number and yy are the two digits of the minor version number there is an implicit decimal point between the two Note that constraining the bytes to be ASCII characters causes the most significant bit of each character to be a 0 making the response
302. rmination is made by the inguard which is comparing uncalibrated raw A D counts These points are selected so that some overlap exists between ranges to ensure a certain amount of hysteresis when changing ranges Also when autoranging on a given scan for a given channel the instrument only up ranges or down ranges not both This avoids infinite autoranging where a channel measurement could hypothetically take forever as the instrument up ranges and down ranges continuously on input Overload 2 113 A channel can be in either positive or negative overload depending on the polarity of the input signal Overload limits are similar to autorange limits in that their actual values can vary depending on the outguard calibration constants Housekeeping Readings 2 114 The following paragraphs describe the housekeeping functions which are called Drift Correction in the NetDAQ Logger for Windows software Reading Types 2 115 There are two types of housekeeping readings reference balance and zero offset readings There are two different reference balance readings and four different zero offset readings Reference Balance Readings 2 116 Reference balance readings are similar to VDC readings except that no channel selection is required and no function relay switching is required The A D itself however must be configured to operate in a different mode See Control Signals After the Stallion chip is configured to pr
303. rol menu box 4 9 NetDAQ Service Manual Volts AC Accuracy Test 4 8 Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the volts ac function for both the 2640A and 2645A Measurement accuracy applies to all channels not Just the channel used for the test 1 Configure Channel 1 for Volts NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for volts 300 mV range Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select channel 0101 instrument 01 channel 01 from the Channel list Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Configure the 5700A for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 1 Volts AC Range 5700A Output Minimum Reading Maximum Reading 300 mV 20mV 1 kHz _ 0 0197V 0 0203V 300 mv 20 mV 100kHZ 0 0185 0 0215V 300 mv 300 kHz 0 29885 0 30115V 300 mv 300 mV 100 kHz 0 2845V 0 3155V av 3V 1 kHz 2 9885 3 0115V 30v 30V 1 kHz 29 885V 30 115V 300V 26404 only 300V 1 kHz 298 85 301 15V 4 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Frequency Accuracy Test 4 9 Complete the following procedure to test the accuracy of the frequency function for the 2640A and 2645A Measurement accuracy applies to all chan
304. rt both sets of test leads Observe the measurement for the computed channel under test in the Spy window shows Overload for opened leads and very low resistance for shorted leads 6 Repeat Test Repeat steps 4 to 5 for channels 29 and 30 Thermocouple Temperature Accuracy Test 4 12 Ensure that the Accuracy Tests above have been completed before performing this test 1 Connect Thermocouple Remove the Universal Input Module from the instrument and connect the supplied type T thermocouple to the channel 1 terminals with the blue lead to the H terminal and red lead to the L terminal Reinstall the Universal Input Module Configure Channel 1 for Thermocouples NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for Thermocouples with Range thermocouple type T Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select analog channel 01 Click OK to open the Spy window Verify Accuracy Insert the thermocouple and a mercury thermometer in a room temperature bath Allow 20 minutes for thermal stabilization The value displayed on the mercury thermometer should equal the value in the Spy Window 0 5 C 2640A or 1 0 C 2645A plus any sensor inaccuracies Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner control menu box Open Thermocouple Response Test 4 13 This test checks the Open Thermocouple response 1 Connect an 820 Ohm Test Resistor Remove the Universal Input Module fr
305. ry 2 35 The Flash EPROM is an electrically erasable and programmable memory that provides storage of instructions for the Microprocessor and measurement calibration data switching power supply composed of 1012 A1L3 AICR16 A1C15 A1C86 and A1C97 generates a nominal 12 volt programming power supply Vpp when the Microprocessor drives VPPEN high A1U12 2 Resistor A1R119 pulls A1U12 2 to near ground during power up to ensure that A1U12 is not enabled while the Microprocessor is being reset When the power supply is not enabled the output voltage Vpp should be about 0 1 volt less than the input voltage of the power supply Vcc The only time that the programming power supply is active is when new firmware is being loaded or new calibration constants are being stored into the Flash EPROM The code executed immediately after power up is stored in an area of the Flash EPROM known as the Boot Block that is only erasable and reprogrammable if BBVPP A1U21 44 is at a nominal 12 volts This may be accomplished by installing jumper A1W2 but this should only be done by a trained technician and A1W2 should never be installed unless it is necessary to update the Boot firmware In normal operation resistor A1R124 and diode A1CR20 pull BB VPP up to about 0 25 volts less than The FLSH chip select 10 1 128 for this device goes low for any memory access to A1U21 The FLSH signal goes through jumper W3 which must alwa
306. s respectively Each change of state of the function relays requires two writes by the A3U5 A D microprocessor one to set the appropriate bits and energize the relays and another to reset all the bits and de energize the coils once the relays have switched after 6 ms Table 2 15 Function Relays gives the required relay states and bit patterns for the various measurement functions Note that after the indicated bit pattern is written and 6 ms have elapsed a pattern of 000000 should be written Also note that the two bits associated with any given relay corresponding to SET and 5 are never set to 1 at the same time Table 2 16 Function Relay Settling Time gives the required time for the relays to settle for a given function Table 2 15 Function Relays Function K26 K25 K27 FO F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 s R R o h lo la o Ohms S R S 0 1 1 0 0 1 VAC Frequency R s R 0 0 1 1 Table 2 16 Function Relay Settling Time 2640A 2645 lems 6 ms Stallion Chip and Signal Conditioning 2 95 The Stallion Chip A3U30 is a Fluke custom IC that contains assorted switches amplifiers and the frequency counter The chip contains registers that the A3U5 A D microprocessor may read and write to configure the chip and obtain frequency readings Its interface to the A3U5 A D microprocessor consists of a synchronous serial port The SCP port of the A3U5 A D microproces
307. s not need to be settled until the beginning of integrate At the end of Deintegrate if the Trigger signal is still asserted the A D immediately begins the Autozero period for the next reading Otherwise it enters the Untimed Autozero period which lasts until the Trigger signal is once again asserted To take higher resolution measurements the Trigger signal is left asserted until the required number of readings are obtained This is also done for VDC readings on the fast rate 2645A only Control Signals 2 98 Several signals are used by the A3U5 A D microprocessor to control and receive state information from the A D state machine A3U18 The Trigger line used to indicate to the A D when to begin a reading was discussed previously 2 54 Theory of Operation 2 Inguard Software Description The A D state machine has several modes of operation perform conversion measure input do a reference balance reading with both references on or do a reference balance reading with both references off These modes are selected by the A3U5 A D microprocessor through a two bit parallel port which consists of two data lines and a strobe line The codes for the commands are given in Table 2 19 A D Command Codes To send a command to the A D state machine the data lines are set to the values shown and then latched with a rising edge on the strobe line Table 2 19 A D Command Codes Command C1 Measure Signal 0 0 Reference Balance Readi
308. s occur if the analog input varies from what the instrument expects to see by more than 5 or 15 depending on the calibration step Before suspecting a fault with the instrument verify that the calibration is being conducted properly e Check the connections between the source and the instrument Are all the connections in place e Check the output of the calibration source Does it equal the value called for by this calibration step e Check the calibration source Is it in operate mode Has it reverted to standby If a calibration step has failed the instrument remains on that step so that the output from the calibration source may be corrected or the calibration reference value CAL REF being used by the instrument may be changed if it was improperly entered The calibration step may be repeated by sending the CAL STEP command to the instrument again Calibration of the instrument utilizes a simple calibration by function approach If you suspect calibration errors but the instrument does not exhibit the symptoms mentioned above verify that you are observing the following calibration rules e Independent calibration of any function results in the storage of calibration constants for that function only e Once calibration is begun all steps for that function must be completed before the calibration constants are stored If all steps are not completed and the procedure is terminated no constants for that function are s
309. s second Drift Correction enabled 400 readings second Drift Correction disabled 0 0496 0 6 G 0 03 C 0 2 C 6 ms 1 The 300V value is for channels 1 and 11 only the 150V value is for all other channels 2 Drift Correction refers to an automatic internal measurement step performed with each scan to correct for drift due to changes in ambient temperature and humidity Table 1 2 Summary of 2640A 2645A Measurement Capabilities Capability 2640A 2645A Volts DC Measurements Ranges 90 mV Ranges 90 mV 300 mV 300 mV 3V 3V 30V 30V 150 300V 1 50V Autorange Autorange Volts AC Measurements Ranges 300 mV Ranges 300 mV 3V 3V 30V 30V 150 300V 1 Autorange Autorange Resistance Measurements Ranges 300 Q Ranges 30 kQ 3 300 kQ 30 3 MQ 300 Autorange 3 MQ Autorange Introduction and Specification Table 1 2 Summary of 2640A 2645A Measurement Capabilities cont Capability 2640A 2645A Temperature Measurements Thermocouples Thermocouples Thermocouple 2 J RSE J RSE TB CN TB CN Temperature Measurements RTD RO 1010 1010 RTD Two wire Temperature Measurements RTD RO 10to 1010 RTD RO 10to 1010 RTD Four wire Frequency Measurements 3 Ranges Autorange Ranges Autorange Amperes DC Measurements 4 Ranges 4 to 20 Ranges 4 to 20 O to 100 mA 0 to 100 mA 1 300V range available only on
310. se done in response to a self test command from the outguard Power Up Self Tests 2 120 On power up the inguard performs a ROM checksum test and a destructive RAM test If either of these tests fail the inguard treats it as a fatal error and enters the boot monitor No explicit indication of either of these tests failing is given to the outguard Theory of Operation Inguard Software Description Self Test 2 121 The self test command from the outguard causes the following tests to be performed in the order given If the A D test fails the tests that require the A D zero offset test reference balance test ohms overload test are not done A D Test 2 122 This test simply triggers the A D and waits for either the A D interrupt or a timeout If the timeout occurs before receiving an A D interrupt the test fails and the A D is assumed to be non functional The timeout is set to 10 ms greater than either the 2640A or 2645A A D reading time Zero Offset Test 2 123 The zero offset test measures the four zero offsets and ascertains that they are within reasonable limits The test fails if any of the offsets measures greater than 2000 counts 2645A or 12000 counts 2640A This is approximately 0 175 volts A typical zero offset measurement is approximately 0 1 volts Reference Balance Test 2 124 The reference balance test measures the two reference balance values The individual counter values N counts and P cou
311. self test Neither pass nor fail was reported as if the A2 Display PCA is dead or missing Correction Check the ribbon cable connection between A1J2 and 271 or the power supply voltages to the A2 Display PCA Refer to paragraph A2 Display PCA Troubleshooting The A1U1 microprocessor could be damaged for the interface with the A2 Display PCA 6 Calibration A1 Main Background The A1U21 FLASH memory device is constants corrupt PCA divided into sections One of these sections is the memory for the calibration constants Although the calibration constants are used by the A D converter on the outguard A3 A D Converter PCA they are stored on the inguard A1 Main PCA because the Flash memory on the A3 A D Converter cannot be programmed while the instrument is operating i e programmed with calibration constants Failure For this error to occur the calibration constants stored in A1U21 have become corrupted One possibility is that you started a calibration routine and then didn t complete it When you start a calibration routine it sets a start flag when you complete a calibration routine it sets a finish flag If the software detects a start flag and no finish flat you will receive this error Correction If the only problem is calibration values complete the calibration procedures in Chapter 4 One other possibility is a A1U21 device failure 5 21 NetDAQ Service Manual Table 5 10 Relating Selftest Errors
312. shold Hysteresis Input Debouncing Maximum Transition Rate Characteristic None dc coupled 1 4V 500 mV None or 1 75 ms selectable 5 kHz Debounce disabled 500 Hz Debounce enabled Maximum Count 4 294 967 295 2640A 2645A Real Time Clock and Calendar 1 19 Table 1 12 provides a summary of the battery powered real time clock and calendar Table 1 12 2640A 2645A Real Time Clock and Calendar Specification Characteristic Accuracy 1 month for 0 to 50 range Battery Life gt 15 unpowered instrument years for 0 C to 28 C 32 F to 82 4 F gt 6 unpowered instrument years for 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F gt 4 unpowered instrument years for 50 C to 70 C 122 F to 158 F Introduction and Specification 1 Specifications 2640A Specifications 1 20 This section includes specifications specific to the 2640A instrument by measurement function 2640A DC Voltage Measurement Specifications 1 21 Tables 1 13 to 1 15 provide 26404 specifications for the dc voltage measurement function Table 1 13 2640A DC Voltage General Specifications Specification Characteristic Input Impedance 100 in parallel with 300 pF maximum for ranges 3V 10 MQ in parallel with 100 pF maximum for ranges gt 3V Normal Mode Rejection 50 dB minimum at 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 Slow Rate Common Mode Rejection 120 dB minimum at dc 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 196 1
313. sor is used to program the Stallion with a clock rate of 3 072 MHz When reading information from the Stallion the only time this needs to be done is for frequency readings the clock rate is reduced to 960 kHz Due to a limitation of the Stallion chip the fastest that data may be reliably read from the chip is 1 MHz The Stallion switch settings for the various function range combinations are given in Table 2 17 Stallion Switch Settings NetDAQ Service Manual Table 2 17 Stallion Switch Settings Function Stallion Settings S Switches Other Switches VDC 90 17 23 35 37 39 44 50 64 BR1 ACR4 RPCTL VDC 300 mV 17 23 35 37 39 44 50 64 4 FPWR RPCTL 23 BR2 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL BR4 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL 44 50 64 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL VDC HIV 1 3 13 17 24 33 37 39 44 50 64 BR4 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL 44 ACR1 FPWR RPCTL VDC 750 mV 17 23 35 37 39 44 50 64 VDC 3V 17 23 35 37 39 44 50 64 VDC 30V 17 24 33 irr 300 mV 1 17 18 34 37 39 41 44 dc 17 18 37 39 41 44 ACR2 FPWR RPCTL 17 18 24 37 39 41 44 FPWR RPCTL vacHV 1 17 18 34 37 39 41 44 ACR4 FPWR RPCTL l2w3002 15 19 23 35 37 39 44 64
314. splay PCA provides space for securing screws which are used only if one or more tabs are broken If the pca uses one or more securing screws install these as well N CAUTION Avoid using ammonia or methyl alcohol cleaning agents on either the Front Panel or the display window These types of cleaners can damage surface features and markings Use an isopropyl based cleaning agent or water to clean the Front Panel and the display window Installing the Front Panel Assembly 3 32 Complete the following procedure to install the Front Panel Assembly D 1 Gently connect the display ribbon cable E to the connector on A2 Display PCA 2 Position the Front Panel Assembly on the chassis mounting post hardware 3 Complete the procedure Installing the Instrument Case as required Installing the Instrument Case 3 33 Complete the following procedure to install the instrument case Refer to Figure 3 2 N WARNING Do not operate the instrument without the cover properly installed Reinstall the case to its original position the rubber feet are towards the front of the instrument Reinstall the rear panel bezel rubber feet towards the bottom Z and attach it with the two 1 2 inch 6 32 Phillips head screws C Invert the instrument on the protective surface and reinstall the four 1 4 inch 6 32 screws B on the bottom securing the case Reinstall the measurement connection cables and power cord as requi
315. strument will appear completely dead Check all the jumper positions as shown in Table 5 12 Table 5 12 A1 Main PCA Jumper Positions Jumper If Missing If in Place W1 A1U1 109 enable PB1 disable A1U1 109 disable PB1 enable 1 IACK6 We A1U21 programming power via A1U21 programming power via Vpp Vcc W3 Flash disabled dead Instrument Flash enabled W4 Boot Baud rate 19 2k Boot Baud rate 38 4k W5 A1U1 108 enable PBO disable A1U1 108 disable PBO enable 1 7 IACK7 Normal jumper position is shown in bold 5 27 NetDAQ Service Manual Check that no programming power is applied to A1U21 1 Flash Memory 12 dc Programming power is applied only when storing for example calibration constants During normal operation A1U21 1 should not be powered If power is being applied to A1U21 1 during normal operation check to make sure jumper A1W2 is not in place see Table 5 12 and probe A1UI2 to find the cause for the presence of Vpp Check A1U29 I O and Memory Decoder If this device is not responding correctly a whole host of address problems will occur including RAM and Flash write and read strobes A failure of this device would result in several error code reports Troubleshooting the RS 232 Interface 5 23 If the instrument RS 232 port does not seem to operate be sure you have selected the correct RS 232 baud rate for the interface with a terminal or PC running terminal emulation so
316. surface and remove the four 1 4 inch 6 32 Phillips head screws B on the bottom of the case 3 Turn the instrument upright and remove the two 1 2 inch 6 32 Phillips head screws C from the rear panel bezel Z 4 Remove the rear panel bezel and case assembly Do not touch any internal parts of the instrument Removing the Front Panel Assembly 3 12 Complete the following procedure to remove the Front Panel Assembly D 1 Complete the procedure Removing the Instrument Case to gain access to the instrument assemblies Verify the instrument is not powered from any ac or dc source 2 Using a needle nose pliers or nonmetallic prying device gently disconnect the display ribbon cable E from the J1 connector on A2 Display PCA 3 Grasp the Front Panel Assembly and gently push one end free of the mounting post hardware then remove the assembly 3 7 NetDAQ Service Manual 4 o Gu Places 8 L4 e A D Converter PCA A2 Display PCA 2 Places 3 8 Figure 3 2 2640 2645 Overall Assembly Details Sheet 1 3 General Maintenance Disassembly Procedures A1 MAIN PCA Figure 3 2 2640A and 2645A Overall Assembly Details Sheet 2 of 3 3 3 9 NetDAQ Service Manual A3 A D CONVERTER PCA e
317. t There are four zero offsets one for each DC buffer amplifier gain setting BR1 BR2 BR3 or BR4 The gain setting used for a particular function and range can be determined from the Stallion switch settings Table 2 17 Stallion Switch Settings The final formula is therefore 16PtotS NtoOK Z where Ptot 2 P counts total Ntot 2 N counts total 7 zero offset Zero offsets are also covered in Zero Offset Readings later in this chapter DISCHARGE Signal 2 101 The signal DISCHARGE is driven by the A3U5 A D microprocessor pin 59 through one of its parallel port pins and controls the discharge of certain filter capacitors This line is normally left low It is driven high during the VAC discharge mode See V AC Discharge Mode later in this chapter for more information Open Thermocouple Detector 2 102 To check for an open thermocouple input the appropriate channel is selected with the function relays also set to the appropriate position and the OTC circuitry is enabled This is done by setting OTC bit high and turning on CLK signal with a frequency of 19 2 kHz OTC_CLK is supplied by the A3U5 A D microprocessor in the form of the SCC3 baud rate generator BRG3 pin After 1 7 ms the OTC bit is read to determine the status of the channel A 1 represents an open thermocouple After the reading signal is turned off by setting it high Then the EN bit is set low
318. t be at Vload 30 0V dc Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument 8 Ifasegment under each of several or all grids fails to be turned on or off properly one of the anode drive signals may not be connected properly from A2U1 to A2DSI When an anode signal is at Vcc and a grid signal is at Vcc the corresponding segment on the display is illuminated 9 Ifthe Microprocessor has difficulty recognizing front panel button presses the switch scanning signals SWR1 through SWR6 should be checked When no switch contacts are being closed the switch scanning lines should have about 20 kO of resistance between each other through two 10 pull up resistors to Vcc Unless one of the switches is closed none of the switch scanning lines should be shorted directly to GND at any time Variations in the Display 5 29 Under normal operation the display presents various combinations of brightly and dimly lit annunciators and digits However you may encounter other random irregularities across different areas of the display under the following circumstances e After prolonged periods of displaying the same information e If the display has not been used for a prolonged period This phenomenon can be cleared by activating the entire display and leaving it on overnight or at least for several hours Use the following procedure to keep the display fully lit 1 With power OFF press and hold the left arrow key
319. tainers Static shielding bags and containers protect components and assemblies from direct static discharge and external static fields Store components in their original packages until they are ready for use Servicing Surface Mount Assemblies 3 7 NetDAQ incorporates Surface Mount Technology SMT for printed circuit assemblies pca s Surface mount components are much smaller than their predecessors with leads soldered directly to the surface of a circuit board no plated through holes are used Unique servicing troubleshooting and repair techniques are required to support this technology Refer to Chapter 5 for additional information Also refer to the Fluke Surface Mount Device Soldering Kit for a complete discussion of these techniques in the USA call 1 800 526 4731 to order this kit Cleaning 3 8 8 4 N WARNING To avoid electrical shock or damage to the instrument never allow water inside the case To avoid damaging the instrument s housing never apply solvents to the instrument If the instrument requires cleaning wipe it down with a cloth that is lightly dampened with water or a mild detergent Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons chlorinated solvents or methanol based fluids when wiping the instrument Dry the instrument thoroughly after cleaning General Maintenance 3 Line Fuse Replacing the Line Fuse 3 9 The line fuse 15 100 ampere 250V time delay PN 944629 is in series with the power supply and lo
320. tant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 300 000E 3 5700A Source 300 mV dc CAL_STEP 300 000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 750 000E 3 5700A Source 750 mV dc CAL_STEP 750 000E 3 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 3 00000E 0 5700A Source 3V dc CAL_STEP 3 00000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 30 0000E 0 5700A Source 30V dc CAL_STEP 30 0000E 0 NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns the calibrated reading Allow several seconds CAL_REF 300 000E 0 2640A 57004 Source 300V dc 26404 50 0000E 0 2645A 5700A Source 50V dc 2645A 300 000E 0 2640A NetDAQ computes the calibration constant and returns CAL_STEP 50 0000E 0 2645A the calibrated reading Allow several seconds 4 Calibration Table 4 4 Manual Calibration Command Responses Response Description gt indicates the command was executed correctly l gt indicates that a device dependent error was generated and the calibration step could not be executed Verify that the input to NetDAQ channel 1 is the correct value and polarity is _connected correctly and the 5700A is in the Operate mode gt in
321. terminal on channels 2 through 10 and 12 through 20 to earth 300V ac rms from any terminal on channels 1 and 11 to any other terminal 150V ac rms from any terminal on channels 2 through 10 and 12 through 20 to any other input terminal 2x10 Volt Hertz product on any range normal mode input 1x10 Volt Hertz product any range common mode input Linear interpolation between 2 applicable points for temperatures between 28 C and 60 C or 10 C and 18 C e g if the applicable specification at 28 C is 2 and the specification at 60 C is 3 then the specification at 40 C is 3 2 40 28 60 28 2 2 375 The presence of a dc voltage will cause an indeterminate error in the reading of the ac voltage on the input Introduction and Specification Specifications Table 1 17 2640A AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications Table 1 18 2640A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications Range Frequency 18 C to 28 C 1 Year Accuracy input V 1 ui Range Resolution Minimum Input for Slow Fast Rate Accuracy Full Scale 30 000 3 000 300 10 wv 100 uV 20 mV 3V 100 uV 1 mV 200 30V 1 mv 10 mv 2 150 300 10 100 20V Note 300V range applies to channels 1 and 11 only 10 C to 60 C Fast 20 kHz to 50 kHz 196 30 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz V 20V 2964 50 mV 1 596460 mV 1 30 mV 396100 mV 2 5
322. terpolation between 2 applicable points for temperatures between 28 C and 60 C or 10 C and 18 C e g if the applicable specification at 28 C is 2 and the specification at 60 C is 3 then the specification at 40 C is 3 2 x 40 28 60 28 2 2 375 DC Component Error The presence of a dc voltage will cause an indeterminate error in the reading of the ac voltage on the input 1 1 21 NetDAQ Service Manual 1 22 Table 1 32 2645 AC Voltage Range and Resolution Specifications 1 Sinewave inputs gt 6 of scale and signals with crest factors lt 2 Range Resolution Minimum Input for Slow Fast Rate Accuracy Full Scale 30 000 3 000 300 mv 40 wv 100 uV 20 mV 3V 100 uV 1 mV 200 mV 30v 1mv 10 mv Table 1 33 2645A AC Voltage Accuracy Specifications 1 Year Accuracy input V 1 Range Frequency 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C Slow Fast Slow Fast 300 mV 20 to 50 Hz 3955 25 6 5mV 3 5 25 7 5 mV 50 to 150 Hz 0 4 25 0 8 5 mV 0 5 25 1 5 mV 150 Hz to 10 kHz 0 3 25 mV 0 8 5 mV 0 4 25 mV 1964 5 mV 10 kHz to 20 kHz 0 4 25 mV 1 5 mV 0 7 25 mV 1 5 5 mV 20 2 to 50 2 2 3 3 5 mV 3964 3 mV 4964 5 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz 5 5 mV 5 1 mV 7964 5 mV 896 1 mV 3V 20 to 50 Hz 3 2 5 mV 6 5 mV 3 5 2 5 mV 7 5 mV 50 t
323. that secure the transformer wire cover plate W and side the plate free from the chassis and remove 6 Remove the four nuts X that secure the transformer to the chassis mounting plate Assembly Procedures 3 22 The following paragraphs describe assembly of the instrument in sequence from the fully unassembled instrument Start and end your disassembly at the appropriate heading levels For assembly procedures refer to Figure 3 2 as required NOTE In the assembly procedures parts referenced by a letter in brackets e g A are shown in Figure 3 2 Installing Miscellaneous Chassis Components 3 23 Complete the following procedure to install miscellaneous chassis components including the power switch input connector fuseholder and power transformer Refer to Figure 3 2 and 3 3 as required Installing the Power Transformer 3 24 Complete the following procedure to install the power transformer U 1 2 Install the four nuts X that secure the transformer to the chassis mounting plate Route the twisted white and brown wires to the fuseholder area then install the two screws V that secure the transformer wire cover plate W 3 13 NetDAQ Service Manual 3 Reconnect the transformer connection at J3 K on the Al Main PCA I Top of Switch Red to A1 Main Red to A1 Main PCA 15 15 White to transformer J Ls Black to fuseholder Green to chassis
324. the Microprocessor to read five registers and write to three registers implemented in the FPGA logic The absolute addresses are listed in Table 2 3 Keyboard Scanner The Keyboard Scanner sequences through the array of switches on the Display Assembly to detect and debounce switch closures After a switch closure is detected it must remain closed for at least 16 milliseconds before the Microprocessor is interrupted and the Keyboard Input register is read from the FPGA When the keyboard interrupt KINT A1U31 62 goes low the Keyboard Scanner stops scanning until the Microprocessor reads the Keyboard Input register which automatically clears the interrupt by driving KINT high again The FPGA interrupts the Microprocessor again when the switch on the Display Assembly is detected as open again Actually the Microprocessor is interrupted once for each debounced change in the contents of the Keyboard Input register See also the information on Front Panel Switches in the Display PCA section for this instrument The Microprocessor can enable or disable the Keyboard Scanner by changing the state of a bit in the Control Status register that is in the FPGA The Keyboard Scanner is disabled if the instrument is in either the RWLS or LWLS state see Users Manual RWLS and LWLS Computer Interface Commands Digital I O Buffers and Latches The FPGA logic implements internal registers for the eight Digital Outputs DO 0 through DO lt 7 gt Master Al
325. thernet Interface n a n a Timer Interrupt internal to the microprocessor n a n a Display Serial Interface Interrupt internal to the microprocessor n a n a Watchdog Timer internal to the microprocessor A1U1 118 DISRX Display Interrupt A1U1 97 TOTINT Totalizer Interrupt interrupts on totalizer overflow from a count of 4 294 967 295 to 0 The Microprocessor also has several internal DMA Direct Memory Access controllers that are used by the serial communication channels Each serial communication channel has a DMA channel that handles character reception and another that handles character transmission The use of these DMA controllers is transparent to the external operation of the Microprocessor but it is important to understand that communication is handled at hardware speeds without the need for an interrupt for each character being transferred A watchdog timer internal to the Microprocessor is programmed to have a 10 second timeout interval If the code executed by the Microprocessor fails to reinitialize the watchdog timer every 10 seconds or less then 101 117 POR is driven low for 16 cycles of SCLK approximately 1 microsecond This results in a complete hardware reset of the instrument which restarts operation Address Decoding 2 16 2 34 The four chip select outputs on the Microprocessor are individual software programmed elements that allow the Microprocessor to select the base address the size
326. ting and Troubleshooting Loading Embedded Instrument Firmware Table 5 16 Files on the Firmware Diskette File 1 PC COM Port Instrument load451 bat 1 2640A 2645A 2640A 2645A load452 bat COM2 Description Loads Main Firmware via COM1 Loads Main Firmware via COM2 ad1d401 bat 1 2640 adld402 bat 2640A COM2 Loads 2640A A D Firmware via COM1 Loads 2640 A D Firmware via COM2 ad1d451 bat 2645A 2645A ad1d452 bat Loads 2645A A D Firmware via COM1 Loads 2645 A D Firmware via COM2 readme txt fa0102 hex typical mm0104 bin typical File Switch ld26xx exe Loading instructions and hints Typical A D Firmware file loaded by ld26xx exe Typical Main Firmware file loaded by ld26xx exe Switch Description Executable file that loads the firmware into the instrument B Cn Fname H Mn Switch to run the program in the Batch mode If you include this switch you must include both the Cn and Fname switches Switch sets the PC COM port number where C1 is COM1 and C2 is COM2 Switch specifies the firmware file to load where name is the file name Switch to disable the CTS RTS handshake required to load the A D Firmware Switch to force detection of a particular model instrument where M2 is for the 2640A 2645A instruments Rn Switch for baud rate where R1 is 19200 and R2 38400 Lo
327. tion Real Time Clock 2 37 The Real Time Clock maintains time and calendar date information for use by the instrument A nonvolatile power supply Vbb biases A1U11 The Microprocessor Supervisor A1U10 monitors the voltage on Vcc A1U10 2 If is greater than the voltage of the lithium battery 1010 8 1010 switches Vcc from A1U10 2 to AIU10 1 Vbb If drops below the voltage of the lithium battery A1U10 8 1010 switches voltage from lithium battery through current limiting resistor 1 84 to A1U10 1 The nominal current required from the lithium battery A1BT1 at room temperature with the instrument powered down is approximately 2 microamperes This can be easily measured by checking the voltage across A1R98 Memory accesses to the Real Time Clock A1U11 are enabled by the RTC address decode output A1U29 16 This signal must go through a NAND gate in A1U36 to the Real Time Clock chip select input A1U11 18 This ensures that when the instrument is powered down and 1010 7 is driven low A1U11 18 is driven high so that the contents of the Real Time Clock cannot be changed and the power dissipated by the Real Time Clock is minimized A1U11 is connected to the high 8 bits of the data bus so read accesses are enabled by the Read Lower RD1 A1U11 19 signal going low and write accesses are enabled by the Write Upper WRU A1U11 20 signal going low When the instrument is powered up the accuracy
328. tion 1 1 All segments OFF 1 0 All segments ON default 0 1 Display Test Pattern 1 0 0 Display Test Pattern 2 Figures 5 1 and 5 2 show Display Test Patterns 1 and 2 respectively Refer to the Display Assembly schematic diagram in Chapter 7 for grid anode assignments REVIEW REM SCAN SET FUNC hi lt Z M A Ji ET M f EXT TR Figure 5 1 Display Test Pattern 1 5 29 NetDAQ Service Manual MAX F T LAST MIN AUTO MON ALARM TE EE L I _ LIMIT HI OFF PRN CH gioca 5 30 Figure 5 2 Display Test Pattern 2 When the instrument display 5 initially powered up all display segments should come on automatically If this display does not appear proceed with the following steps NOTE If the display is operational but has problems when front panel buttons are pressed proceed directly to step 9 1 Check the three power supplies with respect to GND on the Display Assembly Vcc A2U1 21 44 9V dc Vee A2UI 4 5 0V dc Vload A2U1 5 30 0V dc 2 Check the filament drive signals FIL1 and FIL2 these connect to the last two pins on each end of A2DS1 These signals should be 5 4V ac with FIL2 biased to be about 6 8V dc higher than the Vload supply nominally a 23 2V dc level FIL1 and FIL2 should be 180 degrees out of phase If the dc bias of FIL2 is not at about 23 2V dc the display segments that s
329. to A2TP6 Vcc The default conditions of DTEST and LTE cause the Display Controller to turn all segments on bright at power up 2 29 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 30 Table 2 6 defines the logic and the selection process for the four display initialization modes Table 2 6 Display Initialization Modes A2TP4 A2TP5 Power Up DTEST LTE Display Initialization 1 1 All Segments OFF 1 0 All Segments default 0 1 Display Test Pattern 1 0 0 Display Test Pattern 2 The two display test patterns are a mixture of on and off segments forming a recognizable pattern that allows for simple testing of display operation Test patterns 1 and 2 are shown in Chapter 5 of this manual The Display Controller provides 11 grid control outputs and 15 anode control outputs only 14 anode control outputs are used Each of these 26 high voltage outputs provides an active driver to the 5V dc supply and a passive 220 k Q nominal pull down to the 30V dc supply These pull down resistances are internal to the Display Controller The Display Controller provides multiplexed drive to the vacuum fluorescent display by strobing each grid while the segment data for that display area is present on the anode outputs Each grid is strobed for approximately 1 14 milliseconds every 13 8 milliseconds resulting in each grid on the display being strobed about 72 times per second The grid strobing sequence is from GRID 10 to GRID
330. to remove the Al Main PCA I from the chassis 1 Complete the procedure Removing the Instrument Case to gain access to the instrument assemblies Verify the instrument is not powered from ac or dc source Using a needle nose pliers or nonmetallic prying device gently disconnect the display ribbon cable E from the connector A1J2 Disconnect the pendant A D ribbon cable J at the A3 A D Converter PCA connector A3J10 and gently pull the cable and connector through the chassis opening Disconnect the transformer cable at A1J3 K Using a needle nose pliers or nonmetallic prying device remove the two terminals with red wires from the instrument power switch L and gently pull the wires and terminals through the pca opening At the power switch you may find it necessary to remove the power input terminals to gain access to the red wires Note the color and routing of the power input terminals for the reconnection procedure Remove the two screws M that secure the pca to the chassis Remove the RS 232 connector hardware N using a 3 16 inch nut driver Slide the pca towards the front of the instrument so that the pca edge indentations match the guide tabs on each side of the chassis tilt slightly upwards and remove NetDAQ Service Manual Removing the A2 Display PCA 3 15 To remove the A2 Display PCA F see the procedure Disassembling the Front Panel Assembly Removing the A3 A D Converter PCA 3 16 C
331. to remove the power switch input connector L 1 Complete the procedure Removing the Instrument Case to gain access to the instrument assemblies Verify the instrument is not powered from ac or dc source Disconnect all five terminals Q from the power switch input connector Compress the tab at one side of the power switch input connector and partially remove the switch from the chassis Repeat for the other tab and remove the switch from the chassis General Maintenance 3 Assembly Procedures Removing the Fuseholder 3 20 Complete the following procedure to remove the fuseholder R 1 Complete the procedure Removing the Instrument Case to gain access to the instrument assemblies Verify the instrument is not ac or dc powered 2 Remove the fuse from the fuseholder Disconnect the two terminals S from the fuseholder 4 Remove the single screw T securing the fuseholder Removing the Power Transformer 3 21 Complete the following procedure to remove the power transformer U 1 Remove the A3 A D Converter PCA See the procedure Removing the A3 A D Converter PCA 2 Disconnect the white wire blue wire on early production units that leads to the transformer at the input connector 3 Disconnect the black wire brown wire on early production units that leads to the transformer at the fuseholder 4 Disconnect the transformer connection at A1J3 K on the Al Main PCA Remove the two screws V
332. tored only calibration constants for previously completed functions are stored Retrieving Calibration Constants 5 37 If a calibration error is suspected the stored constant can be retrieved and verified over the computer interface Acceptable calibration constants for each function and range are listed in Table Error Reference source not found The equations below specify how to calculate the VDC VAC and Resistance gain and offset calibration constants Gain highTarget lowTarget highMeas lowMeas Offset lowMeas Gain lowTarget Where highTarget high scale target value lowTarget low scale or zero target value highMeas high scale measured value lowMeas low scale or zero measured value Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Calibration Failures Table 5 15 Calibration Constants CAL Constant N Function Function Range Comment Minimum Maximum umber Allowable allowable Value Value 0 voc 90 mv Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 2 voc 90 mv Offset 0 00090E 0 0 00090E 0 4 VDC 300 mV Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 l6 VDC 300 mV Offset 0 00300 0 0 00300E 0 8 VDC 3V Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 10 VDC av Offset _ 0 08000E 0 0 03000E 0 12 VDC 30V Gain 0 95000E 0 1 05000E 0 14 voc Offset 0 30000E 0 0 30000E 0 16 VDC 50V 2645A Gain 0 95000 0 1
333. ts towards a failure in the A D converter circuitry in particular dc power supply voltages that are incorrect If only certain functions or ranges are out of tolerance then the problem may be in the treeing and channel select relays or signal conditioning circuitry or A3U30 Stallion device and related circuit elements When you have identified the functions and ranges that are not correct note the signal paths on the schematic and look for a common element 5 32 Diagnostic Testing and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Instrument For dc volt problems that affect all channels look for faults in the dc buffer and Stallion device For dc volt problems on individual channels or groups of channels check the channel select 2640A only and treeing relays For resistance problems check the dc volts characteristics first If there are no problems then the difficulty is not in the dc buffer circuitry This would suggest a problem in the ohms conditioning circuit or the A3U30 Stallion device For ac volt problems check the dc volts characteristics first If there are no problems then the difficulty is probably in the ac to dc conversion circuitry Troubleshooting Relay Problems 5 34 Both the 2640A and 2645 use mechanical reed relays for signal switching although the 2645A uses solid state relays for channel selection The mechanical relays have a life of 100 000 000 operations If you use your instrument in long duration high speed m
334. two very precise voltages for operation 3 45V dc and 3 45V dc These voltages are applied to resistor network A3Z1 1 and A3Z1 8 with a balanced output at A3Z1 2 When the two reference voltages are exact the A3Z1 2 output is nearly zero Failure This error occurs when the output of the balance reference check at A3Z1 2 is not nearly zero Correction Troubleshoot the reference voltage circuitry at A3U12 and A3U20 and related components During proper operation A1U12 6 is within a few microvolts of ground potential Check the inputs and outputs of A3U12 and A3U20 and look for an incorrect output indicating a device failure Background This self test is created by configuring for an ohms measurement with treeing relays pulled in but no channel relays are set This creates an overload measurement as the A D converter tried to measure the resistance of an open circuit Failure The error occurs when the A D converter did not detect an overload condition for measuring an open circuit Correction There is a problem in the ohms conditioning circuitry or possibly a problem in the A3U30 Stallion device The dc buffer might also be affected Normally this error occurs in conjunction with other errors If there are not other errors then the signal conditioning circuitry is more likely at fault Also check the ohms current source at A3U31 and related components When the precision 1 mA current sink is operating correctly the voltage acr
335. ure to test the accuracy of the volts dc function for the 2645A Measurement accuracy applies to all channels not just the channel used for the test Performance Testing and Calibration Performance Test 4 7 1 Configure Channel 1 for Volts DC In NetDAQ Logger for Windows configure channel 1 for volts dc 90 mV range 2 Open Spy Window Select the Spy command from the Utilities menu Select channel 0101 instrument 01 channel 01 from the Channel list Click OK to open the Spy window 3 Verify Accuracy Configure the 5700A for the output values below and verify the Spy window measurement is between the minimum and maximum values Change the channel 1 range as required see Step 1 Volts DC Range 5700A Output 90 mV Short Circuit Zero Minimum Reading Maximum Reading 0 000023V 0 000023V 90 mV 90 mV 90 mV 90 mV 0 089965V 0 090035V 0 090035V 0 089965V 300 mV Short Circuit Zero 0 00005V 0 00005V 300 mV 300 mV 0 29991V 0 30009V 300 mV 300 mV 0 30009V 0 29991V 3V Short Circuit Zero 0 0004V 0 0004V 3V 3V 2 9992V 3 0008V 3V 3V 3 0008V 2 9992V 30V Short Circuit Zero 0 005V 0 005V 30V 30V 29 991V 30 009V 30V 30V 30 009V 29 991V 50V Short Circuit Zero 0 04V 0 04V 50V 50V 49 95V 50 05V 50V 50V 50 05V 49 95V 4 Close Spy Window To close the Spy window double click the upper left hand corner cont
336. usy loading that configuration byte The Microprocessor then waits until XRDY goes high again before loading the next configuration byte and the sequence is repeated until the last byte is loaded While the configuration data is being loaded the FPGA drives the XD P signal A1U31 80 low When the FPGA has been completely configured the XD P signal is released and pulled high by resistor A1R64 The Microprocessor repeats the configuration sequence if XD P A1U31 80 does not go high when it is expected to 2 19 NetDAQ Service Manual 2 20 The FPGA contains the following eight functional elements after the Microprocessor has loaded the configuration into the FPGA e Clock Dividers e Internal Register Address Decoding e Keyboard Scanner e Digital I O Buffers e Latches e Totalizer Debouncing and Mode Selection e Totalizer Counter e External Trigger Logic Clock Dividers The 15 36 MHz system clock A1U31 30 is divided down by the Clock Dividers to create the 1 024 MHz Display Clock DCLK A1U31 19 The Display Clock is not a square wave it is low for 2 3 of a cycle and high for the other 1 3 The Display Clock is also used internal to the FPGA to create the 128 kHz Totalizer Debouncer Clock and the 4 kHz Keyboard Scanner Clock Internal Register Address Decoding The FPGA logic decodes four bits of the address bus A 3 through A 6 the PGA chip select signal A1U31 88 RD2 A1U31 95 and WRL A1U31 5 to allow
337. vicing Surface Mount Assemblies 3 8 aa tto esee pe 3 0 Replacing the Line 0 3 10 Disassembly 5 3 11 Removing the Instrument Case 3 12 Removing the Front Panel Assembly eee 3 13 Disassembling the Front Panel Assembly 3 14 Removing the 1 Main PCA 3 15 Removing the A2 Display PCA 3 16 Removing the A D Converter 3 17 Removing the A4 Analog Input PCA iii NetDAQ Service Manual 3 18 Removing Miscellaneous Chassis Components 3 19 Removing the Power Switch Input Connector 3 20 Removing the Fuseholder 3 21 Removing the Power 3 22 Assembly Procedures eite 3 23 Installing Miscellaneous Chassis Components 3 24 Installing the Power Transformer 3 25 Installing the Fuseholder seen 3 26 Installing t
338. waits after a power up approximately 3 5 seconds Theory of Operation 2 A1 Main to A3 A D Converter Communications Commands 2 79 A command consists of a six byte packet sent from the outguard to the inguard The most significant four bits of the first bytes define the following command types e Perform Scan e Perform a Self Test Return A D Main Firmware Version Return A D Boot Firmware Version e Set Global Configuration e Set Channel Configuration Do Houskeeping The sixth byte is a checksum The meanings of the remainder of the bits in the command packet vary depending on the command type The response to all commands is one or more six byte response packets The sixth byte in a packet is always the checksum byte the meaning of the remainder of the bits depends on the command The only restriction is that a response packet should always be distinguishable from a NAK i e it should never have all bits 1 Perform Scan 2 80 The Perform Command Packet tells the A D Converter Assembly to do the following e Measure Channel Number if set e Return BR1 Zero Offset if set e Return BR2 Zero Offset if set e Return BR3 Zero Offset if set e Return Zero Offset if set e Return Reference Junction Reading if set e Return Reference Balance both references off reading if set e Return Reference Balance both references on reading if set e Return Checksum Action Performed The Perform Scan comman
339. was disabled If the instrument was not fully warmed up at the time of drift correction was disabled add an error equal to the 90 day specification for instrument warmup 1 10 of the 90 day specification per C change in ambient temperature from the temperature when drift correction was disabled 1 NetDAQ Service Manual 2640A 2645A Environmental Specifications 1 12 Table 1 6 provides a summary of the environmental specifications for the 2640A 2645A Table 1 6 Environmental Specifications Specification Characteristic Warmup Time 1 hour to rated specifications or 15 minutes if relative humidity noncondensing is 5095 or less Operating Temperature 10 C to 60 C 14 F to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158F Relative Humidity 90 maximum for 10 C to 28 C 14 F to 82 4 F 75 maximum for 28 C to 35 C 82 4 F to 95 F 50 maximum for 35 C to 60 C 95 F to 140 F 3 MQ range reduce humidity rating by 25 for 1 hour warmup The 3 MQ range meets full humidity ratings with 2 hour warmup Altitude Operating 2 000m 6 561 ft maximum Non operating 12 200m 40 000 ft maximum Vibration 0 7g at 15 Hz 1 3g at 25 Hz 3g at 55 Hz Shock 30g half sine per Mil T 28800 Bench handling per Mil T 28800 2640A 2645A Input Output Capabilities 1 13 The following specifications include the input output functions including the Digital Trigger Out Trigger In and M
340. y Instrument 3000 10 30 1mA 300 mV 3 5V 100 300ma 100 300 mV 3 5V 10 10 WA 300 mV 3 5V 300 ka 100 300 10 3 0V 3 5V 3 MQ 1000 3000 1 3 0V 3 5V Table 1 36 2645A Four Wire Resistance Accuracy Specifications Accuracy 3o input Q 18 C to 28 C 10 C to 60 C Range 90 Day 1 Year 1 Year Slow Fast Slow Fast Slow Fast 3002 02 60 02 12 0295 10 02 20 084 250 084 420 02 60 02 20 02 10 02 30 084 2 52 084 8 40 02 62 29642000 02 102 2 300Q 084 250 84 8400 300kQ 5 802 1 2 5 1502 1 3kQ 2 1 3360 4 2 8 4 1 3 1 2 120kQ 13 2 2 200 5 46 4 2 8 4 200 2645A Two Wire Resistance Measurement Specifications 1 33 The 26454 specifications for the two wire resistance measurement function is based on the four wire resistance measurement specification above except you add a 700 to 1000 ohm positive offset This value varies for each channel and temperature gradient nominal 1 C 1 23 NetDAQ Service Manual 1 24 2645A Four Wire RTD per ITS 1990 Measurement Specifications 1 34 Tables 1 37 and 1 38 provide 2645A specifications for the four wire Resistance Temperature Detector RTD measurement function The four wire measurements use 2 input channels a decade apart e g channels 4 and 14 There is no two wire RTD capabil
341. ys be installed during normal instrument operation W3 is removed only during the initial programming of the Flash Memory during production at the factory Static RAM 2 36 The Static RAM SRAM provides 512K bytes of data storage for the instrument using 128Kx8 SRAM devices The board may also be configured for 2M bytes of data storage using 512Kx8 SRAM devices The RAM address decode output A1U1 127 for the SRAM goes low for any memory access to 1020 A1U30 1034 1035 Two OR gates in 1015 are used to select two of the memory chips selects 1020 and 1030 and selects 1034 A1U35 A1R125 or A1R126 is installed depending on the size of the memory chips 1 125 is installed for 128Kx8 SRAMs or AIR126 is installed for 512Kx8 SRAMS Address bit 18 A18 is inverted to A1U20 30 and A1U30 30 to provide an active high chip select when 128Kx8 SRAM chips are used A1U30 and A1U35 are connected to the high 8 bits of the data bus so read accesses are enabled by the Read Upper RD1 A1U30 24 A1U35 24 signal going low and write accesses are enabled by the Write Upper WRU A1U30 29 A1U35 29 signal going low 1020 and 1034 are connected to the low 8 bits of the data bus so read accesses are enabled by the Read Lower RD2 A1U20 24 A1U34 24 signal going low and write accesses are enabled by the Write Lower WRL A1U20 29 A1U34 29 signal going low Theory of Operation 2 Detailed Circuit Descrip

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

CDX-4180R  ピープル自転車 共通取扱説明書PDF版  WARNING  Installations- und Bedienungsanleitung Wechselrichter  55KB - 日立国際電気    Helios brillant.indd  Samsung HMX-S10BP Bruksanvisning  Westinghouse 1-1/2-Inch Specification Sheet  2016 Contract & Application for Exhibit Space  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file